CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

Symantec NetBackup
7.5 for UNIX:
Manage and
Administer
(Appendixes)

100-002743-D
 COURSE DEVELOPERS Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
Cheryl Faulkner Symantec, the Symantec Logo, and VERITAS are trademarks or
Kris Faulkner registered trademarks of Symantec Corporation or its affiliates in
John Gerhardson the U.S. and other countries. Other names may be trademarks of
Lisa Goldring their respective owners.
Tomer Gurantz THIS PUBLICATION IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ALL
Steven Schwartze EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS
Sandy Tipper AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED
Robyn Winkler WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, ARE
DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH
DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID.
LEAD SUBJECT MATTER
EXPERTS SYMANTEC CORPORATION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
Christopher Amidei INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN
Peter Farley CONNECTION WITH THE FURNISHING, PERFORMANCE,
Bob Farnsworth OR USE OF THIS PUBLICATION. THE INFORMATION
CONTAINED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT
Joseph Gallagher
NOTICE.
Micke Ostrom
Robert Owen No part of the contents of this book may be reproduced or
transmitted in any form or by any means without the written
Kleber Saldanha
permission of the publisher.
Christopher Winter
Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Symantec Corporation
TECHNICAL
World Headquarters
CONTRIBUTORS AND 350 Ellis Street
REVIEWERS Mountain View, CA 94043
The NetBackup 7.5 United States
Advisory Board http://www.symantec.com
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

2
 Table of Contents
Appendix A: Labs
Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation).................. A-3
Exercise 1: Starting virtual machines in VMware Workstation.............. A-10
Exercise 2: Logging on to virtual machines (VMware Workstation)...... A-14
Exercise 3: Adjusting the VMware view (VMware Workstation) ........... A-19
Exercise 4: Running basic commands (VMware Workstation) ............. A-20
Exercise 5: Using SSH (VMware Workstation) ..................................... A-22
Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize) ...................................... A-25
Exercise 1: Connecting to the lab environment (Hatsize) ..................... A-32
Exercise 2: Connecting to additional virtual machines (Hatsize) .......... A-35
Exercise 3: Running basic commands (Hatsize) .................................. A-38
Lab 0: Verifying the NetBackup Installation................................................ A-43
Exercise 1: Verifying master server license keys.................................. A-44
Exercise 2: Verifying the lnxmedia media server license keys ........... A-49
Exercise 3: Applying what you have learned ........................................ A-52
Exercise 4: Verifying the OpsCenter installation................................... A-54
Exercise 5: Verifying the NetBackup configuration ............................... A-57
Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup ..................................................................... A-63
Exercise 1: Customizing the Activity Monitor ........................................ A-64
Exercise 2: Managing jobs in the Activity Monitor................................. A-75
Exercise 3: Using NetBackup reports ................................................... A-85
Exercise 4: Optional: Introduction to OpsCenter reports ...................... A-95
Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage....................................... A-101
Exercise 1: Viewing robot and drive configuration settings................. A-102
Exercise 2: Using the Device Monitor to manage tape devices.......... A-107
Exercise 3: Running robtest to verify robot operation...................... A-112
Exercise 4: Monitoring and managing media...................................... A-117
Exercise 5: Running tape reports........................................................ A-126
Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage ........................................ A-131
Exercise 1: Configuring for AdvancedDisk.......................................... A-132
Exercise 2: Managing AdvancedDisk disk pools ................................ A-139
Exercise 3: Configuring and using disk staging .................................. A-151
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups................................................... A-169

Exercise 1: Optimizing client backups using multiple data streams.... A-170
Exercise 2: Optimizing tape drive performance using multiplexing..... A-174
Exercise 3: Optimizing backups using synthetic backups................... A-179
Lab 6: Working with Support .................................................................... A-195
Exercise 1: Viewing, stopping, and starting NetBackup services ....... A-196
Exercise 2: Running NetBackup reports for troubleshooting .............. A-203
Exercise 3: Viewing and setting NetBackup log verbosities ............... A-205
Exercise 4: Enabling NetBackup debug logging ................................. A-207
Exercise 5: Using nbsu and nbcplogs ..................... A-211

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

3 Table of Contents iii
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Appendix B: Lab Solutions
Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation) .................. B-3
Exercise 1: Starting virtual machines in VMware Workstation ............. B-10
Exercise 2: Logging on to virtual machines (VMware Workstation) ..... B-16
Exercise 3: Adjusting the VMware view (VMware Workstation)........... B-24
Exercise 4: Running basic commands (VMware Workstation)............. B-26
Exercise 5: Using SSH (VMware Workstation) .................................... B-29
Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize) ..................................... B-31
Exercise 1: Connecting to the lab environment (Hatsize) .................... B-38
Exercise 2: Connecting to additional virtual machines (Hatsize).......... B-41
Exercise 3: Running basic commands (Hatsize).................................. B-45
Lab 0: Verifying the NetBackup Installation ............................................... B-53
Exercise 1: Verifying master server license keys ................................. B-54
Exercise 2: Verifying the lnxmedia media server license keys........... B-59
Exercise 3: Applying what you have learned........................................ B-62
Exercise 4: Verifying the OpsCenter installation .................................. B-64
Exercise 5: Verifying the NetBackup configuration .............................. B-67
Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup .................................................................... B-73
Exercise 1: Customizing the Activity Monitor ....................................... B-74
Exercise 2: Managing jobs in the Activity Monitor ................................ B-86
Exercise 3: Using NetBackup reports................................................... B-98
Exercise 4: Optional: Introduction to OpsCenter reports..................... B-111
Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage ....................................... B-117
Exercise 1: Viewing robot and drive configuration settings ................. B-118
Exercise 2: Using the Device Monitor to manage tape devices ......... B-124
Exercise 3: Running robtest to verify robot operation ..................... B-129
Exercise 4: Monitoring and managing media ..................................... B-134
Exercise 5: Running tape reports ....................................................... B-147
Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage ....................................... B-151
Exercise 1: Configuring for AdvancedDisk ......................................... B-152
Exercise 2: Managing AdvancedDisk disk pools................................ B-163
Exercise 3: Configuring and using disk staging.................................. B-176
Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups .................................................. B-197
Exercise 1: Optimizing client backups using multiple data streams ... B-198
Exercise 2: Optimizing tape drive performance using multiplexing .... B-204
Exercise 3: Optimizing backups using synthetic backups .................. B-212
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Lab 6: Working with Support.................................................................... B-229

Exercise 1: Viewing, stopping, and starting NetBackup services....... B-230
Exercise 2: Running NetBackup reports for troubleshooting.............. B-237
Exercise 3: Viewing and setting NetBackup log verbosities............... B-239
Exercise 4: Enabling NetBackup debug logging ................................ B-241
Exercise 5: Using nbsu and nbcplogs...................... B-245

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

4iv Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

5
Labs
Appendix A

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

6 A–2 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 A

Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation)

This lab activity provides you with an introduction to the lab delivery environment
used for this course, enabling you to successfully navigate and use the lab systems
provided for the course.
Symantec NetBackup courses may be delivered in a number of settings:
• In a traditional classroom, with physical systems provided for performing lab
activities
• In a virtual classroom, with online access provided to lab systems
Regardless of the setting in which you attend this NetBackup 7.5 Administration
course, the lab environment is provided using virtual lab systems. The lab systems
are deployed using one of two delivery platforms:
• VMware Workstation
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

• The Hatsize delivery platform

The user interfaces provided in these two lab delivery environments differ. This
lab introduction activity provides you with practice navigating and performing
typical activities related to the use of the virtual machines provided for this course.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

7 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–3
 Lab environment overview
The labs for this course are performed within a virtual environment consisting of
six virtual machines, as illustrated on the slide. This virtual environment has been
developed specifically for this course and is described in the following sections.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

8 A–4 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 A

Virtual machine configuration

The lab activities for this course use the six virtual machines identified on the slide
and in Table 1. The introductory page of each lab activity identifies the virtual
machines that are used in the lab activity. Icons, such as those shown in the first
column on the slide, are displayed to indicate which virtual machine is used to
perform each of the lab steps.

System Name Description Fully Qualified Host Name

vtl Virtual tape library with two vtl.example.com
tape drives
lnxmaster NetBackup 7.5 master/EMM/ lnxmaster.example.com
media server
lnxmedia NetBackup 7.5 media server lnxmedia.example.com
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

winclient NetBackup 7.5 client winclient.example.com

lnxclient NetBackup 7.5 client lnxclient.example.com
winserver OpsCenter 7.5 server and winserver.example.com
NetBackup media server
Table 1: Virtual Machine names and descriptions

Note: In the following exercises, the virtual machines are identified by the system
names listed in Table 1.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

9 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–5
 Virtual machine account information
Refer to Table 2 for the logon credentials for each of the virtual machines used in
this lab environment. For most lab steps, log on to the virtual machines using the
student user ID. In some cases, the lab instructions may direct you to log on to a
virtual machine as the Administrator or root user.

System Student Logon Administrator Logon

Credentials Credentials
lnxmaster User: student User: Administrator
Password: training Password: training
lnxmedia User: student User: Administrator
Password: training Password: training
winclient User: student User: Administrator
Password: training Password: training
winserver User: student User: Administrator
Password: training Password: training
lnxclient User: student User: root
Password: training Password: training
vtl User: root
Password: veritas1
Table 2: Virtual Machine logon credentials

Accessing virtual machines

How and where you attend the NetBackup 7.5 Administration class determines
how you access to the virtual machines in the lab environment. Your instructor will
direct you to the appropriate set of lab procedures for the environment you are
using in this class.
• If you are working with VMware Workstation, in either a physical or virtual
classroom, continue to the VMware Workstation introduction section on the
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

following page.
• If you are working with Hatsize, locate and complete the Lab introduction
exercise for Hatsize.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

10A–6 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 A

VMware Workstation introduction

In this lab activity, you become familiar with the lab environment used in the
Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer course, including the methods
used to access the lab systems.
The hands-on portion of this lab activity enables you to perform basic operations
on virtual machines, as shown on the VMware Workstation introduction slide.
Adopting the best practice guidelines provided in this lab enables you to perform
the remaining lab activities of this course more efficiently.

Note: Only use these exercises if the class is using the VMware Workstation lab
environment. Instructions for Hatsize lab environments are located in a
separate lab activity.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Two parallel versions of the lab activities included in this course enable you to
choose the level of detail that suits your NetBackup experience level:
• Appendix A provides step-by-step lab instructions.
• Appendix B provides complete lab instructions and solutions.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

11 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–7
 VMware Workstation lab environment
In the VMware Workstation lab environment, each of the virtual machines is
connected to a single virtual network residing on the host machine. You use the
VMware Workstation user interface on the host machine to access the console of
the virtual machines.
In this lab environment, the majority of lab steps are performed on the NetBackup
7.5 master server that is running on the lnxmaster virtual machine. As you
work through the lab steps, the lab instructions direct you to select the virtual
machine that is used to perform the lab steps.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

12A–8 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 A

VMware Workstation interface

The screen shot on the slide shows the summary view of VMware Workstation
user interface. This view provides access to the virtual machines.
To access the console of a virtual machine, click the tab associated with the name
of the virtual machine. On the slide shown on this page, the tab for the vtl virtual
machine was selected.
If a virtual machine is in the powered-off state, when you click the tab for the
virtual machine, the body of the VMware Workstation user interface provides
information about the virtual machine. The VMware Workstation tool bar and the
Commands area of the user interface enable you to perform operations on the
virtual machine, such as “Power the virtual machine on.”
When the virtual machine is powered on, the body of the VMware Workstation
user interface displays the console of the virtual machine, enabling you to interact
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

with the virtual machine as you would with a physical system.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

13 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–9
 Exercise 1: Starting virtual machines in VMware Workstation

In this exercise, you start the virtual machines in your lab environment. This is
equivalent to booting or powering on the virtual machines.

Note: It is imperative that you start the virtual machines in the order specified in
Table 3. Failure to start the virtual machines in the specified order may
cause tape device failures and the subsequent failure of backup and restore
operations that use the tape devices.

Startup
order Virtual Machine Name Description
1 vtl.example.com Virtual tape library with two
tape drives; shared by
lnxmaster and
lnxmedia
2 lnxmaster.example.com NetBackup 7.5 master/
EMM/media server
3 lnxmedia.example.com NetBackup 7.5 media server
4 winclient.example.com NetBackup 7.5 client
5 lnxclient.example.com NetBackup 7.5 client
6 winserver.example.com OpsCenter 7.5 server and
NetBackup media server
Table 3: Virtual Machine startup order

1 If VMware Workstation is not already running, start it now.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

14A–10 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 The VMware Workstation user interface is displayed, as shown in the
following screen shot.

2 Review the current Devices settings for each virtual machine.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

15 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–11
 vtl

3 Start the vtl virtual machine.

lnxmaster

Note: Always start and stop virtual machines in the specified order, and wait
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

for the previous virtual machine to load prior to starting another virtual
machine.

4 Start the lnxmaster virtual machine.

lnxmedia

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

16A–12 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 5 Start the lnxmedia virtual machine.

winclient A

6 Start the winclient virtual machine.

lnxclient

7 Start the lnxclient virtual machine.

winserver

8 Start the winserver virtual machine.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

17 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–13
 Exercise 2: Logging on to virtual machines (VMware Workstation)

In this exercise, you log on to each virtual machine to become familiar with the
logon procedures and credentials for each system.

Note: Under normal circumstances, it is not necessary to access the console of the
vtl virtual machine. Do not log on to the vtl virtual machine unless
directed to do so by your instructor.

1 Access the console of the lnxmaster virtual machine and log on using the
student user ID.
– User name: student
– Password: training

lnxmaster
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

2 Obtain the fully qualified host name and operating system information for the
system. Record this information in the space provided.

Fully qualified host name:

lnxclient OS version:

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

18A–14 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 3 Obtain the IP address of the eth1 interface of the system. Record this
information in the space provided.

lnxmaster IP address for eth1: A

lnxmedia

4 Access the console of the lnxmedia virtual machine and log on using the
student user ID.

– User name: student

– Password: training

5 Obtain the fully qualified host name and operating system information for the
system. Record this information in the space provided.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Fully qualified host name:

lnxmedia OS version:

6 Obtain the IP address of the eth1 interface of the system. Record this
information in the space provided.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

19 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–15
 lnxmedia IP address for eth1:

winclient

7 Access the console of the winclient virtual machine and log on using the
student user ID.

– User name: student

– Password: training
Record the IP address assigned to this system and the operating system used by
the system.

winclient IP address:
winclient OS version:

lnxclient

8 Access the console of the lnxclient virtual machine and log on using the
student user ID.

– User name: student

– Password: training
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

20A–16 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 A

9 Obtain the fully qualified host name and operating system information for the
system. Record this information in the space provided.

Fully qualified host name:

lnxclient OS version:

10 Obtain the IP address of the eth1 interface of the system. Record this
information in the space provided.

lnxclient IP address for eth1:

winserver
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

11 Access the console of the winserver virtual machine and log on using the
student user ID.

– User name: student

– Password: training

Record the IP address and the operating system version of the system in the
space provided.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

21 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–17
 winserver IP address:
winserver OS version:
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

22A–18 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Exercise 3: Adjusting the VMware view (VMware Workstation)

In this exercise, you adjust the VMware view controls to become familiar with A
navigating a virtual machine.

lnxmaster

1 In the VMware Workstation menus, enable the Quick Switch view.

Note: If the Quick Switch icon is not displayed on the tool bar, modify the tool
bar display of VMware Workstation by selecting View > Toolbars. For
this course, display only the View toolbar, and hide the Power, Snapshot,
ACE, and Replay tool bars.

How is the Quick Switch view different from the default view?

Answer:

2 Change back to the default view.

Note: When working through the lab exercises, use the F11 shortcut to toggle
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

between the default and Quick Switch views, as desired.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

23 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–19
 Exercise 4: Running basic commands (VMware Workstation)

In this exercise, you verify that the virtual machines can communicate using TCP/
IP on the virtual network.

Verifying communications from lnxmaster

1 Access the console of the lnxmaster virtual machine.

lnxmaster

2 On lnxmaster, open a Terminal window.

3 From the command prompt, ping each of the other five virtual machines in
the lab environment using both the fully qualified domain names and the short
names. The domain name is example.com. The names of the remaining
virtual machines are:

– lnxmedia.example.com
– winclient.example.com
– lnxclient.example.com
– winserver.example.com
– vtl.example.com
Was a reply received from each of the virtual machines, indicating that the
lnxmaster master server system can communicate successfully with the
other virtual machines?
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Answer:

Note: If a ping command reports “unknown host” or timeout errors, verify

the command syntax, and then contact the instructor for assistance.

Note: To reinforce a best practice, fully qualified host names are used for
system names throughout the remainder of the course.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

24A–20 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Verifying communications from lnxmedia

1 Access the console of the lnxmedia virtual machine.

lnxmedia

2 On lnxmedia, open a Terminal window.

3 From the command prompt, ping each of the other five virtual machines in
the lab environment using both the fully qualified domain names and the short
names. The domain name is example.com. The names of the remaining
virtual machines are:

– lnxmaster.example.com
– winclient.example.com
– lnxclient.example.com
– winserver.example.com
– vtl.example.com

Was a reply received from each of the virtual machines, indicating that the
lnxmedia system can communicate successfully with the other virtual
machines in the lab environment?

Answer:

Note: To verify network communications from every virtual machine to all other
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

virtual machines in the lab environment, access a command prompt

window or terminal window on each virtual machine and ping all other
systems, using both their fully qualified and short names. Remember, when
the ping command is issued from a UNIX/Linux system, the pings are
sent until the command is manually terminated (use Ctrl+C to terminate the
ping command).

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

25 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–21
 Exercise 5: Using SSH (VMware Workstation)

In this exercise, you establish an SSH connection using PuTTY from winserver
to lnxmaster, lnxmedia, or lnxclient, the Linux-based systems in this
virtual lab environment. An SSH connection may be used when performing
command line operations on the Linux-based client to improve performance of
those operations.

Note: When directed to access the lnxmaster, lnxmedia, or lnxclient

tabs in VMware, as an alternative to clicking on the tabs for these systems
in VMWare Workstation, you can use an SSH connection from the
winserver virtual machine. In some cases, this method of connection
may be preferred for performance reasons.

winserver

1 On the desktop of winserver, use PuTTY to connect to

lnxclient.example.com using SSH and log in as the student user.
– Login: student
– Password: training
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

2 From the remote session into lnxclient, ping winserver by its fully
qualified name (winserver.example.com).

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

26A–22 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Was a reply received from winserver.example.com, indicating that the
lnxclient and winserver systems can communicate successfully using
PuTTY and ping?

A
Answer:

3 Close the PuTTY console window.

End of lab
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

27 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–23
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

28A–24 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 A

Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize)

This lab activity provides you with an introduction to the lab delivery environment
used for this course, enabling you to successfully navigate and use the lab systems
provided for the course.
Symantec NetBackup courses may be delivered in a number of settings:
• In a traditional classroom, with physical systems provided for performing lab
activities
• In a virtual classroom, with online access provided to lab systems
Regardless of the setting in which you attend this NetBackup 7.5 Administration
course, the lab environment is provided using virtual lab systems. The lab systems
are deployed using one of two delivery platforms:
• VMware Workstation
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

• The Hatsize delivery platform

The user interfaces provided in these two lab delivery environments differ. This
lab introduction activity provides you with practice navigating and performing
typical activities related to the use of the virtual machines provided for this course.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

29 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–25
 Lab environment overview
The labs for this course are performed within a virtual environment consisting of
six virtual machines, as illustrated on the slide. This virtual environment has been
developed specifically for this course and is described in the following sections.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

30A–26 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 A

Virtual machine configuration

The lab activities for this course use the six virtual machines identified on the slide
and in Table 1. The introductory page of each lab activity identifies the virtual
machines that are used in the lab activity. Icons, such as those shown in the first
column on the slide, are displayed to indicate which virtual machine is used to
perform each of the lab steps.

System Description Fully Qualified Host Name

Name
vtl Virtual tape library with vtl.example.com
two tape drives
lnxmaster NetBackup 7.5 master/ lnxmaster.example.com
EMM/media server
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

lnxmedia NetBackup 7.5 media lnxmedia.example.com

server
winclient NetBackup 7.5 client winclient.example.com
lnxclient NetBackup 7.5 client lnxclient.example.com
winserver OpsCenter 7.5 server and winserver.example.com
NetBackup media server
Table 1: Virtual Machine names and descriptions

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

31 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–27
 Note: In the following exercises, the virtual machines are identified by the system
names listed in Table 1.

Virtual machine account information

Refer to Table 2 for the logon credentials for each of the virtual machines used in
this lab environment. For most lab steps, log on to the virtual machines using the
student user ID. In some cases, the lab instructions may direct you to log on to a
virtual machine as the Administrator or root user.

System name student Logon Administrator Logon

Credentials Credentials
lnxmaster User: student User: Administrator
Password: training Password: training
lnxmedia User: student User: Administrator
Password: training Password: training
winclient User: student User: Administrator
Password: training Password: training
winserver User: student User: Administrator
Password: training Password: training
lnxclient User: student User: root
Password: training Password: training
vtl User: root
Password: veritas1
Table 2: Virtual Machine logon credentials

Accessing virtual machines

How and where you attend the NetBackup 7.5 Administration class determines
how you access the virtual machines in the lab environment. Your instructor will
direct you to the appropriate set of lab procedures for the environment you are
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

using in this class.

• If you are working with Hatsize, continue to the Hatsize introduction section
on the following page.
• If you are working with VMware Workstation, in either a physical or virtual
classroom, locate and complete the Lab introduction exercise for VMware
Workstation.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

32A–28 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 A

Hatsize introduction
In this lab activity, you become familiar with the lab environment used in the
Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer course, including the methods
used to access the lab systems.
The hands-on portion of this lab activity enables you to perform basic operations
on virtual machines, as shown on the Hatsize introduction slide. Adopting the best
practice guidelines provided in this lab enables you to perform the remaining lab
activities of this course more efficiently.

Note: Only use these exercises if the class is using the hosted Hatsize platform to
access the lab environment. Instructions for VMware Workstation lab
environments are introduced in a separate lab activity.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Two parallel versions of the labs enable you to choose the level of detail that suits
your experience level:
• Appendix A provides step-by-step lab instructions.
• Appendix B provides complete lab instructions and solutions.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

33 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–29
 Hatsize lab environment
Table 4 provides a translation of virtual machine system names referred to in the
lab guide to the corresponding system names in the Hatsize interface. Each system
name is prefixed with K#- (number) in Hatsize.

System
Hatsize Name Description
Name
vtl K#-vtl.example.com Virtual tape library with
two tape drive (not visible
in Hatsize)

lnxmaster K#-lnxmaster.example.com NetBackup 7.5 master/

EMM/media server
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

lnxmedia K#-lnxmedia.example.com NetBackup 7.5 media

server
winclient K#-winclient.example.com NetBackup 7.5 client
lnxclient K#-lnxclient.example.com NetBackup 7.5 client
winserver K#-winserver.example.com OpsCenter 7.5 server
and NetBackup media
server
Table 3: Virtual Machine names and descriptions

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

34A–30 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 A

Hatsize interface
The screen shot on the slide shows the Hatsize interface used to access the virtual
machines included in your lab environment. Instead of using tabs, such as the tabs
displayed in the VMware Workstation user interface, you access Hatsize virtual
machines from the Operations and Window menus. Other key interface elements
include:
• Title Bar: Indicates the currently connected machine and whether you have
control of the machine or are in view-only mode
• Operations: Is used to make the initial connection to virtual machines (other
than the VM that is designated as the Primary VM)
• Window: Is used to switch between active virtual machines, after the initial
connection has been made to the VMs
• System Control: Is used to start, stop, and restart virtual machines
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

• Time Remaining: Indicates the time remaining in the session

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

35 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–31
 Exercise 1: Connecting to the lab environment (Hatsize)

In this exercise, you log on to Hatsize. For each lab environment in Hatsize, a
specific virtual machine is marked as the primary machine. All other machines are
marked as secondary machines. When you connect to the Hatsize interface, you
are initially and automatically connected to the primary machine. In this lab
environment, the primary machine is the virtual machine, lnxmaster.

1 Locate the Hatsize portal URL and login credentials from your registration e-
mail. Record your credentials here:

Hatsize user name:

Hatsize password:

2 In Internet Explorer, open the Hatsize portal URL and log on with your
assigned user name and password.

Solution
The logon screen in the browser is similar to this:
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

End of Solution

3 After logging in, find your class in the Current Classes table and click Enter.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

36A–32 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Sample:

4 In the Agenda for your class, find the Day 1 lab session and click OPEN.

Note: All lab sessions listed for your course are identical. You can connect to
your lab environment using any of the Lab entries listed for the course.

5 Confirm that you see the primary machine connecting. For this course, the
primary machine is lnxmaster.

6 Wait for the first console window to open. This console window is for the
virtual machine designated as the primary machine for this lab environment.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

37 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–33
 The console that is displayed is similar to this screen shot.

lnxmaster

7 Click in the console window and log on to lnxmaster using the following
credentials:

User name student

Password training
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

38A–34 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Exercise 2: Connecting to additional virtual machines (Hatsize)

In this exercise, you connect to additional virtual machines to become familiar A

with switching between systems.

lnxmaster

1 Use the Operations menu to connect to the secondary virtual machine,

lnxmedia.

lnxmedia

2 Click in the console window of the lnxmedia system and log on to the
system using the following credentials:

User name student

Password training

3 Use the Window menu to switch back to lnxmaster.

Note: If you have not yet connected to one of the secondary machines, you are
unable to use the Window menu to switch to the console of that machine.
You must first use the Operations menu to perform a “Connect to
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Secondary” operation to make the initial connection the virtual machine.

lnxmaster

4 Use the Operations menu to connect to the secondary virtual machine,

winclient.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

39 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–35
 winclient

5 Use the Operations menu to send a Ctrl-Alt-Del to the virtual machine.

6 Click in the console window of the winclient system and log on to the
system using the following credentials:

User name student

Password training

7 Use the Operations menu to connect to the secondary virtual machine,

lnxclient.

lnxclient

8 Click in the console window of the lnxclient system and log in to the
system using the following credentials:

User name student

Password training

9 Use the Operations menu to connect to the secondary virtual machine,

winserver.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

winserver

10 Use the Operations menu to send a Ctrl-Alt-Del to the virtual machine.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

40A–36 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 11 Click in the console window of the winserver system and log on to the
system using the following credentials:

User name student

Password training A

12 Use the Window menu to switch back to the lnxmaster virtual machine.

Note: In general, there is no need to log into the vtl virtual machine in your lab
environment. Only log into the vtl virtual machine at the direction of
your instructor.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

41 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–37
 Exercise 3: Running basic commands (Hatsize)

In this exercise, you verify that the virtual machines can communicate using TCP/
IP on the virtual network.

System Name Fully Qualified Host Name

vtl vtl.example.com
lnxmaster lnxmaster.example.com
lnxmedia lnxmedia.example.com
winclient winclient.example.com
lnxclient lnxclient.example.com
winserver winserver.example.com

Verifying communications from lnxmaster

1 Access the console of the lnxmaster virtual machine.

lnxmaster

2 On lnxmaster, open a Terminal window.

3 From the command prompt, ping lnxmedia, using its fully qualified host
name.

Was a reply received to the ping command, indicating that the lnxmaster
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

and lnxmedia systems are able to communicate using the fully qualified host
name?

Answer:

Note: If a ping command reports unknown host or timeout errors, verify the
command syntax, and then contact the instructor for assistance.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

42A–38 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 4 From the command prompt, ping lnxmedia using its short name
(lnxmedia).

Was a reply received, indicating that lnxmaster and lnxmedia systems

are able to communicate using the short host name? A

Answer:

Note: To reinforce a best practice, fully qualified host names are used for
system names throughout the remainder of the course.

5 From the command prompt of lnxmaster, ping each of the remaining

virtual machines in your lab environment, to verify the TCP/IP
communications with each system. Ping each system using both the short and
fully-qualified names. The names of the remaining virtual machines are:

– vtl.example.com
– winclient.example.com
– lnxclient.example.com
– winserver.example.com

Was a reply received, indicating that systems are able to communicate

successfully?

Answer:

Note: If a ping command reports unknown host or timeout errors, verify the
command syntax, and then contact the instructor for assistance.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Verifying communications from lnxmedia

1 Use the Window menu to switch to the console of lnxmedia.

lnxmedia

2 Open a Terminal window and ping each of the following virtual machines,
using both the fully qualified and short names.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
43 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–39
 – lnxmaster.example.com
– vtl.example.com
– winclient.example.com
– lnxclient.example.com
– winserver.example.com

Was a reply received, indicating that systems are able to communicate

successfully?

Answer:

Note: If a ping command reports unknown host or timeout errors, verify the
command syntax, and then contact the instructor for assistance.

Verifying communications from winclient

1 Use the Window menu to switch to the console of winclient.

winclient

2 Open a command prompt and ping each of the following virtual machines,
using both the fully qualified and short names.

– lnxmaster.example.com
– lnxmedia.example.com
– vtl.example.com
– lnxclient.example.com
– winserver.example.com
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Was a reply received, indicating that systems are able to communicate

successfully?

Answer:

Note: If a ping command reports unknown host or timeout errors, verify the
command syntax, and then contact the instructor for assistance.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

44A–40 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Verifying communications from lnxclient

1 Use the Window menu to switch to the console of lnxclient.

lnxclient

2 Open a Terminal window and ping each of the following virtual machines,
using both the fully qualified and short names.

– lnxmaster.example.com
– lnxmedia.example.com
– winclient.example.com
– winserver.example.com

Was a reply received, indicating that systems are able to communicate

successfully?

Answer:

Note: If a ping command reports unknown host or timeout errors, verify the
command syntax, and then contact the instructor for assistance.

Verifying communications from winserver

1 Use the Window menu to switch to the console of winserver.

winserver
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

2 Open a command prompt and ping each of the following virtual machines,
using both the fully qualified and short names.

– lnxmaster.example.com
– lnxmedia.example.com
– winclient.example.com
– lnxclient.example.com
– vtl.example.com

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

45 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–41
 Was a reply received, indicating that systems are communicating successfully?

Answer:

Note: If a ping command reports unknown host or timeout errors, verify the
command syntax, and then contact the instructor for assistance.

Note: In general, you do not need to log in to the vtl virtual machine in your lab
environment. If TCP/IP communications with the vtl virtual machine
indicate a potential issue, notify your instructor.

End of lab
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

46A–42 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 A

Lab 0: Verifying the NetBackup Installation

In this lab, you perform tasks to prepare for the remainder of the course, including:
• Verifying the master server installation and license keys
• Verifying the installation and license keys of two media servers
• Verifying the OpsCenter configuration and license keys
• Verifying the NetBackup device, storage unit, Storage Lifecycle Policy,
volume and volume pool, and policy configuration
• Run backup and restore jobs to verify NetBackup operation.

Note: If you are attending this training as a continuation of the Symantec

NetBackup 7.5 for Windows: Administration course, you can skip this lab
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

activity. You perform the steps in previous lab activities of the course

Two parallel versions of the labs enable you to choose the level of detail that suits
your experience:
• Appendix A provides high level step-by-step lab instructions.
• Appendix B provides complete detailed step-by-step lab instructions and
solutions.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

47 Lab 0: Verifying the NetBackup Installation
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–43
 Exercise 1: Verifying master server license keys

Verifying the NetBackup license keys

In the steps that follow, you verify the NetBackup license key on the master server,
to determine if the license key is valid and, if necessary, add a new, valid
evaluation license key.

Note: A NetBackup evaluation license key is used for purposes of this course.
This license key enables all NetBackup functionality for a limited time. It
is possible that the evaluation license key that was installed at the time the
course was released has expired. If this is the case, a new, valid license key
must be installed before NetBackup can be used.

Verifying the NetBackup license keys

In the steps that follow, you verify the NetBackup license key on the master server,
to determine if the license key is valid and, if necessary, add a new, valid
evaluation license key.

Note: A NetBackup evaluation license key is used for purposes of this course.
This license key enables all NetBackup functionality for a limited time. It
is possible that the evaluation license key that was installed at the time of
the course release has expired. If this is the case, a new, valid license key
must be installed before NetBackup can be used.

lnxmaster
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

1 Log in to the lnxmaster master server using the student user ID.

2 Right-click the Terminal icon on the desktop of your master server system,
lnxmaster, and select Open.

3 Type su - root, and press Enter, to become superuser.

4 Type the command: get_license_key, and press Enter.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

48A–44 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 5 When the menu is displayed, type F, and press enter to List Active License
Keys.

6 When prompted to Enter the name of the host, press Enter to accept the
A
default, lnxmaster.example.com

7 The output of the command displays information about the NetBackup license
key or keys for the system. Locate and record the

Host:
Product:
Expires (date):

8 Is the NetBackup license key still valid, or has it expired?

Answer:

9 If the NetBackup license key on your master server has expired, perform the
following steps to add a new, valid NetBackup evaluation license key.

Note: If the license key on your master server is valid, review the following steps
for adding a license key to the master server system.

10 Contact your instructor to obtain a valid NetBackup license key. Record the
new license key in the space provided:
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

NetBackup license key:

11 In the menu, type A (Add a License Key), and press Enter.

12 When prompted to Enter license key, type the license key provided by your
instructor, and press Enter.

13 Note the results of the adding the license key.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

49 Lab 0: Verifying the NetBackup Installation
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–45
 Note: You must be superuser to enter a license key. You can list license keys
using the get_license_key utility without superuser privileges.

14 When the menu is displayed, type F, and press enter to List Active License
Keys.

15 When prompted to Enter the name of the host, press Enter to accept the
default, lnxmaster.example.com

16 The output of the command displays information about the NetBackup license
key or keys for the system. Locate and record the information in the table.

Host:
Product:
Expires (date):

17 Type q, and press Enter, to Quit License Key Utility.

Viewing, stopping, and starting processes on a NetBackup server

In the following steps, you use NetBackup commands to view, stop, and start the
NetBackup processes on the master server system.

CAUTION Special caution must be used when stopping NetBackup

daemons and processes because that operation disrupts backup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

and restore activity that is in progress at the time that the

operation is performed.

1 At the command prompt, type bpps -a, and press Enter, to list the running
NetBackup processes.

2 Note the long list of processes that is displayed in the command output.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

50A–46 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Note: You must be superuser to run the bpps, netbackup stop and,
netbackup start, commands.

A
3 At the command prompt, type netbackup stop, and press Enter to stop all
running NetBackup processes.

The command takes a few moments to complete.

4 At the command prompt, type bpps -a, and press Enter, to list the running
NetBackup processes.

5 Note that no NetBackup processes are displayed in the command output.

6 At the command prompt, type netbackup start, and press Enter, to start
the NetBackup processes.

7 At the command prompt, type bpps -a, and press Enter, to list the running
NetBackup processes.

8 Note the long list of processes that is displayed in the command output.

9 At the command prompt, type exit, and press Enter, to exit superuser.

Viewing NetBackup master server directory contents

In the steps that follow, you locate key NetBackup installation directories and view
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

the contents of these directories. In addition, you view the Windows PATH
environment variable settings, to verify that important NetBackup directories are
included in the PATH.

lnxmaster

1 Change directory to the /usr/openv/netbackup directory.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

51 Lab 0: Verifying the NetBackup Installation
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–47
 2 List the directory contents and note the directories that reside in the /usr/
openv/netbackup directory, including the bin, Client, db, and logs
directories.

3 Locate the version file, and view the contents of the file.

4 Record the NetBackup version number indicated by the contents of the

version file.

NetBackup version:

5 Locate the bp.conf file, and view the contents of the file.

6 Record the information found in the bp.conf file.

First SERVER entry:

First SERVER entry:

Third SERVER entry:

OPS_CENTER_SERVER_NAME:

7 Execute the command: echo $PATH.

The key NetBackup directories are listed in the table.

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin
/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/admincmd
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/goodies
/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/support
/usr/openv/volmgr/bin
Table 1: Important NetBackup directory paths on UNIX/Linux servers

Note: Additional NetBackup paths may be included in the PATH environment

variable as needed, depending upon whether optional NetBackup-related
software is installed on the system. An example of this optional software is
the OpsCenter Server.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

52A–48 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Exercise 2: Verifying the lnxmedia media server license keys

The evaluation license key that was initially installed on your media server
systems has expired. Before you can continue with the course you must install a A
valid NetBackup license key.

1 Log in to the lnxmedia media server using the student user ID.

2 Right-click the Terminal icon on the desktop of your media server system,
lnxmedia, and select Open.

3 Type su - root, and press Enter, to become superuser.

4 Type the command: get_license_key, and press Enter.

5 When the menu is displayed, type F, and press enter to List Active License
Keys.

6 When prompted to Enter the name of the host, press Enter to accept the
default, lnxmedia.example.com

7 The output of the command displays information about the NetBackup license
key or keys for the system. Locate and record the

Host:
Product:
Expires (date):
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

8 Is the NetBackup license key still valid, or has it expired?

Answer:

9 If the NetBackup license key on your media server has expired, perform the
following steps to add a new, valid NetBackup evaluation license key.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

53 Lab 0: Verifying the NetBackup Installation
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–49
 Note: If the license key on your media server is valid, review the following steps
for adding a license key to the master server system.

10 Contact your instructor to obtain a valid NetBackup license key. Record the
new license key in the space provided:

NetBackup license key:

11 In the menu, type A (Add a License Key), and press Enter.

12 When prompted to Enter license key, type the license key provided by your
instructor, and press Enter.

13 Note the results of the adding the license key.

Note: You must be superuser to enter a license key. You can list license keys
using the get_license_key utility without superuser privileges.

14 When the menu is displayed, type F, and press enter to List Active License
Keys.

15 When prompted to Enter the name of the host, press Enter to accept the
default, lnxmedia.example.com

16 The output of the command displays information about the NetBackup license
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

key or keys for the system. Locate and record the information in the table.

Host:
Product:
Expires (date):

17 Type q, and press Enter, to Quit License Key Utility.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

54A–50 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Viewing, stopping, and starting processes on a NetBackup server
In the following steps, you use NetBackup commands to view, stop, and start the
NetBackup processes on the media server system.

A
CAUTION Special caution must be used when stopping NetBackup
daemons and processes because that operation disrupts backup
and restore activity that is in progress at the time that the
operation is performed.

1 At the command prompt, type bpps -a, and press Enter, to list the running
NetBackup processes.

2 Note the processes that are displayed in the command output.

Far fewer daemons and processes are running on the media server than on the
master server, especially during periods of low backup and restore activity.

Note: You must be superuser to run the bpps, netbackup stop and,
netbackup start, commands.

3 At the command prompt, type netbackup stop, and press Enter.

The command takes a few moments to complete.

4 At the command prompt, type bpps -a, and press Enter, to list the running
NetBackup processes.

5 Note that no NetBackup processes are displayed in the command output.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

6 At the command prompt, type netbackup start, and press Enter, to start
the NetBackup processes.

7 At the command prompt, type bpps -a, and press Enter, to list the running
NetBackup processes.

8 Note the processes that are displayed in the command output.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

55 Lab 0: Verifying the NetBackup Installation
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–51
 Exercise 3: Applying what you have learned

In this lab exercise you apply what you have learned in the previous exercises to
verify the installation of NetBackup 7.5 on an additional Windows-based media
server that is provided in your lab environment.

Scenario
The winserver system in your lab environment is a Windows-based media
server system that is associated with the lnxmaster master server. The
NetBackup 7.5 server and client software has been pre-installed on the
winserver system, but the installation has not been verified.

Objectives and Requirements

Your task is to verify the NetBackup media server and client installation on
winserver, including:
• Verifying the presence of key NetBackup directories and files
• Verifying the version of NetBackup that is installed
• Verifying that key NetBackup directories are included in the PATH
environment variable for the system
• Verifying that a valid NetBackup evaluation license key is installed; and
installing a new, valid evaluation license key, as required
• Verifying that NetBackup services are running on the system

Key Information
The table provides information relating to the configuration of the winserver
media server system.

Host name of system: winserver.example.com

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Host name of master server lnxmaster.example.com

Administrator account password training
student account password training

Obtain a valid NetBackup evaluation license key. Record the key below.

NetBackup evaluation key

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

56A–52 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Verify the Solution
When you have successfully verified the items listed in the Objectives and
Requirements section of this lab exercise, you can be confident that the
winserversystem is ready to be configured for operation as a NetBackup media
server. A

Note: The winserver system is also an OpsCenter 7.5 server in this lab
environment. You verify the OpsCenter installation and use the OpsCenter
user interface in the next lab activity.

Changes made to Windows system to support this lab environment

Note: The Windows 2008 environment has been optimized for simplicity of use
in this lab environment. Some non-default changes include being able to
view file extensions and hidden files and folders, and changing the Local
Security Policy of User Account Control: Run all administrators in Admin
Approval Mode to Disabled to reduce the number of Window's security
authorization prompts that are displayed.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

57 Lab 0: Verifying the NetBackup Installation
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–53
 Exercise 4: Verifying the OpsCenter installation

OpsCenter provides monitoring and reporting capabilities for NetBackup and

other supported backup applications. In this lab exercise, you verify the operation
of OpsCenter, including the verification of the OpsCenter license key. Standard
OpsCenter reporting is a no-charge feature of NetBackup. OpsCenter Analytics
provides for additional reporting capabilities and requires a license key.

1 Access the console of your winserver system.

winserver

2 Log on to winserver using the student user ID.

3 Locate the WebUI Login icon on the desktop of winserver. Right-click the
WebUI Login and select Open.

When the browser window opens, a message is displayed indicating “There is

a problem with this Website’s security certificate”.

4 Click Continue to this website (not recommended).

The OpsCenter log on screen is displayed.

5 Type the default OpsCenter username and password and click Log On.

Username: admin
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Password: password
Domain: OpsCenterUsers(vx) (provided by default)

Note: If the Domain field on the OpsCenter Log On screen is vacant it generally
indicates that the OpsCenter server services may not be running. If you
encounter this situation, notify your instructor.

The OpsCenter Web interface is displayed.

6 Note the primary tabs provided by the OpsCenter interface.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
58A–54 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 – Home
– Monitor
– Manage
– Reports
A
– Search & Hold
– Settings

The Monitor tab is selected by default.

7 Locate and click the Settings tab.

8 Note the sub-tabs under the Settings tab.

– User Preferences
– Configuration
– Views
– Users
– Recipients
– Chargeback

9 Click the Settings > Configuration sub-tab.

10 Note the large number of configuration categories that are listed under the
Settings > Configuration sub-tab, including the NetBackup, Agent, License,
Data Purge, SMTP Server, and ThreatCon tabs.

11 Click the License tab (under Settings > Configuration).

12 Note there is no license keys configured. Base function of OpsCenter does not
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

require a license key.

13 Click the NetBackup tab.

14 Record the name of the NetBackup master server listed under the NetBackup
tab.

NetBackup master server

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

59 Lab 0: Verifying the NetBackup Installation
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–55
 Note: The presence of a master server name under the Settings > Configuration
> NetBackup tab indicates that OpsCenter has been configured to collect
information from that master server.

15 View the information displayed in the General tab located at the bottom of the
OpsCenter user interface.

16 Click to view the Data Collection Status tab to view detailed information
about the information types that have been collected.

17 Feel free to browse the OpsCenter user interface to view the contents of other
tabs provided by the interface.

18 Log out of OpsCenter.

19 Close the Web browser window.

20 Continue to the next exercise.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

60A–56 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Exercise 5: Verifying the NetBackup configuration

NetBackup 7.5 has been pre-installed and configured to enable you to perform A
NetBackup management and administration tasks in a working backup
environment. This exercise provides you with an introduction to the NetBackup
configuration.

Verifying the NetBackup configuration

In the following steps, you verify the NetBackup device, storage unit, volume
pool, media, and policy configuration that is the starting point for this Symantec
NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer course.

1 Access the console of the master server system.

lnxmaster

2 In the open Terminal window on the master server, execute the command,
jnbSA&, to launch the NetBackup Administration Console.

The NetBackup Administration Console login window is displayed.

3 Log in to the NetBackup Administration Console using the user name,

student. (password = training)

The NetBackup Administration Console is displayed.

4 Select Media and Device Management > Devices in the left pane of the
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Administration Console.

5 Verify the NetBackup device configuration by checking for the robot and tape
drives entries in the NetBackup Administration Console.

– Two entries for the TLD(0) robot exist:

› one entry for lnxmaster.example.com
› one entry for lnxmedia.example.com
– Two entries exist for tape drives:
› one entry for QUANTUM SUPERDLT1.000
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
61 Lab 0: Verifying the NetBackup Installation
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–57
 › one entry for QUANTUM SUPERDLT1.001
› Two drive paths exist for each of the tape drives; a path to the drive for
lnxmaster.example.com and a path for
lnxmedia.example.com.

6 Use the Device Monitor to verify that the status of both tape drives is UP, and
that the drive paths to the drives are UP, from each media servers,
lnxmaster.example.com and lnxmedia.example.com.

7 Verify the NetBackup storage unit configuration in the NetBackup

Administration Console. The following storage units should exist:

– advdisk1_stu_lnxmaster
– advdisk2_stu_lnxmaster
– bdisk_stu_lnxmaster
– bdisk_stu_lnxmedia
– catalog_stu_lnxmaster
– tape_stu_lnxmaster
– tape_stu_lnxmedia

8 Verify the NetBackup Storage Lifecycle Policy configuration in the

NetBackup Administration Console. A single SLP should exist:
SLP1_test

9 Verify the volume pool configuration in the NetBackup Administration

Console. The following volume pools should exist:

– CatalogBackup
– DataStore
– duplicate_tapes
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

– NetBackup
– None
– scratch_tapes
– server_tapes

10 Verify the media (tape volumes) configuration in the NetBackup

Administration Console. Entries for the following Media IDs should exist:
090000 through 09000D (14 tapes).

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

62A–58 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 The Media Status, Time Assigned, Images, and Valid Images column
information for the tapes may vary substantially. The majority of the tapes
should be unassigned, and be in the scratch_tapes volume pool. A few
tapes should be in the server_tapes volume pool, and there should be least
one tape is each of the duplicate_tapes and CatalogBackup volume A
pools.

11 Verify the policy configuration in the NetBackup Administration Console.

The following policies should exist:

– catalog_backup
– inlinecopy_backup
– lnxclient_test_bdisk_media
– lnxclient_test_wizard (deactivated)
– winclient_test_bdisk_master
– winclient_test_slp
– winclient_test_tape_master
– winclient_test_wizard (deactivated)

Verifying file system backup operations

In the following steps you perform manual backups to disk and tape storage to
verify the success of the catalog recovery operation.

lnxmaster

1 Select NetBackup Management >Policies in the left pane of the

Administration Console.

2 Run a manual backup of the lnxclient.example.com client using the

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Full schedule of the lnxlcient_test_bdisk_media policy.

3 Use the Activity Monitor to monitor the progress of the backup job. Verify
that the job runs to successful completion. If the job fails, record the status
code, and notify your instructor.

4 Run a manual backup of the winclient.example.com client using the

Full schedule of the winclient_test_bdisk_master policy.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

63 Lab 0: Verifying the NetBackup Installation
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–59
 5 Use the Activity Monitor to monitor the progress of the backup job. Verify
that the job runs to successful completion. If the job fails, record the status
code, and notify your instructor.

6 Run a manual backup of the winclient.example.com client using the

Full schedule of the winclient_test_tape_master policy.

7 Use the Activity Monitor to monitor the progress of the backup job. Verify
that the job runs to successful completion. If the job fails, record the status
code, and notify your instructor.

8 Run a manual backup of the winclient.example.com client using the

Full-slp schedule of the winclient_test_slp policy. This backup
request results in multiple jobs.

9 Use the Activity Monitor to monitor the progress of the resulting backup and
duplication jobs. Verify that all the job runs to successful completion. If any of
the jobs fail, record the status code or codes, and notify your instructor.

Verifying file system restore operations

In the following steps you perform a simple file system restore operation to verify
the ability of NetBackup to successfully restore client file system data.

lnxmaster

1 Use the Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI on the master server system, to
perform a restore of file system data using the following information:
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

– Server to use for the restore: lnxmaster.example.com

– Source client for the restore: winclient.example.com
– Destination client for the restore: winclient.example.com
– Policy type for the restore: MS-Windows
– Restore from the most recent Full Backup that was created using the
winclient_test_tape_master.
– Restore the folder, G:\data\smallfiles, and its contents to the
alternate directory, G:\alt-directory\smallfiles folder.
– Mark the check box for Overwrite existing files

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

64A–60 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 2 View the status of the restore operation using the View Status window of the
Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI.

3 Verify that the status of the restore job is successful.

A

If the restore fails, note any error messages posted in the View Status window.
Access the Activity Monitor to view the entry for the failed restore job.
Record the status code for the failed restore job, and notify your instructor.

4 Close the Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI on the master server system.

End of lab
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

65 Lab 0: Verifying the NetBackup Installation
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–61
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

66A–62 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 A

Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup

In this lab, you perform tasks to reinforce the concepts presented in the lesson,
including:
• Customizing the NetBackup Activity Monitor to enable more efficient
monitoring of NetBackup jobs
• Managing jobs using the suspend, resume, restart, and job priority controls that
are provided in the NetBackup Administration Console
• Using NetBackup reports to enable more efficient management of NetBackup
• Optional: Viewing the available OpsCenter reports and running selected
reports.

Two parallel versions of the labs enable you to choose the level of detail that suits
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

your experience:
• Appendix A provides high level step-by-step lab instructions.
• Appendix B provides complete detailed step-by-step lab instructions and
solutions.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

67 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–63
 Exercise 1: Customizing the Activity Monitor

In this exercise, you customize the NetBackup Activity Monitor to enable you to
more efficiently monitor and manage NetBackup jobs. To accomplish this, you
perform two primary tasks:
• Modifying the Activity Monitor column layout
• Configuring and selecting filters to alter the jobs displayed in the Activity
Monitor.

Customizing the Activity Monitor column layout

By default, the NetBackup Activity Monitor displays a large amount of
information about NetBackup jobs. The job information is provided by displaying
columns of job-related information in a default order on the Activity Monitor
screen. The column layout (the order in which the columns are displayed) can be
customized to be displayed according the preference of the backup administrator.
In the following steps, you customize the layout of the Activity Monitor to match a
set of administrator-provided criteria.

1 Access the console of the master server system.

lnxmaster

2 Right-click the Terminal icon, located on the desktop of the master server
system, and select Open.

3 In the Terminal window, execute the command, jnbSA&, to launch the

NetBackup Administration Console.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

The NetBackup Administration Console login window is displayed.

4 Log in to the NetBackup Administration Console using the user name,

student. (password = training)

5 Click the Activity Monitor object in the left pane of the Administration
Console.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

68A–64 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 The Activity Monitor displays entries for recent jobs. By default, entries for
jobs are retained for 78 hours following the completion of the job. After the 78
hours have elapsed, the entry for the job is eligible for automatic deletion from
the jobs database the next time the job cleanup process runs.

Note: The duration for which completed jobs are retained in the jobs database can
be altered. For details, refer to the Symantec NetBackup Administrator’s
Guide, Volume 1, Release 7.5.

If you are completing this lesson as part of the Symantec NetBackup 7.5 for A
Unix: Administration or Symantec NetBackup 7.5 for Unix: Install, Configure,
and Deploy courses, multiple jobs are displayed in the Activity Monitor as a
result of tasks you performed in previous lab activities of the course.

6 Look briefly at the column headings displayed in the Activity Monitor. All
available columns are displayed by default.

7 Click the entry for any job displayed in the Activity Monitor, to highlight the
job.

8 Select View > Column Layout.

The Column Layout window is displayed. This window enables you to

remove columns from the Activity Monitor display, and to change the order in
which the columns are displayed (from left to right). If a column heading has
been hidden, you can display it again.

9 Modify the column layout of the Activity Monitor to display the column
headings in the order listed in the following table:

Column # Heading Column # Heading

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

1 Job ID 11 Media Server

2 Parent Job ID 12 Storage Unit
3 Type 13 Deduplication Rate
4 Status 14 Start Time (and date)
5 Priority 15 End Time (and date)
6 State 16 % Complete (Estimated)
Table 1: Activity Monitor column layout example

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

69 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–65
 7 State Details 17 KB Per Second
8 Job Policy 18 Kilobytes
9 Job Schedule 19 Files
10 Client 20 Attempt
Table 1: Activity Monitor column layout example

Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to relocate the selected column.
The Show and Hide buttons can be used to display the column in the Activity
Monitor or hide it from view.

10 When you have completed the column layout changes, click OK to close the
Column Layout window.

11 View the Activity Monitor display and verify that the column layout matches
the specifications provided by the backup administrator.

Note: You can further customize the Activity Monitor column layout to meet
your personal preference at any time.

Using job filters to filter the Activity Monitor jobs display

Busy computing environments that run hundreds or thousands of backup and other
job types per day, present a challenge to the backup administrators that monitor
and manage this backup activity. To help the NetBackup administrator address the
challenge, the NetBackup Activity Monitor supports the use of job filters. These
filters enable the administrator to manage the view of the jobs displayed in the
Activity Monitor.
In the next steps, you create job filters to gain experience in using this Activity
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Monitor capability:
• Configure a filter to display only restore jobs
• Configure a filter to display only unsuccessful jobs
• Configure a filter to display only jobs for a specified client system

Creating policies to test the job filters

In the next steps you configure two policies that you use when testing the job
filters that you create later in this exercise.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

70A–66 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 1 Select NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

2 Click the entry for the lnxclient_test_bdisk_media policy, then

select Actions > Copy to New.

The Copy a Policy dialog box is displayed.

3 Type the name of the new policy in the New policy field, and click OK.
A

New policy name: lnxclient_test_failure

The Change Policy - lnxclient_test_failure window is displayed.

4 Make only the following change to the lnxclient_test_failure

policy:

– Access the Backup Selections tab.

– Delete all current entries in Backup Selections.
– Add a Backup Selection entry for: /data/junk

5 Click OK to save the changes to the lnxclient_test_failure policy.

6 Click the entry for the winclient_test_bdisk_master policy, then

select Actions > Copy to New.

The Copy a Policy dialog box is displayed.

7 Type the name of the new policy in the New policy field, and click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

New policy name: winclient_test_failure

The Change Policy - winclient_test_failure window is displayed.

8 Make only the following change to the winclient_test_failure

policy:

– Access the Backup Selections tab.

– Delete all current entries in Backup Selections.
– Add a Backup Selection entry for: G:\data\junk

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

71 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–67
 9 Click OK to save the changes to the winclient_test_failure policy.

Perform manual backup that result in failed jobs

In the steps that follow, you use the policies you just created to perform manual
backup jobs. Due to intended configuration errors in the policies, the backup jobs
that use these policies result in failed backup jobs.

10 Select NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the

Administration Console.

11 Initiate a manual backup of the lnxclient.example.com client using the

Full schedule of the lnxclient_test_failure policy.

12 Initiate a manual backup of the winclient.example.com client using the

Full schedule of the winclient_test_failure policy.

13 Click the Activity Monitor entry in the left pane of the Administration
Console.

lnxmaster

Currently, the Activity Monitor displays entries for all recent jobs. By default,
entries for all jobs are retained for 72 hours (3 days) following the completion of
the job.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Configuring a job filter to display only unsuccessful jobs

In the steps that follow, you configure a job filter to display only jobs that end with
a non-zero status.

1 Click the entry for any job in the right pane of the Activity Monitor, to
highlight the entry for the job.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

72A–68 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 2 Select View > Filter in the Activity Monitor.

The Filter window is displayed.

3 Note that the Filter window has two tabs:

– Basic
– Advanced
A

4 Click the Advanced tab of the Filter window.

5 Use the following parameters to create a jobs filter:

– Field: Status
– Comparison: not equal to
– Value: zero (0)

6 Click Add to List, to add the filter.

The filter is added to the Selected Criteria pane of the Filter window

7 Click the OK button on the bottom of the Filter window to activate the filter.

The Filter window is closed and you are returned to the Activity Monitor.

8 Record your observations of the jobs that are displayed in the Activity
Monitor.

Observations:
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Note: When a jobs filter is applied and in use, the title bar located directly above
the Jobs list displays a (Filter Applied) message. This message is located
at the right side of the title bar.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

73 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–69
 9 Select View > Filter in the Activity Monitor.

The Filter window is displayed.

10 Click the Clear All button to remove the Status filter, then click OK.

After disabling the filter, entries for all jobs are displayed in the Activity
Monitor.

Note: It is important to remember when you have enabled a jobs filter, in order to
avoid being unaware of jobs that are not displayed due to the filter.
Generally, you should disable the jobs filter as soon as you have finished
the task that required the filter.

Configuring a job filter to display only jobs for a specific client

In the steps that follow, you create a jobs filter that displays jobs only for a specific
NetBackup client, lnxclient.example.com.

1 Select View > Filter, to access the Filter window again.

The Filter window is displayed.

2 Click the Advanced tab of the Filter window.

3 Use the following parameters to create a new filter:

– Field: Client
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

– Comparison: equal to
– Value: lnxclient.example.com
– Match case: selected

4 Click Add to List, to add the filter.

The filter is added to the Selected Criteria pane of the Filter window

5 Click OK to close the Filter window and activate the filter.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

74A–70 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 6 Record your observations of the jobs that are displayed in the Activity
Monitor.

Observations:

Note: When a jobs filter is applied and in use, the title bar located directly above
the Jobs list displays a (Filter Applied) message. This message is located A
at the right side of the title bar.

Combining jobs filters to create more complex filters

In the next steps, you create and use filters that combine the use of multiple criteria
to filter the jobs that are displayed in the Activity Monitor.

1 Select View > Filter in the Activity Monitor.

The Filter window is displayed.

2 Click the Advanced tab of the Filter window.

3 Note that the Criteria pane of the Filter window currently contains an entry
for the filter you created previously. That filter uses the Client field as part of
the filtering criteria.

4 Use the following parameters to create an additional filter entry:

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

– Field: Status
– Comparison: not equal to
– Value: zero (0)

5 Click Add to List, to add the filter.

The filter is added to the Selected Criteria pane of the Filter window. There
are now two entries displayed in the Selected Criteria pane:
– Client
– Status

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

75 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–71
 The Filter pane enables you to determine how the filters are used by providing
two primary options:
– Match items that contain ALL of the Criteria (AND)
– Match items that contain at least one of the criteria (OR)

6 Click the radio button to select the Match items that contain at least one of
the criteria (OR) parameter.

7 Click the OK button to activate the filter.

8 Record your observations of the jobs that are displayed in the Activity
Monitor.

Observations:

Note: When a jobs filter is applied and in use, the title bar located directly above
the Jobs list displays a (Filter Applied) message. This message is located
at the right side of the title bar.

9 Select View > Filter in the Activity Monitor.

The Filter window is displayed.

10 Click the Advanced tab of the Filter window.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

11 Click the Match items that contain at least one of the criteria (AND) radio
button, to change the use of the filter criteria.

12 Click the OK button to close the Filter window and activate the filter.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

76A–72 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 13 Record your observations of the jobs that are displayed in the Activity
Monitor.

Observations:

A
Configuring a job filter to display only restore jobs
In the steps that follow, you create a jobs filter that displays only restore jobs.

1 Select View > Filter to access the Filter window.

The Filter window is displayed.

2 Click the Clear All button, to clear the filter criteria.

All entries are removed from the Criteria pane of the Filter window.

3 Use the following parameters to create the filter criteria:

– Field: Type
– Comparison: equal to
– Value: Restore
– Match case: selected

4 Click Add to List, to add the filter criteria.

The filter is added to the Criteria pane of the Filter window.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

5 Click the OK button to close the Filter window and activate the filter.

6 Record your observations of the jobs that are displayed in the Activity
Monitor.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

77 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–73
 Observations:

Note: When a jobs filter is applied and in use, the title bar located directly above
the Jobs list displays a (Filter Applied) message. This message is located
at the right side of the title bar.

7 Select View > Filter to access the Filter window.

The Filter window is displayed.

8 Click the Clear All button, to clear the filter criteria.

All entries are removed from the Criteria pane of the Filter window.

9 Click the OK button to close the Filter window.

After disabling the filter, entries for all jobs are displayed in the Activity
Monitor.

Note: It is important to remember when you have enabled a jobs filter, in order to
avoid being unaware of jobs that are not displayed due to the filter.
Generally, you should disable the jobs filter as soon as you have finished
the task that required the filter.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

78A–74 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Exercise 2: Managing jobs in the Activity Monitor

In this exercise, you view and use the functions that are available in NetBackup to
manage and control jobs. These include the suspend job, resume job, restart job,
cancel job, and change job priority.

Viewing job priorities

In the steps that follow, you view the default NetBackup job priorities and modify A
the Activity Monitor to include the display of the job Priority in the Jobs display.

lnxmaster

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server.

2 Select NetBackup Management > Host Properties in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

3 Click the symbol to the left of the Host Properties entry, to expand Host
Properties.

4 Note the entries that are displayed under Host Properties:

– Master Servers
– Media Servers
– Clients
– Indexing Servers
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

5 Click the Master Servers entry (under Host Properties).

An entry for the master server, lnxmaster.example.com, is displayed in

the right pane of the Administration Console.

6 Click the entry for the master server, lnxmaster.example.com, to

highlight the entry.

7 Select Actions > Properties.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

79 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–75
 The Master Server Properties window is displayed.

8 Note the long list of Properties categories that are displayed in the left pane of
the Master Server Properties window. These are listed in the table.

Host Property category Host Property category

Global Attributes Clean-up
Universal Settings NDMP
Retention Periods SharedDisk
Data Classifications Access Control
Fibre Transport VMware Access Host
Servers Network Settings
Bandwidth Credential Access
Restore Failover Default Job Priorities
General Server Enterprise Vault Hosts
Port Ranges Symantec Products
Media Login Banner Configuration
Timeouts Resource Limit
Client Attributes Preferred Network
Distributed Application Restore Throttle Bandwidth
Mapping
Firewall Resilient Network
Logging --------
Table 2: Master Server Host Properties categories
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

9 Click the Default Job Priorities entry, located in the left pane of the Master
Server Properties window.

10 Record the default Job Priority settings for the following job types:

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

80A–76 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Job Type Default Job Priority Setting
Backup
Catalog Backup
Catalog Recovery
Duplication
Restore
A

11 If a Duplication job and a Restore job entered the NetBackup job queue on
the master server system at the same time, and required the use of the same
resources (Examples: the same tape volume, the same tape drive), which of the
jobs would go active first (assuming that the resources existed to allow only
one of the jobs to run at a time)?

Answer:

Note: You can modify the default Job Priority setting for a particular job type.
Having done so, all jobs of that type use the new default priority, unless
overridden by a specific priority is set for a job.

You can override the default job priority setting for jobs in two ways:
• Modify the Job Priority setting in the policy that is used to initiate the job.
• Modify the Job Priority of the job while the job is in the Queued state, as
displayed in the Activity Monitor.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

12 Click OK to close the Master Server Properties window.

13 Select NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

14 Click the entry for the winclient_test_bdisk_master policy. Then,

right-click the policy and click Change.

The Change Policy - winclient_test_bdisk_master window is

displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

81 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–77
 Note: The Job Priority setting on the Attributes tab of a policy enables the
NetBackup administrator to override the default job priority setting for
backup jobs. The setting used in the policy is applied to all backup jobs
that utilize this policy. As you can see, the default priority setting for
backup jobs is zero (0).

15 Click Cancel to close the Change Policy window without making changes to
the winclient_test_bdisk_master policy.

Configuring a policy to use a non-default Job Priority setting

In the steps that follow, you configure a policy to use a non-default Job Priority
setting, in order to test the management of job priorities in the Activity Monitor.
The new policy allows only full manual backups of the contents of the
G:\data\smallfiles folder of the winclient.example.com client.
The backups are written to a basic disk storage unit on the master server system.
The job priority of the backup jobs generated by the new policy is 500.

1 Perform the following steps to create and modify the new policy:
– Copy the winclient_test_bdisk_master policy to create a new
policy named winclient_test_priority_500.
– Modify the winclient_test_priority_500 policy to make a
single change: Change the Job Priority setting of the policy to 500.

Configuring a policy that enables testing of job management tasks

In the next steps, you configure a policy to facilitate the testing of the job
management tasks that can be performed using the Activity Monitor. The primary
characteristic of this policy is that it is configured to back up a large amount of
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

data, thereby giving you time to test the job management tasks.
Create a new policy allows only full manual backups of the contents of ALL
LOCAL DRIVES of the winclient.example.com client. The backups are
written to a basic disk storage unit on the master server system.

2 Perform the following steps to create and modify the new policy:

– Copy the winclient_test_bdisk_master policy to create a new

policy named winclient_test_ALD.
– Modify the winclient_test_ALD policy to make two changes:

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

82A–78 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 – Select the Take checkpoints every policy Attribute, and set the value for
this parameter to take checkpoint every five (5) minutes. This is the
minimum setting for this parameter.
– Delete the current entries in the Backup Selections tab, and add an entry
for the ALL_LOCAL_DRIVES directive (from the Windows2008
Directive Set).

3 Verify that the winclient_test_ALD policy is visible in the list of policies

displayed in right pane of the NetBackup Administration Console.
A
You are ready to run backup jobs and to view and use the job management
functions provided in the Activity Monitor.

Suspending, resuming, and cancelling jobs in the Activity Monitor

In the steps that follow, you initiate a manual backup job using the
winclient_test_ALD policy. While the resulting manual backup job is
running, you use the Suspend job, Resume job, and Cancel job functions. You
also use the Restart job function to restart a failed job.

1 Select NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

2 Perform a manual backup of the client, winclient.example.com, using

the Full schedule of the winclient_test_ALD policy.

3 Click the Activity Monitor entry in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

4 Locate the entry for the backup that was initiated as a result of your manual
backup request using the winclient_test_ALD policy.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Note: This backup job will take from 4-8 minutes to run, and gives you time to
use the job management functions available in the Activity Monitor. If this
job finishes (see note below), and you need more time to finish the lab
steps, run another manual backup using the winclient_test_ALD
policy.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

83 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–79
 Note: The backup job that uses the winclient_test_ALD policy does not
complete successfully. The ending Job State is Incomplete, and a Status
129 is displayed. This failure is expected. Do not troubleshoot further.

5 View the Job State of the job. When the job is Active, click the entry for the
job, to highlight the job.

6 Select Actions > Suspend Job.

Within a few seconds, the Job State changes to Suspended.

7 With the entry for the job highlighted, select Actions > Resume Job.

Within a few seconds, the Job State changes to Queued, and then to Active.

Note: After resuming the job, the job goes Active assuming that the resources
required by this job are available. If the resources required are not
available, this job remains Queued until the resources become available.

8 With the entry for the job highlighted, select Actions > Cancel Job.

The Cancel Job dialog box is displayed.

9 Click Yes in the Cancel Job dialog box, to cancel the job.

Within a few seconds, the Job State changes to Done.

10 Record the Status of the cancelled job. View the Job Details for the job to find
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

the meaning of this status code.

Status of the cancelled job:

Meaning of the status code:

11 With the entry for the job highlighted, select Actions > Restart Job.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

84A–80 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 12 Observe the Activity Monitor. Does the Job State of the job you re-started
change from Done to Active? Record your observations.

Your observations:

13 Cancel the job again (Actions > Cancel Job). A

Note: The backup job that uses the winclient_test_ALD policy does not
complete successfully. The ending Job State is Incomplete, and a Status
129 is displayed. This failure is expected. Do not troubleshoot further.

Viewing and changing job priorities in the Activity Monitor

In the steps that follow, you initiate three manual backup jobs. All three jobs are
used to back up the same client system, winclient.example.com.
The policies you use to run the manual backups are:
• 1st manual backup uses policy: winclient_test_ALD
• 2nd manual backup uses policy: winclient_test_bdisk_master
• 3rd manual backup uses policy: winclient_test_priority_500
Because the Max jobs per client parameter in the Master Server Host
Properties has a default setting of one (1), only one of the backup jobs for the
client can be active at a time.

Note: Perform the following manual backup jobs in quick succession. From the
time that you initiate the first backup job, you have 5-8 minutes to view job
priority information for the jobs and to change job priorities of the jobs.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

After the first backup job has completed, the remaining two jobs will finish
quickly. If you need more time to complete any un-finished steps, initiate
the three manual backup operations in the same order, and continue.

1 Verify that the Priority column is visible in the Activity Monitor. If it is not,
change the column layout so that the Priority column is displayed.

2 Initiate three Full manual backup jobs of the client,

winclient.example.com, in quick succession using the following
policies:
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
85 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–81
 – 1st - winclient_test_ALD
– 2nd - winclient_test_bdisk_master
– 3rd - winclient_test_priority_500

3 Click the Activity Monitor entry in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

4 Note the three most recent Backup jobs that are added to the Activity Monitor.
These jobs are associated with the manual backups you just initiated.

5 Record the information for the jobs (as obtained from the Activity Monitor):

Policy Name Job ID Job State Priority

winclient_test_ALD
winclient_test_bdisk_master
winclient_test_priority_500

6 Given the Priority setting of the Queued jobs, which of the jobs should run
first - the job that uses the winclient_test_bdisk_master policy, or
the job that uses the winclient_test_priority_500 policy?

Answer:

7 Click the job entry for the Active job (the job that is using the
winclient_test_ALD policy.)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

8 Click Actions, to access the Actions menu.

9 Is the Change Job Priority function available for an Active job?

Answer:

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

86A–82 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 10 Click the entry for the Queued backup job that has the Priority setting of 0, to
highlight the entry for the job. (this job is using the Job Policy,
winclient_test_bdisk_master)

11 Click Actions > Change Job Priority.

The Change Job Priority window is displayed.

12 Type 1000 in the Set the job priority to field, and click OK.
A

13 View the Activity Monitor entry for the job, and verify that the Job Priority of
the Queued job (that uses the winclient_test_bdisk_master policy)
has changed from a setting of 0 to 1000.

14 Click the entry for the Active job, to highlight the entry for the job.

15 Click Actions > Suspend, to suspend the job.

Within a few moments the Job State of the job changes from Active to
Suspended.

16 Describe what happens to the two jobs that were in the Queued Job State.
Which job goes Active first? Record your observations.

Answer:
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

17 Click the entry for the job that has the Suspended Job State (this is the job that
used the winclient_test_ALD policy).

18 Click Actions > Resume Job.

Within a few moments the Job State of the job changes from Suspended to
Active.

19 Allow the job to run to completion.(The backup job may take 5-8 minutes to
complete.)
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
87 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–83
 Note: The backup job that uses the winclient_test_ALD policy does not
complete successfully. The ending Job State is Incomplete, and a Status
129 is displayed. This failure is expected. Do not troubleshoot further.

20 Continue to the next exercise as the backup job is running.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

88A–84 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Exercise 3: Using NetBackup reports

In this exercise, you run NetBackup reports to that provide information that can
enable more effective and efficient management of the backup environment.
The reports available in the NetBackup Administration Console can be divided in
to four general categories:
• General reports - status or problem related reports
• Tape Reports
• Disk Reports A

• Vault Reports

1 Access the console of the master server system.

lnxmaster

2 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server.

3 Select NetBackup Management > Reports in the left pane of the

Administration Console.

4 Click the symbol to the left of the Reports object, to expand Reports.

The reports and report categories that are listed under the Reports object are
listed in the table:

Report Category Report Name

General Status of Backups
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Client Backups
Problems
All Log Entries
Images on Media
Media Logs
Tape Reports Images on Tape
Tape Logs
Table 3: NetBackup report categories and reports
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
89 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–85
 Tape Contents
Tape Summary
Tape Written
Tape Lists
Disk Reports Images on Disk
Disk Logs
Disk Storage Unit Status
Disk Pool Status
Vault Reports Media Going Off-site
Media Coming On-site
Inventory
Container Inventory
Recovery
Lost Media
Non-Vaulted Images
Table 3: NetBackup report categories and reports

5 Click the Reports object, in the left pane of the Administration Console.

A brief description of the first six reports (listed under the General category in
the table) is displayed in the right pane of the Administration Console.

6 Run the Status of Backups report to obtain a listing of all backup jobs for the
client, lnxclient.example.com, that were written by the media server,
lnxmaster.example.com, in the last seven days. Use the report criteria
provided in the table.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Date/Time Range:
Between: Today’s date minus 7days
Earliest available: not selected
and: greyed out (Current Time is selected)
Current Time: selected
Media Server: lnxmaster.example.com
Client: lnxclient.example.com
Job ID: -- blank--
Table 4: Status of Backups report criteria

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

90A–86 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 7 View the output of the report. Consider how the information in this report can
be useful in your backup environment.

Note: A potentially useful approach to evaluating problems pointed out by report

output is to look for shared or common characteristics of the failing jobs
(jobs using the same policy, backing up the same client, writing to the same
media server or storage unit, and so on).
A

8 Run the Client Backups report to obtain a listing of all backup jobs that were
performed in the last seven days, for all clients,. Use the report criteria
provided in the table.

Date/Time Range:
Between: Today’s date minus 7days
Earliest available: not selected
and: greyed out (Current Time is selected)
Current Time: selected
Client: <All Clients> (default)
Table 5: Client Backups report criteria

9 View the output of the report.

The Client Backups report displays a listing of all the backup jobs that
occurred within the specified date and time range, for the specified client, or
for all clients.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Note: Each NetBackup reports includes a default set of columns that are
displayed in the report output. You can customize the reports by altering
the column layout to add, remove, and rearrange the order in which the
report information is displayed.

10 Run the Problems report to obtain a listing of all backup jobs that were run in
the last seven days for the client, winclient.example.com, in which

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

91 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–87
 error messages were posted to the NetBackup error log files. Use the report
criteria provided in the table.

Date/Time Range:
Between: Today’s date minus 7days
Earliest available: not selected
and: greyed out (Current Time is selected)
Current Time: selected
Media Server <All Media Servers> (default)
Client: <All Clients> (default)
Job ID: -- blank -- (default)
Table 6: Problems report criteria

11 Note the contents of the Severity column of the Problems report output.
Record the Severity levels that are present in the output of your Problems
report.

Severity levels in the Problems report

(your answers may vary)

The Problems lists all the problem-related messages that were logged by the
master server within the specified date and time range, for the specified client
or for all clients.
Note that the ending Status of the jobs with which the messages are associated
is not included in the default Problems report output. Not all jobs that include
a problem-related message ended in the failure of the job. You can modify the
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

column layout of the report.

Note: Another useful method of obtaining the information provided by the

Problems report is to run the bperror command using one of the
following: bperror -U -problems -s ERROR -d [mm/dd/yyyy],
or bperror -U -problems -s WARNING -d [mm/dd/yyyy]. The
command option, -d, is used to provide the beginning date for the report.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

92A–88 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 12 Run the Images on Media report. Include information for the client,
lnxclient.example.com, in the report output.

13 Record examples of the two Media Types listed in the report output, and an
example of the Media ID entry associated with each Media Type.

Media Type Contents of Media ID column

The Images on media report obtains the information for the report from the
NetBackup image catalog.

14 Run the Media Logs report to obtain a listing of all media log entries for the
media server, lnxmaster.example.com, that were made in the last day
(24 hours).

Date/Time Range:
Between: Current date and time minus 1 day (24 hours)
Earliest available: not selected
and: greyed out (Current Time is selected)
Current Time: selected
Media Server lnxmaster.example.com
Table 7: Media Logs report criteria

15 Record the Severity levels that are present in the output of the Media Logs
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

report.

Severity levels in the Media Logs report (your answers may vary)

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

93 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–89
 The Media Logs report shows the media errors or the informational messages
that are recorded in the NetBackup error catalog files.

Note: Another useful method of obtaining the information provided by the

Media Logs report is to run the bperror command using one of the
following: bperror -U -media -s ERROR -d [mm/dd/yyyy], or
bperror -U -media -d [mm/dd/yyyy].
The -d command option is used to provide the beginning date for the
report.

16 Click the symbol to the left of the Tape Reports object in the left pane of the
Administration Console, to expand Tape Reports.

The Tape Reports are:

– Images on Tape
– Tape Logs
– Tape Contents
– Tape Summary
– Tape Written
– Tape Lists

17 Run the Tape Lists report, using the default Report Settings (<All Media
owners> and <All Media>).

18 Record the Media ID of all tape volumes listed in the output of the Tape Lists
report.

Media IDs (your answers may vary)

Media ID:
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Media ID:
Media ID:
Media ID:
Media ID:
Media ID:

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

94A–90 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 The default Tape Lists report shows information about all the tape volumes
that are in the assigned state. You can modify the report settings to show tapes
assigned to a specific media server (media owner), or you can filter the report
for a specific Media ID.

19 Record the Media ID listed in the output of the Tape Lists report that has the
highest number of Valid Images.

Media ID with the most valid images (your answers may vary)
A
Media ID:

20 Run the Images on Tape report, using the Report Settings listed in the table.

Client: <All Clients> (default)

Media ID as recorded in the previous step
Table 8: Images on Tape report criteria

The Images on Tape report shows information about all the active backup
images that reside on all assigned tape volumes, or on a specified tape volume.
This information is derived from the NetBackup image catalog. The report
does not show information about backup images that were written to the tape,
but that have expired. Information on expired backup images no longer exists
in the image catalog.

21 Run the Tape Contents report, using the Report Settings listed in the table.

Media Owner: lnxmaster.example.com

Media ID Use the same Media ID that was used to run the
Images on Tape report
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Table 9: Tape Contents report criteria

The Tape Contents report is generated by mounting the specified Media ID,
and reading the backup headers that are recorded on the tape. The report output
displays entries for both active and expired backup images that reside on the
tape. When a backup image expires in the NetBackup image catalog, the
contents of the tape on which the backup images resides are not changed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

95 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–91
 Note: To run the Tape Contents report, NetBackup must mount the tape on a
tape drive and read the backup headers on the tape. This report takes longer
to run than reports that derive their output from the NetBackup catalogs.

22 Click the symbol to the left of the Disk Reports object displayed in the left
pane of the Administration Console, to expand Disk Reports.

The Disk Reports are:

– Images on Disk
– Disk Logs
– Disk Storage Unit Status
– Disk Pool Status

23 Click the entry for the Disk Pool Status report in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

24 Run the Disk Pool Status report using the default Report Settings (<All Disk
Pools>).

Entries for the two configured Disk Pools should be displayed:

– adv_dpool1_lnxmaster
– adv_dpool2_lnxmaster

25 Note the Status, Total Capacity, and Used Capacity information that is
displayed in the report output.

26 Run the Disk Storage Unit Status report using the default Report Settings.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Disk Type: <All Disk Types> (default)

Storage Unit: <All Storage Units> (default)
Table 10: Disk Storage Unit Status report criteria

Entries for the all configured disk-based storage units are displayed.
– bdisk_stu_lnxmaster
– bdisk_stu_lnxmedia
– advdisk1_stu_lnxmaster
– advdisk2_stu_lnxmaster
– catalog_stu_lnxmaster
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
96A–92 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 27 Note that information is included in the report output for storage units
associated with both BasicDisk and DiskPool Disk Types. Used Capacity and
Available Capacity information is included only for disk storage units
associated with BasicDisk Disk Types.

28 Record the Path information for the bdisk_stu_lnxmaster storage unit.

Path for: bdisk_stu_lnxmaster

29 Run the Images on Disk report using the Report Settings shown in the table:

Client: <All Clients> (default)

Disk Type: BasicDisk
Disk Pool: greyed out (not selectable for BasicDisk)
Path: The path for the bdisk_stu_lnxmaster
storage unit (as recorded in the previous step)
Table 11: Images on Disk report criteria

Entries for the all backup images that have been written to the specified disk
Path (for BasicDisk) or Disk Pool and Volume (for AdvancedDisk) are
displayed in the report output.

30 Run the Disk Logs report to obtain a listing of all disk log entries that were
made in the last 7 days (1 week). Use the report settings provided in the table.

Date/Time Range:
Between: Current date and time minus 7 days
Earliest available: not selected
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

and: greyed out (Current Time is selected)

Current Time: selected
Media Server: <All Media Servers> (default)
Disk Type: <All Disk Types> (default)
Table 12: Disk Logs report criteria

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

97 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–93
 31 Record the Severity levels that are present in the output of the Tape Logs
report.

Severity levels in the Tape Logs report (your answers may vary)

32 Run any remaining NetBackup reports that are of interest to you as time
permits.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

98A–94 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Exercise 4: Optional: Introduction to OpsCenter reports

This is an optional lab exercise. Perform the steps in this exercise as time permits,
or based upon your interest in using OpsCenter to monitor and report on your
NetBackup master server environments.
OpsCenter provides approximately seventy-five (75) reports to help you monitor
and manage your backup environments.
A
In this exercise, you access the Reports available in OpsCenter, view the categories
of reports that are available, and run a small number of selected OpsCenter reports.

1 Access the console of the media server, winserver.example.com.

winserver

2 Right-click the WebUI shortcut located on the desktop of

winserver.example.com, and select Open to launch a Web browser
window.

A security certificate message is displayed in the Internet Explorer window.

3 Click the link: Continue to this website (not recommended).

The Web browser window connects to the OpsCenter Web server, and the Log
On page is displayed.

4 Enter the following OpsCenter log on credentials, and click Log On.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

– Username: admin (default OpsCenter administrator account)

– Password: password (default OpsCenter admin account password)
– Domain: OpsCenterUsers(vx) (default OpsCenter domain)

The OpsCenter Web interface is displayed.

Six tabs are displayed near the top of the OpsCenter Web interface:
– Home
– Monitor
– Manage
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
99 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–95
 – Reports
– Search & Hold
– Settings
The Monitor tab is selected by default.

Accessing the OpsCenter reports

In the steps that follow, you navigate to the Report Templates of the OpsCenter
Web interface, and view the available report categories and reports.

5 Click the Reports tab.

The sub-tabs available under Reports are:

– Report Templates
– My Reports
– My Dashboard
– Schedules
– Manage Folders

The Report Templates sub-tab is selected by default.

The standard report categories and reports that are provided in OpsCenter are
listed in the Name (left-most) column of the OpsCenter window.
The Report Templates folder is the top level of the Report Templates
structure.

6 Click the minus (-) symbol to the left of each of the report folders that are listed
under Report Templates, to collapse the structure. After doing so, only the
top-level folders are displayed.

The top-level report category folders are:

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

– Audit Reports
– Backup
– Catalog
– Chargeback
– Client Reports
– Cloud Reports
– Disk & Tape Device Activity
– Hold Reports
– Media Reports
– Performance Reports
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
100
A–96 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 – Policy Reports
– Restore
– Storage Lifecycle Policy
– Workload Analyzer
– Enterprise Vault Archiving

Each of the report category folders can be expanded to reveal the available
reports (and in some cases, additional report sub-category folders).

OpsCenter provides approximately seventy-five (75) reports to help you A

monitor and manage your backup environments. All of these standard reports
are available under the Report Templates.

Note: OpsCenter provides context sensitive Help, including information and

descriptions off the available reports.

7 With the Reports > Report Templates sub-tab selected, click Help in the
OpsCenter tool bar.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Leave the Help window open and refer to it, as necessary, as you work with
OpsCenter reports.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

101 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–97
 Running selected OpsCenter reports
In the steps that follow you run selected OpsCenter reports to see how these
reports can help you monitor and manage your backup environment.

Running the Advanced Success Rate report

In the steps that follow, you locate and run the Advanced Success Rate report.
(Report Templates > Backup > Status and Success Rate > Success Rate >
Advanced Success Rate)

1 Click the plus (+) symbol to the left of the Backup folder, to expand the folder.

2 Locate the Status and Success Rate folder, located under the Backup folder.

3 Click the plus (+) symbol to the left of the Status and Success Rate folder, to
expand the folder.

4 Locate the Success Rate folder, located under the Status and Success Rate
folder.

5 Click the plus (+) symbol to the left of the Success Rate folder, to expand the
folder.

6 Click the link for the Advanced Success Rate report, to run the report.

The output of the report is displayed in the right pane of the OpsCenter Web
interface.

7 Note the reporting period for the report. The default report shows the success
rates for the past 15 days.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Running the Media Utilization report

In the steps that follow, you locate and run the Media Utilization report. (Report
Templates > Media Reports > Media Utilization)

1 Click the minus (-) symbol to the left of the Backup folder, to collapse the
folder.

2 Locate the Media Reports folder, located under the Report Templates folder.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
102
A–98 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 3 Click the plus (+) symbol to the left of the Media Reports folder, to expand
the folder.

4 Click the link for the Media Utilization report, to run the report.

The output of the report is displayed in the right pane of the OpsCenter Web
interface.

5 Note the reporting period for the report. The default report shows media (tape
A
volumes) utilization for the past 14 days.

The report results show the counts of Assigned, Unassigned, Full, Frozen,
Suspended, and Offsite tapes for each day of the reporting period.

Running the Job Success by Client report

In the steps that follow, you locate and run the Job Success by Client report.
(Report Templates > Client Reports > Job Success by Client)

1 Click the minus (-) symbol to the left of the Media Reports folder, to collapse
the folder.

2 Locate the Client Reports folder, located under the Report Templates folder.

3 Click the plus (+) symbol to the left of the Client Reports folder, to expand the
folder.

4 Click the link for the Job Success by Client report, to run the report.

The graphical output of the report is displayed in the right pane of the
OpsCenter Web interface.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

The report results show the successful and failed jobs for each client in a
stacked bar chart.

Running the Current Disk Usage report

In the steps that follow, you locate and run the Current Disk Usage report.
(Report Templates > Disk and Tape Device Activity > Current Disk Usage)

1 Click the minus (-) symbol to the left of the Client Reports folder, to collapse
the folder.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
103 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–99
 2 Locate the Disk and Tape Device Activity folder, located under the Report
Templates folder.

3 Click the plus (+) symbol to the left of the Disk and Tape Device Activity
folder, to expand the folder.

4 Click the link for the Current Disk Usage report, to run the report.

The output of the report is displayed in the right pane of the OpsCenter Web
interface.

The report results show information for configured disk pools, including Total
Capacity, Used Space, Free Space, and Potential Free Space.

The reports you have run are only a small sampling of the reports available in
OpsCenter 7.5. Run additional reports as time permits, and based upon your
interest in OpsCenter.

End of lab
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

104
A–100 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 A

Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage

In this lab, you perform tasks to reinforce the concepts presented in the lesson,
including:
• Viewing robot and drive configuration settings
• Running robtest to verify robot operation
• Using the Device Monitor to view and manage tape drives and drive paths
• Monitoring and managing media using available NetBackup interfaces
• Running tape reports

Two parallel versions of the labs enable you to choose the level of detail that suits
your experience:
• Appendix A provides high level step-by-step lab instructions.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

• Appendix B provides complete detailed step-by-step lab instructions and

solutions.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

105 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–101
 Exercise 1: Viewing robot and drive configuration settings

In this exercise, you view NetBackup robot and tape drive configuration entries in
the NetBackup Administration Console.

Viewing the robot configuration

In the following steps, you view the robot configuration using the NetBackup
Administration Console.

1 Access the console of the master server system.

lnxmaster

2 Log on to the lnxmaster system as student.

Note: You may be logged in to the master server from a previous lab activity. If
you are, you can continue to use that login session.

Note: The NetBackup Administration Console may be open from a previous

lab activity. If it is, you can skip to the first step after the logon steps.

3 Right-click the Terminal icon on the desktop of the master server, and select
Open.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

4 Type jnbSA& at the command prompt, and press Enter.

The NetBackup Administration Console login window is displayed.

5 Login to the NetBackup Administration Console using the student User

name (password = training).

6 The NetBackup Administration Console window is displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

106
A–102 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 7 Select Media and Device Management > Devices > Robots in the left pane
of the Administration Console.

Two entries for the configured robot, TLD(0), are displayed in the right pane of
the Robots interface.
Two entries for the robot exist because the drives in the robot are accessible by
two media servers (lnxmaster.example.com and
lnxmedia.example.com.)

Note: The robot and tape drives were configured using the Device Configuration
Wizard in an earlier lesson of the course.

8 Right-click the top entry for TLD(0) in the Robots (right) pane of the
Administration Console. This entry is associated with the Device Host (media A
server), lnxmaster.example.com.

9 Click Change in the menu.

The Change Robot window is displayed.

10 Note the parameters that are used to configure the robot. Give special attention
to the Robot control portion of the window.

The media server that is the robot control host has the Robot is controlled
locally by this device host radio button selected.

The media server that is not the robot control host has the Robot control is
handled by a remote host radio button selected.

11 Is this media server (lnxmaster.example.com) the robot control host?

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Answer:

12 Click Cancel to close the Change Robot window without making changes to
the robot configuration for the Device Host, lnxmaster.example.com.

13 Right-click the bottom entry for TLD(0) in the Robots (right) pane of the
Administration Console. This entry is associated with the Device Host (media
server), lnxmedia.example.com.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
107 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–103
 14 Click Change in the menu.

The Change Robot window is displayed.

15 Note the parameters that are used to configure the robot. Give special attention
to the Robot control portion of the window.

The media server that is the robot control host has the Robot is controlled
locally by this device host radio button selected.

The media server that is not the robot control host has the Robot control is
handled by a remote host radio button selected.

16 Is this media server (lnxmedia.example.com) the robot control host?

Answer:

17 Click Cancel to close the Change Robot window without making changes to
the robot configuration for the Device Host, lnxmedia.example.com.

Viewing the tape drive configuration

In the following steps, you view the tape drive configuration using the NetBackup
Administration Console.

1 Select Media and Device Management > Devices > Drives in the left pane of
the Administration Console.
Two tape drive entries are displayed in the top, right pane of the Drives
interface.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

The tape drives in this NetBackup environment are accessible and shared by
the media server systems, lnxmaster.example.com and
lnxmedia.example.com.
When a drive is selected (highlighted) in the top pane of the Drives interface,
the bottom pane displays the two drive paths for the drive; one drive path used
by lnxmaster.example.com to access the drive, and the other path used
by lnxmedia.example.com to access the drive.

Note: The robot and tape drives were configured using the Device Configuration
Wizard in an earlier lesson of the course.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

108
A–104 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 2 Right-click the entry for the top tape drive (QUANTUM SUPERDLT1.000)
displayed in the top pane.

3 Click Change in the menu.

The Change Drive window is displayed.

4 Note the path information used by the media servers to access the tape drive,
and the parameters that define the operation of the tape drive.

5 Click Cancel to close the Change Drive window without making changes to
the drive parameter settings.

A
6 Right-click the entry for the bottom drive (QUANTUM SUPERDLT1.001)
displayed in the top pane of the Administration Console.

7 Click Change in the menu.

The Change Drive window is displayed.

8 Note the path information used by the media servers to access the tape drive,
and the parameters that define the operation of the tape drive.

9 Click Cancel to close the Change Drive window without making changes to
the drive parameter settings.

Note: If changes are made to robot or tape drive configuration settings, it is

necessary to stop and restart the NetBackup device manager. After making
changes to the device configuration, Administration console automatically
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

prompts you to stop and restart the device manager.

Stopping and restarting the device manager

In the steps that follow, you stop and restart the NetBackup device manager.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

109 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–105
 CAUTION Use caution when stopping and restarting NetBackup services, as
this action may impact pending and active NetBackup-related
activities.

1 Select Media and Device Management > Devices in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

2 Select Actions > Stop/Restart Media Manager Device Daemon.

The Stop/Restart Media Manager Device Daemon window is displayed.

3 Note the Actions and Options that can be selected in the Stop/Restart Media
Manager Device Daemon window.

– Device Host (media server host name):

– Current status: (not selectable)
– Action:
› Start (greyed out if the Device Manager is currently running)
› Stop (greyed out if the Device Manager is currently stopped)
› Stop/Restart (default setting)
– Options:
› Eject media from standalone drive(s)
› Enable verbose logging

4 Accept the default settings in the Stop/Restart Media Manager Device

Daemon window, and click OK to initiate the operation.

The Stop/Restart Media Manager Device Daemon window is closed, and

NetBackup initiates the stopping and restarting of the device manager, and its
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

related services.

5 Go to the next exercise to verify the status of the tape devices using the Device
Monitor.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

110A–106 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Exercise 2: Using the Device Monitor to manage tape devices

In this exercise, you use the Device Monitor, provided in the NetBackup
Administration Console to view the status of tape drives and disk pools, and to
manage the state of NetBackup storage devices.

lnxmaster

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server.

A
Note: The NetBackup Administration Console may be open from a previous
lab activity.

2 Select Media and Device Management > Device Monitor in the left pane of
the Administration Console.

3 Note that there are two tabs displayed at the bottom of the right pane of the
Device Monitor interface:

– Drives
– Disk Pools

The Drives tab is selected by default.

Viewing tape drive status

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

In the following steps, you use the Device Monitor to view the status of the tape
drives.

4 Record the Drive Name of each of the tape drives that are displayed in the top
pane.

Drive Name:
Drive Name:

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

111 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–107
 5 Note the Path for drives entries in the bottom pane of the Administration
Console.

The tape drives in this lab environment are shared by the media servers,
lnxmaster.example.com and lnxmedia.example.com.
The drive paths displayed in the bottom pane are associated with the tape drive
entry that is currently highlighted in the top pane.
– One drive path entry represents the drive path used by
lnxmaster.example.com to access the tape drive.
– The second drive path entry represents the drive path used by
lnxmedia.example.com to access the tape drive.

Managing tape drive status

In the following steps, you use the Device Monitor to manage the status of the tape
drives and tape drive paths, and to monitor the results.

CAUTION Taking a tape drive from an up to a down status renders the tape
drive unavailable to NetBackup. Use caution when performing this
activity in a production backup environment, to avoid interfering
with NetBackup-related operations that may be in progress.

6 Click the entry for the top tape drive (QUANTUM.SUPERDLT1.000)

displayed in the top pane of the Device Monitor.

7 Select Actions > Down Drive, to down the drive.

The Shared Drive Action window is displayed.

The Drive Action window displays an entry for each of the drives paths that
are associated with the selected tape drive - the paths to the drive for
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

lnxmaster.example.com and lnxmedia.example.com.

8 Click the boxes associated with both drive paths for the drive, for
lnxmaster.example.com and lnxmedia.example.com.

9 Click OK in the Shared Drive Action window to bring the paths for the drive
down.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

112A–108 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 10 Click the Refresh icon on the tool bar (or F5, or View > Refresh) to update
the display of the Device Monitor.

11 View the Control column of the Device Monitor, and record your observations
about the status of the drive (in the top pane) and the drive paths (in the bottom
pane) for the QUANTUM.SUPERDLT1.000 tape drive.

Observations:

12 Record your observations about the status of the drive paths associated with
the QUANTUM.SUPERDLT1.000 tape drive.
A
Observations:
.

Note: When you down a tape drive, all drive paths associated with the drive are
taken down. NetBackup cannot use the drive.

Managing drive paths

In the following steps, you perform the steps to manage the individual drive paths
of a shared tape drive.

1 Click the entry for the top tape drive (QUANTUM.SUPERDLT1.000)

displayed in the top pane of the Device Monitor.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

2 Select Actions > Up Drive, to up the drive.

The Shared Drive Action window is displayed.

3 Click the box (to mark the box) associated with the drive path for the drive for
the Device Host, lnxmaster.example.com.

4 Click OK in the Shared Drive Action window to bring the path to the drive up
(the path to the drive from lnxmaster.example.com was previously
down, as the result of a previous step).

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

113 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–109
 5 Click the Refresh icon on the tool bar (or F5, or View > Refresh) to update
the display of the Device Monitor.

6 View the Control column of the Device Monitor, and record your observations
about the status of the drive (in the top pane) and the drive paths (in the bottom
pane) for the QUANTUM.SUPERDLT1.000 tape drive.

Observations:

7 Record your observations about the status of the drive paths associated with
the QUANTUM.SUPERDLT1.000 tape drive.

Observations:

Note: When a tape drive is shared, you can take a path from one media server
down and allow paths to other media servers to remain operational.

8 Click the entry for the top tape drive (QUANTUM.SUPERDLT1.000)

displayed in the top pane of the Device Monitor.

9 Select Actions > Up Drive, to up the tape drive.

The Shared Drive Action window is displayed.

10 Click the boxes associated with both drive paths for the drive for both Device
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Hosts, lnxmaster.example.com and lnxmedia.example.com.

11 Click OK in the Shared Drive Action window to bring the drive up.

12 Click the Refresh icon on the tool bar (or F5, or View > Refresh) to update
the display of the Device Monitor. This might take a few moments.

13 View the Device Monitor and verify that the QUANTUM.SUPERDLT1.000

tape drive and its associated drive paths are returned to the up status.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

114A–110 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Click the entries for each tape drive, one at a time, so that the drive path entries
for each tape drive are displayed in the bottom pane.

Verify that all drive paths for each tape drive have a status of up.

A
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

115 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–111
 Exercise 3: Running robtest to verify robot operation

In this exercise, you use robtest, the robot test utility provided in NetBackup, to
very the operation of the robotic arm of the tape library that is configured in this
NetBackup environment.

Determining the name of the robot control host

In the following steps, you determine the name of the media server system that
serves as the robot control host for the tape library in the lab environment. The
robtest utility is executed on the media server system that is acting as the robot
control host.

Note: When the robtest utility is running it prevents NetBackup from

controlling the robot. Robot commands issued by NetBackup are ignored
by the robot. Quit robtest when you are finished testing to ensure that
scheduled backups continue to run.

lnxmaster

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server.

Note: The NetBackup Administration Console may be open from a previous

lab activity.

2 Select Media and Device Management > Devices > Robots in the left pane
of the Administration Console.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Two entries for the configured robot, TLD(0), are displayed in the right pane of
the Robots interface.
Two entries for the robot exist because the drives in the robot are accessible by
two media servers (lnxmaster.example.com and
lnxmedia.example.com).
Although both media servers must be able to issue requests to control the
robotic arm of the tape library (Examples: move a tape from a tape slot to a
drive, move a tape from a drive to a tape slot), only one media server is
designated to provide robotic control. That media server is configured as the

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

116A–112 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 robot control host. When the other media server requires a robot operation to
be performed, it communicates to the robot control host, that issues the robotic
commands on its behalf.

3 View the entries for the robot in the right pane of the Administration Console.
The entry for the Device Host that lists the connection information for the
robot (Robotic Path) is the robot control host.

Which media server is the robot control host in this environment?

Robot Control Host?

The media server (Device Host) that is not the Robot Control Host displays the
host name of the robot control host in the Robot Control Host column.
A

Running robtest
In the following steps, you run robtest to test the operation of the robotic
control of your tape library.

Note: robtest is run from the operating system command prompt on the
system that is acting as the robot control host for the robot.

lnxmaster or lnxmedia (robot control host)

1 Access the console of the system that is acting as the robot control host.

2 Right-click the Terminal icon on the desktop of the robot control host, and
select Open.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

3 Type su - root, and press Enter to become superuser. (the password is

training).

4 Type the robtest command, and press Enter.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

117 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–113
 robtest is located in the following directory on NetBackup master and
media server systems:

Windows C:\Program Files\Veritas\Volmgr\bin

UNIX/Linux /usr/openv/volmgr/bin

5 When the Robot Selection menu is displayed, type 1 to select the robot, and
press Enter.

Note: robtest does not display a command prompt. Simply type your
command or selection, and press Enter.

6 Type?, and press Enter. (? displays a list of robtest commands)

The robtest help menu is displayed?.

7 Type s s command, and press Enter. (show slots)

The contents of the tape slots in the robot are displayed.

Note: Note that the robtest output displays the barcodes of the media in the
robot, rather than the NetBackup media IDs that are associated with the
tapes.

8 robtest does not show the contents of all the tape slots on a single screen.
Press return (Enter) to view the entries for the tape slots, until the
READ_ELEMENT_STATUS complete message is displayed.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

9 Type s s 1 command, and press Enter. (show slot 1).

The contents of the tape slot number 1 in the robot is displayed.

10 Type s s 10 command, and press Enter. (show slot 10).

The contents of the tape slot number 10 in the robot is displayed.

11 Type s d command, and press Enter. (show drives).

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

118A–114 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 The contents of both (all) the tape drives in the robot are displayed.

12 Type m s1 d1 command, and press Enter. (move slot1 drive1).

The tape in slot 1 of the robot is moved into drive 1.

13 Type s d command, and press Enter. (show drives).

The contents of the tape drives in the robot are displayed. The barcode of the
tape from slot 1 should be displayed in drive 1.
Verify that the entry for drive 1 indicates “Contains Cartridge = yes”.

14 Type s s 1 command, and press Enter. (show slot 1).

A
The contents of the tape slot number 1 in the robot is displayed.
Verify that the entry for slot 1 indicates “Contains Cartridge = no”.

15 Type m d1 s1 command, and press Enter. (move drive1 slot1).

The tape in drive 1 of the robot is moved into slot 1.

16 Type s s command, and press Enter. (show slots).

The contents of the tape slots in the robot are displayed.

Verify that the tape that was in drive 1 has been returned to its position in slot
1.

17 Type s d command, and press Enter. (show drives).

The contents of the all tape drives in the robot are displayed.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Verify that both tape drives of the robot are unoccupied. There are no tapes in
the drives.

18 Type q, and press Enter. (returns to the robtest menu)

19 When the Robot Selection menu is displayed, type 2 to quit robtest.

You are returned to the command prompt.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

119 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–115
 20 Close the Terminal window.

Note: When robtest is running it prevents NetBackup from controlling the

robot. Robot commands issued by NetBackup are ignored by the robot.
Quit robtest when you are finished testing to ensure that scheduled
backups continue to run.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

120
A–116 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Exercise 4: Monitoring and managing media

In this exercise, you use various NetBackup user interfaces to view and manage
media and media states.
NetBackup provides several methods of viewing and managing media. The
primary media management interfaces include:
• The Media and Device Management > Media interface in the NetBackup
Administration Console
• The available_media script
• The NetBackup Management > Reports interface in the NetBackup
Administration Console
• OpsCenter
• Various command line interfaces (CLIs) A

lnxmaster

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server.

Note: The NetBackup Administration Console may be open from a previous

lab activity.

2 Perform the following steps to create and modify a new policy:

– Copy the winclient_test_tape_master policy to create a new

policy, named winclient_test_tape_media.
– Modify the new policy to make a single change: change the Policy storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

attribute, so that the policy uses the media server storage unit,
tape_stu_lnxmedia, to write backup images of the client,
winclient.example.com, to tape.

3 Perform a manual backup of winclient.example.com, using the Full

schedule of the winclient_test_tape_media policy.

4 Click the Activity Monitor entry in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

121 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–117
 5 Monitor the progress of the most recent backup job. Verify that the job runs to
successful completion (status 0). If the job fails, record the status code, and
notify your instructor.

6 View the Job Details of the job to obtain the Media ID that was used to write
the backup image. Record the Media ID in the space provided.

Media ID:
Table 1: Media ID used for first backup job

Viewing and managing media states

In the following steps you use the NetBackup Administration console and the
available_media script to view and manage the media states of tape volumes.

1 Select Media and Device Management > Media in the left pane of the
Administration Console.
Entries for all Media IDs that exist in the NetBackup catalogs are displayed in
the right pane of the Administration Console.
In this environment, the Media IDs listed are those tape volumes that are
housed in the configured tape library.

2 Click the Refresh icon, located on the tool bar of the Administration Console
(or use F5, or View > Refresh), to update the media information displayed in
the right pane.

Managing frozen media

In the steps that follow you manually freeze a tape and view the impact that the
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Frozen media status has on NetBackup media utilization.

3 Locate and record the Media ID, Media Status, and Volume Pool
information of the tape that was used in the most recent backup job.

Media ID Media Status Volume Pool

server_tapes
Table 2: Information for Media ID used in the most recent backup job

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

122
A–118 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 4 Click the entry for the Media ID listed in the previous step, to highlight the
entry for the tape.

5 Click Actions, on the tool bar of the NetBackup Administration Console.

6 Click Freeze, in the resulting menu.

Note: The bpmedia command can also be used to freeze, unfreeze, suspend,
and unsuspend tape volumes.

7 The Freeze dialog box is displayed.

A
8 Click OK in the Freeze dialog box.

9 Click the Refresh icon, located on the tool bar of the Administration Console
(or use F5, or View > Refresh), to update the media information displayed.

10 Record the Media Status of the tape.

Media Status:

11 Access a Terminal window on the master server.

12 Type su - root, to become superuser.

13 Type the command, and press Enter.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

available_media
The available_media command is located in the following directories on
NetBackup server systems:

Windows: C:\Program
Files\Veritas\NetBackup\bin\goodies
UNIX/Linux: /usr/open/netbackup/bin/goodies

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

123 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–119
 14 View the output of the available_media command. Note that the
command output lists the tapes according to the volume pool they reside in,
and provides retention level, size of the recorded data, and status of the media.
Tapes that are assigned are displayed as ACTIVE in the command output,
while tapes that are unassigned are displayed as AVAILABLE.

Note: The available_media command is a popular command for obtaining

the status of NetBackup media.

15 Locate the entry for the Frozen tape in the available_media command
output.

16 Allow the Terminal window to remain open. You return to this window in
steps later in this exercise.

17 Perform another manual backup of winclient.example.com, using the

Full schedule of the winclient_test_tape_media policy.

18 Click the Activity Monitor entry in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

19 Monitor the progress of the most recent backup job. Verify that the job runs to
successful completion (status 0). If the job fails, record the status code, and
notify your instructor.

20 View the Job Details of the job to obtain the Media ID that was used to write
the backup image. Record the Media ID in the space provided.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Media ID:
Table 3: Media ID used for second backup job

21 Was the same Media ID used for each of the two most recent backup jobs?

Answer:

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

124
A–120 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 22 What is the significance of the Frozen media state.

Answer:

23 Select Media and Device Management > Media in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

24 Click the Refresh icon, located on the tool bar of the Administration Console
(or use F5, or View > Refresh), to update the media information displayed in
the right pane.
A

25 Click the entry for the Media ID that has the Frozen media status.

26 Click Actions, on the tool bar of the NetBackup Administration Console.

27 Click Unfreeze, in the resulting menu.

28 The Unfreeze dialog box is displayed.

29 Click OK in the Unfreeze dialog box.

Note: The bpmedia command can also be used to freeze, unfreeze, suspend,
and unsuspend tape volumes.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

30 Click the Refresh icon, located on the tool bar of the Administration Console
(or use F5, or View > Refresh), to update the Media information displayed.

31 Record the Media Status of the tape.

Media Status:

32 Perform another manual backup of winclient.example.com, using the

Full schedule of the winclient_test_tape_media policy.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
125 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–121
 33 Click the Activity Monitor entry in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

34 Monitor the progress of the most recent backup job. Verify that the job runs to
successful completion (status 0). If the job fails, record the status code, and
notify your instructor.

35 View the Job Details of the job to obtain the Media ID that was used to write
the backup image. Record the Media ID in the space provided.

Media ID:
Table 4: Media ID used for third backup job

36 Record your observations concerning the tape that was used for the third
backup job in this exercise.

Answer:

Managing suspended media

In the steps that follow you manually suspend a tape and view the impact that the
Suspended media status has on NetBackup media utilization.

1 Select Media and Device Management > Media in the left pane of the
Administration Console.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

2 Click the Refresh icon, located on the tool bar of the Administration Console
(or use F5, or View > Refresh), to update the Media information displayed in
the right pane.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

126
A–122 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 3 Locate the entries for the Media IDs used in the two most recent backup jobs.
Record the Media ID, Media Status, and Volume Pool information for the
tapes.

Media ID Media Status Volume Pool

server_tapes
server_tapes
Table 5: Information for Media IDs used in the most recent backup jobs

4 Click the entry for the first Media ID listed in the table, to highlight the entry
for the tape.

5 Click Actions, on the tool bar of the NetBackup Administration Console.

A

6 Click Suspend (in the menu).

7 The Suspend dialog box is displayed.

8 Click OK in the Suspend dialog box.

9 Click the entry for the second Media ID listed in the table, to highlight the
entry for the tape.

10 Click Actions, on the tool bar of the NetBackup Administration Console.

11 Click Freeze (in the menu).

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

12 The Freeze dialog box is displayed.

13 Click OK in the Freeze dialog box.

14 Click the Refresh icon, located on the tool bar of the Administration Console
(or use F5, or View > Refresh), to update the media information displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

127 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–123
 15 Record the Media Status of the tapes.

Media ID Media Status Volume Pool

server_tapes
server_tapes

16 Perform a manual backup of winclient.example.com, using the Full

schedule of the winclient_test_tape_media policy.

17 Click the Activity Monitor entry in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

18 Monitor the progress of the most recent backup job. Verify that the job runs to
successful completion (status 0). If the job fails, record the status code, and
notify your instructor.

19 View the Job Details of the job to obtain the Media ID that was used to write
the backup image. Record the Media ID in the space provided.

Media ID:
Table 6: Media ID used for fourth backup job

20 Select Media and Device Management > Media in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

21 Click the Refresh icon, located on the tool bar of the Administration Console
(or use F5, or View > Refresh), to update the Media information displayed in
the right pane.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

22 What is the significance of the Suspended media state.

Answer:

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

128
A–124 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 23 Access the Terminal window on the master server system. This window was
left open from a previous step in this exercise.

24 Type the command, and press Enter.

available_media

25 View the output of the available_media command.

26 Locate the entries for the Frozen and Suspended tapes in the
available_media command output.

27 Close the Terminal window.

A
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

129 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–125
 Exercise 5: Running tape reports

In this exercise, you use the Tape Summary and Tape Written reports provided in
the NetBackup Administration Console to obtain media status and utilization
information.

lnxmaster

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server system.

Note: The NetBackup Administration Console may be open from a previous

lab activity.

2 Select NetBackup Management > Reports in the left pane of the

Administration Console.

3 Click the symbol to the left of the Reports object, to expand Reports.

4 Click the symbol to the left of the Tape Reports object, to expand Tape
Reports.

Running the Tape Summary report

In the following you run the Tape Summary report.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

5 Click the Tape Summary report, to select the report.

The Report Settings for the report are displayed in the right pane of the
Administration Console.

6 Select the following Report Settings:

– Media Owner: <All Media owners> (default)

– Volume Pool: <All Volume Pools> (default)
– Verbose Listing: selected
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
130
A–126 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 7 Click Run Report.

The output of the Tape Summary report is displayed on the bottom portion of
the right pane.

8 Note that this report arranges its output by media server (media owners), listing
the number of Active, Full, Suspended, Frozen, Imported tapes for each media
server. In addition, the report lists the expiration dates for tapes associated with
each media server.

Running the Tape Written report

A
In the following you run the Tape Written report.

1 Select NetBackup Management > Reports > Tape Reports in the left pane
of the Administration Console.

2 Click the Tape Written report, to select the report.

The Report Settings for the report are displayed in the right pane of the
Administration Console.

3 Select the following Report Settings:

– Date/Time Range:
› Between: Today’s date minus 1 week / Current time (default)
› and Date/Time: greyed out (default)
› Current Time: selected
– Media Server: <All Media Servers> (default)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

4 Click Run Report.

The output of the Tape Written report is displayed on the bottom portion of
the right pane.

5 Note that this report displays the Media ID that have been written to during the
reporting period specified in the report settings. The default report output
displays the name of the media server that owns each tape, the number of times
the tapes were written to during the reporting period, the total size of the data
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
131 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–127
 that has been written to the tapes, and the retention period associated with the
images on the tape.

Note: You may also use OpsCenter to monitor the status of NetBackup media and
to run media status and utilization reports.

Returning frozen and suspended tapes to the active status

In the final steps of this lab activity, you perform the steps to return frozen and
suspended tapes to the active status using the NetBackup Administration Console.

1 Select Media and Device Management > Media in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

2 Click the Refresh icon, located on the tool bar of the Administration Console
(or use F5, or View > Refresh), to update the Media information displayed in
the right pane.

3 Locate and click the entry for any Media ID that has the Frozen media status.

4 Click Actions, on the tool bar of the NetBackup Administration Console.

5 Click Unfreeze, in the resulting menu.

6 The Unfreeze dialog box is displayed.

7 Click OK in the Unfreeze dialog box.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

8 Click the entry for any Media ID that has the Suspended media status.

9 Click Actions, on the tool bar of the NetBackup Administration Console.

10 Click Unsuspend, in the resulting menu.

11 The Unsuspend dialog box is displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

132
A–128 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 12 Click OK in the Unsuspend dialog box.

13 If there are additional frozen or suspended tape listed, perform the steps
necessary to unfreeze or unsuspend them - as described in the previous steps.

14 Click the Refresh icon, located on the tool bar of the Administration Console
(or use F5, or View > Refresh), to update the Media information displayed.

15 Verify that all tape volumes have a Media Status of Active, as displayed in the
right pane of the Administration Console.

End of lab
A
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

133 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–129
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

134
A–130 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage A
In this lab, you perform tasks to reinforce the concepts presented in the lesson,
including:
• Configuring an AdvancedDisk storage server, and associated disk pools and
storage units
• Managing AdvancedDisk disk pools
• Configuring and using disk staging

Two parallel versions of the labs enable you to choose the level of detail that suits
your experience:
• Appendix A provides high level step-by-step lab instructions.
• Appendix B provides complete detailed step-by-step lab instructions and
solutions.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

135 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–131
 Exercise 1: Configuring for AdvancedDisk

In this exercise, you configure and AdvancedDisk storage server, and associated
disk pools and storage units, using the NetBackup wizards.

Identifying disk storage volumes for AdvancedDisk

In the following steps, you identify the disk volumes on the NetBackup media
server, winserver.example.com, that you use as the target volumes for
NetBackup AdvancedDisk disk pools and storage units.

1 Access the console of the media server system,

winserver.example.com.

winserver

2 Right-click the Computer icon on the desktop of the media server, and select
Open.

3 In the Computer window, note the disks that have been configured on the
master server system, as shown in the screen shot.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

For purposes of this lab environment, the O:, P:, and Q: disk volumes, with
the ADVDSK1, ADVDSK2, and ADVDSK3 volume labels, have been set
aside as the disk volumes to use for the AdvancedDisk disk storage units on the
master server system.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

136
A–132 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Note: The capacities for the disk volumes allocated for the AdvancedDisk feature
in this lab environment are smaller than would be allocated for use in a
production backup environment. These disks are not representative of the
typical disk volume capacities used for NetBackup disk storage units.

4 Close the Computer window on the media server system.

Configuring an AdvancedDisk storage server

In the steps that follow, you use the Configure Disk Storage Servers wizard to
configure an AdvancedDisk storage server associated with the media server
system, winserver.example.com.

1 Access the console of the master server system.

lnxmaster
A

Note: You may be logged in to the master server from a previous lab activity. If
you are, you can continue to use that login session.

Note: The NetBackup Administration Console may be open from a previous

lab activity. If it is, you can skip to the first step after the logon steps.

2 Right-click the Terminal icon on the desktop of the master server, and select
Open.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

3 Type jnbSA& at the command prompt, and press Enter.

The NetBackup Administration Console login window is displayed.

4 Login to the NetBackup Administration Console using the student User

name (password = training).

The NetBackup Administration Console window is displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

137 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–133
 5 Click the entry for the lnxmaster.example.com (Master Server)
displayed at the top of the object tree in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

The NetBackup wizards are displayed in the right pane of the Administration
Console.

6 Use the Configure Disk Storage Servers wizard to configure an

AdvancedDisk storage server associated with the media server,
winserver.example.com.

Use the information provided in the AdvancedDisk storage server

parameters table to configure the storage server.

Storage Server parameter Parameter value/settings

Type of disk storage to configure: AdvancedDisk
Media server: winserver.example.com
Storage server name winserver.example.com
(field is populated automatically)
Table 1: AdvancedDisk storage server parameters

Configuring an AdvancedDisk disk pool

In the steps that follow, you create an AdvancedDisk disk pool using the
Configure Disk Storage Servers wizard.
In this scenario, you create two AdvancedDisk disk pools associated with the
AdvancedDisk storage server on the media server system,
winserver.example.com.
You create the first of these pools as a continuation of running the Configure Disk
Storage Servers wizard.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

You configure the second AdvancedDisk disk pool later in this lab exercise.

7 Continue the use of the Configure Disk Storage Servers wizard to create an
AdvancedDisk disk pool. Use the parameters in the
adv_dpool1_winserver disk pool parameters table to create the disk
pool.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

138
A–134 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Storage Server parameter Parameter value/settings
Disk Pool Type: AdvancedDisk
Storage server: winserver.example.com
Disk volumes for this disk O:
pool: P:
Disk pool name: adv_dpool1_winserver
Comments: media server AdvancedDisk disk pool
High water mark: 98% (default)
Low water mark: 80% (default)
Limit I/O streams: not checked (default)
Table 2: adv_dpool1_winserver disk pool parameters

Creating a storage unit that uses the AdvancedDisk disk pool

In the following steps, you continue the use of the Disk Pool Creation Wizard to
A
create a storage unit that uses the AdvancedDisk disk pool you created in the
previous steps of this lab exercise.

In the previous step of this exercise, you created the adv_dpool1_winserver

AdvancedDisk disk pool. The Disk Pool Creation Wizard remains open from the
creation of the disk pool.
The Storage Unit creation screen is currently displayed.

8 Note that the “Create a Storage Unit that uses the adv_dpool1_winserver”
check box is selected on the Storage Unit creation screen.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

9 Click Next to continue.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

139 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–135
 10 Configure the storage unit using the information provided in the
advdisk1_stu_winserver storage unit parameters table.

Storage Unit parameter Parameter value/settings

Storage unit name: advdisk1_stu_winserver
Media Server:
Use only the selected media selected
servers:
entry for
winserver.example.com selected
Maximum concurrent jobs: 1 (default)
Maximum fragment size: 524288 (default)
Table 3: advdisk1_stu_winserver storage unit parameters

11 Click Finish on the Finished screen to exit the Disk Pool Creation Wizard.

Creating an additional AdvancedDisk disk pool and storage unit

In the following steps, you create an additional AdvancedDisk disk pool and
storage unit associated with the AdvancedDisk storage server on the media server,
winserver.example.com.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

140
A–136 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 1 Use the Configure Disk Pool wizard and the information provided in the
adv_dpool2_winserver disk pool parameters table to create an
additional AdvancedDisk disk pool associated with the AdvancedDisk storage
server on the media server, winserver.example.com.

Storage Server parameter Parameter value/settings

Disk Pool Type: AdvancedDisk
Storage server: winserver.example.com
Disk volumes for this disk Q:
pool:
Disk pool name: adv_dpool2_winserver
Comments: media server AdvancedDisk disk pool
High water mark: 98% (default)
Low water mark: 80% (default)
Limit I/O streams: not checked (default)
Table 4: adv_dpool2_winserver disk pool parameters

End of Solution
A
The Storage Unit Creation screen is displayed after the configuration of the
disk pool has been successfully completed.

2 Allow the Disk Pool Creation Wizard to remain open (with the Storage Unit
Creation screen displayed) to enable the completion of the next steps.

3 Use the Disk Pool Configuration Wizard and the information provided in the
advdisk2_stu_winserver storage unit parameters table to create a
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

141 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–137
 storage unit associated with the disk pool you created in the previous steps
(adv_dpool2_winserver).

Storage Unit parameter Parameter value/settings

Storage unit name: advdisk2_stu_winserver
Media Server:
Use only the selected media selected
servers:
entry for
winserver.example.com selected
Maximum concurrent jobs: 1 (default)
Maximum fragment size: 524288 (default)
Table 5: advdisk2_stu_winserver storage unit parameters

4 Click Finish on the Finished screen to exit the Disk Pool Creation Wizard.

The NetBackup Administration Console is displayed.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

142
A–138 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Exercise 2: Managing AdvancedDisk disk pools

In this exercise, you use the NetBackup Administration Console and other
provided tools to view and manage NetBackup AdvancedDisk disk pools and their
associated disk volumes.

Viewing and managing storage servers and disk pools

In the steps that follow you use the NetBackup Administration to view storage
server entries, and to view and manage disk pool configuration and status.

lnxmaster

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server.

A
Note: The NetBackup Administration Console may be open from a previous
exercise.

Viewing storage server entries

In the next step you locate and verify the storage server entries in the NetBackup
Administration Console.

2 Select Media and Device Management > Credentials > Storage Servers in
the left pane of the Administration Console.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

3 Note the storage server entries for:

– lnxmaster.example.com
– winserver.example.com

Note: You cannot change the storage server configuration using the Credentials
interface of the NetBackup Administration Console.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

143 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–139
 Viewing and managing disk pool properties
In the following steps, you view and verify disk pool configuration settings using
the NetBackup Administration Console.

4 Select Media and Device Management > Devices > Disk Pools in the left
pane of the Administration Console.

The configured disk pools are displayed in the All Disk Pools pane.

5 Note the entries for the disk pools:

– adv_dpool1_lnxmaster
– adv_dpool1_winserver
– adv_dpool2_lnxmaster
– adv_dpool2_winserver

6 Note the information displayed for the disk pools, including: number of
volumes, number of media servers, used capacity, available size, and server
type.

7 Right-click the entry for the adv_dpool1_lnxmaster disk pool, to

highlight the entry.

8 Click Change, in the resulting menu.

The Change Disk Pool window is displayed.

9 Record the disk volume names and available space of the disk pool:

Volume Name Available Space

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

10 Click Cancel to close the Change Disk Pool window without making changes
to the disk pool settings.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

144
A–140 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Note: You can view the configuration settings for any disk pool by right-clicking
the entry for the disk pool, and selecting Change, to access the Change
Disk Pool window.

11 Click the entry for the adv_dpool1_lnxmaster disk pool, to highlight the
entry.

12 Select Actions > Inventory Disk Pools.

The Inventory Disk Pool window is displayed.

13 Select the following parameter in the Inventory Disk Pool window:

Disk Pool: adv_dpool1_lnxmaster

14 Click Start Inventory, to inventory the selected disk pool.

A
15 Note the result of the disk pool inventory that are displayed in the Results pane
of the Inventory Disk Pool window.

Note: You can inventory any configured disk pool using the Inventory Disk Pool
window.

16 Click Close to close the Inventory Disk Pool window.

Monitoring and managing disk pools

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

In the following steps, you use the Device Monitor to view and manage the status
of disk pools and their associated disk volumes.

1 Perform the following steps to create and modify a new policy:

– Copy the winclient_test_bdisk_master policy to create a new
policy, named winclient_test_advdisk1_master.
– Modify the new policy to make a single change: change the Policy storage
attribute, so that the policy uses the master server storage unit,
advdisk1_stu_lnxmaster, to write backup images of the client,
winclient.example.com, to an AdvancedDisk disk pool.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
145 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–141
 2 Perform a manual backup of winclient.example.com, using the Full
schedule of the winclient_test_advdisk1_master policy.

3 Click the Activity Monitor entry in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

4 Monitor the progress of the most recent backup job. Verify that the job runs to
successful completion (status 0). If the job fails, record the status code, and
notify your instructor.

5 View the Detailed Status tab of the Job Details, to identify the specific disk
volume that was used to write the backup image. Record the disk volume in the
space provided.

Disk Volume:

Table 6: Disk Volume used for the backup job

Changing the status of a disk pool - from up to down

In the following steps, you use the NetBackup Administration Console to change
the status of a disk pool (from up to down), and verify the results.

6 Select Media and Device Management > Device Monitor in the left pane of
the NetBackup Administration Console.

The Device Monitor is displayed in the right pane of the Administration

Console.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

7 Note the two tabs located at the bottom of the Device Monitor:

– Drives
– Disk Pools

8 Click the Disk Pools tab, then click Refresh.

The configured disk pools are listed in the Disk Pools pane.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

146
A–142 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 9 Click the entry for the adv_dpool1_lnxmaster disk pool, to highlight the
entry.

10 Select Actions > Down Disk Pool, to down the disk pool.

11 Note that the Disk Pool Status column displays changes to: Down.

12 Perform a manual backup of winclient.example.com, using the Full

schedule of the winclient_test_advdisk1_master policy.

13 Click the Activity Monitor entry in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

14 Monitor the progress of the most recent backup job.

15 Verify that the job fails. Record the status code for the failed job.

A
Status code:

Table 7: Disk Volume used for the backup job

16 Access the Job Details for the failed job.

17 Click the Troubleshooter button on the Detailed Status tab to obtain more
information about the failure.

18 Close the Troubleshooter window, and the Job Details window.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Changing the status of a disk pool - from down to up

In the following steps, you use the NetBackup Administration Console to change
the status of a disk pool (from down to up), and verify the results.

19 Select Media and Device Management > Device Monitor in the left pane of
the NetBackup Administration Console.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

147 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–143
 The Device Monitor is displayed in the right pane of the Administration
Console.

20 Click the Disk Pools tab, located at the bottom of the Device Monitor pane.

The configured disk pools are listed in the Disk Pools pane.

21 Click the entry for the adv_dpool1_lnxmaster disk pool, to highlight the
entry.

22 Select Actions > Up Disk Pool, to return the disk pool to operation.

23 Note that the Disk Pool Status column displays changes to: Up.

Merging disk pools

In the following steps, you use the nbdevconfig command provided in
NetBackup to merge two AdvancedDisk disk pools into a single disk pool.

Scenario
In the first exercise of this lab activity, you configured an AdvancedDisk storage
server on the media server, winserver.example.com. After configuring the
storage server, you configured two AdvancedDisk disk pools and the related
storage units for the storage server.
After some consideration, you have decided to merge the two AdvancedDisk disk
pools on winserver.example.com, to form a single disk pool.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

lnxmaster

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server.

2 Select Media and Device Management > Devices >Disk Pools in the left
pane of the Administration Console.

The configured disk pools are displayed in the All Disk Pools pane.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

148
A–144 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Verify the disk volumes included in the disk pool
In the following steps, you verify the disk volumes that are included in the
adv_dpool1_winserver and adv_dpool2_winserver disk pools
associated with the winserver.example.com storage server.

3 Right-click the entry for the adv_dpool1_winserver disk pool and, in

the menu, click Change.

The Change Disk Pool window is displayed.

Note: Verify that you are viewing the Change Disk Pool window for the
adv_dpool1_winserver disk pool.

4 Record the Volume Names and Available Space for the disk volumes that are
included in the adv_dpool1_winserver disk pool.

Volume Name Available Space

A

5 Click Cancel to close the Change Disk Pool window without making changes
to the disk pool parameter settings.

The list of configured disk pools is displayed in the All Disk Pools pane.

6 Right-click the entry for the adv_dpool2_winserver disk pool and, in

the menu, click Change.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

The Change Disk Pool window is displayed.

Note: Verify that you are viewing the Change Disk Pool window for the
adv_dpool2_winserver disk pool.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

149 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–145
 7 Record the Volume Name and Available Space for the disk volumes that are
included in the adv_dpool2_winserver disk pool.

Volume Name Available Space

8 Click Cancel to close the Change Disk Pool window without making changes
to the disk pool parameter settings.

The configured disk pools are displayed in the All Disk Pools pane.

Downing the disk pools

In the following steps, you change the status of the adv_dpool1_winserver
and adv_dpool2_winserver disk pools to DOWN, in preparation for
merging the disk pools.

1 Select Media and Device Management > Device Monitor in the left pane of
the NetBackup Administration Console.

2 Click the Disk Pools tab in the right pane of the Device Monitor to access the
list of configured disk pools.

3 Right-click the entry for the adv_dpool1_winserver disk pool and, in

the menu click Down Disk Pool.

4 Verify that the Disk Pool Status of the adv_dpool1_winserver disk pool
has changed to Down.

5 Right-click the entry for the adv_dpool2_winserver disk pool and, in

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

the menu click Down Disk Pool.

6 Verify that the Disk Pool Status of the adv_dpool2_winserver disk pool
has changed to Down.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

150
A–146 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Deleting the storage unit for the disk pool to be merged
In the following steps, you locate and remove the storage unit that is associated
with the secondary disk pool (the disk pool that will not be used after the merge
operation is completed is referred to as the secondary disk pool). Removal of the
storage unit associated with the secondary disk pool is required for the merge
operation to be successful.

Note: A storage unit points towards a backup storage device (disk or tape device)
that is used to record and store backup images. Deleting a storage unit does
not delete the backup images that have been written to the storage media.

1 Select NetBackup Management > Storage > Storage Units in the left pane
of the NetBackup Administration Console.

2 Right-click the entry for the advdisk2_stu_winserver storage unit and

click Change in the resulting menu.

The Change Storage Unit window is displayed.

A
3 Verify that the selected storage unit is associated with the
adv_dpool2_winserver disk pool.

Note: Using a Filter is another way to search for all storage units associated with
a particular disk pool.

4 Click Cancel to close the Change Storage Unit window.

5 Right-click the entry for the advdisk2_stu_winserver storage unit and

click Delete in the resulting menu.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

The Delete Confirmation window is displayed.

6 Verify the name of the storage unit that is displayed in the Delete
Confirmation window is advdisk2_stu_winserver.

7 Click OK in the Delete Confirmation window to delete the storage unit.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

151 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–147
 8 Verify that the entry for the advdisk2_stu_winserver storage unit is no
longer displayed in the list of storage units in the right pane of the
Administration Console.

Merging the disk pools

In the following steps, you use the NetBackup nbdevconfig command to
merge the adv_dpool1_winserver and adv_dpool2_winserver disk
pools into a single disk pool named, adv_dpool1_winserver.

Note: The disk pools involved in the merge operation must be in the Down state
when the merge is performed.

1 Access a Terminal window on the master server.

2 Type su - root to become superuser.

3 Type the command, and press Enter:

nbdevconfig -mergedps -stype AdvancedDisk -primarydp

adv_dpool1_winserver -secondarydp
adv_dpool2_winserver

4 When the command execution has been completed, the command prompt is
returned.

The message: Disk pool adv_dpool2_winserver has been successfully

merged into disk pool adv_dpool1_winserver is displayed.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

5 Close the Terminal window.

Verifying the merge of the disk pools

In the following steps you verify the merge of the disk pools, and return the
adv_dpool1_winserver disk pool to the UP status.

1 Select Media and Device Management > Devices > Disk Pools in the left
pane of the NetBackup Administration Console.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

152
A–148 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 2 Click the Refresh button on the tool bar of the Administration Console (or F5,
or View > Refresh) to update the information displayed in the Disk Pools pane
of the Administration Console.

3 Verify that the entry for the adv_dpool2_winserver disk pool is no

longer displayed in the list of disk pools.

Note: If the entry for the disk pool is still displayed after refreshing the display,
close the NetBackup Administration Console, and open a new NetBackup
Administration Console. Then select Media and Device Management >
Devices > Disk Pools, and verify that the disk pool entry has been removed
from the list of disk pools. Notify your instructor if the disk pool entry is
not removed.

4 Right-click the entry for the adv_dpool1_winserver disk pool and, click
Change in the resulting menu.

The Change Disk Pool window is displayed.

A

5 Record the Disk Volumes and the Available Space of the disk volumes that are
included in the adv_dpool1_winserver disk pool.

Volume Name Available Space

6 Verify that the adv_dpool1_winserver disk pool contains three disk

volumes, having merged the Q:\ disk volume into the disk pool.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

7 Click Cancel to close the Change Disk Pool window.

Bringing the merged disk pool up

After merging the two disk pools, the status of the adv_dpool1_winserver
disk pool is Down. The disk pool must be brought Up, so that it can be used for
backup and restore operations. In the following steps, you use the Device Monitor
to change the Disk Pool Status of the adv_dpool1_winserver to Up.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

153 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–149
 1 Select Media and Device Management > Device Monitor in the left pane of
the NetBackup Administration Console.

2 Click the Disk Pools tab in the right pane of the Device Monitor to access the
list of configured disk pools.

Note: Until the display of information is refreshed, the entry for the disk pool that
was merged may be displayed.

3 Click the Refresh icon in the tool bar (or F5, or View > Refresh) to update the
Disk Pool information that is displayed.

4 Right-click the entry for the adv_dpool1_winserver disk pool and, in

the menu click Up Disk Pool.

5 Verify that the Disk Pool Status of the adv_dpool1_winserver disk pool
has changed to Up.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

154
A–150 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Exercise 3: Configuring and using disk staging

In this exercise, you configure the disk staging feature of NetBackup. In this
example, you create a disk staging storage unit (DSSU) that sends backup images
to basic disk. Using a schedule, the DSSU copies the images to a secondary
location, which is a tape storage unit.
In addition to configuring the staging storage unit, and its associated staging
schedule, you configure a policy that directs backup images to be written to the
staging storage unit.
After you configure the staging storage unit and policy, you use the policy to run a
manual backup and observe the results.

Configuring a disk staging storage unit.

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server system.

lnxmaster A

2 Select NetBackup Management > Storage > Storage Units in the left pane
of the Administration Console.

The list of currently configured storage units is displayed in the right pane of
the Administration Console.

3 Select Actions > New > Storage Unit.

The New Storage Unit window is displayed.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

155 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–151
 4 Use the information provided in the staging_stu_lnxmedia storage
unit parameters table to configure the new staging_stu_lnxmedia
storage unit.

Storage unit parameter Parameter value/settings

Storage unit name: staging_stu_lnxmedia
Storage unit type Disk
Disk type: BasicDisk
Media server; lnxmedia.example.com
Absolute pathname to directory: /staging
This directory can exist on the root not selected (default)
files system or system disk
Maximum concurrent jobs: 1 (default)
Reduce fragment size to: not selected (default)
High water mark: 90%
Low water mark: 50%
Enable Temporary Staging Area: Selected
Table 8: staging_stu_lnxmedia storage unit parameters

After clicking the Enable Temporary Staging Area... check box in the New
Storage Unit window, the Staging Schedule becomes available for selection.

5 Click the Staging Schedule button in the New Storage Unit window.

The Disk Staging Schedule window is displayed.

6 Use the information provided in the staging_stu_lnxmedia storage

unit parameters table to configure the Disk Staging Schedule.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Disk staging schedule parameter Parameter value/settings

Name: staging_stu_lnxmedia --
This name cannot be altered.
Priority for relocation jobs 0 (default)
Schedule type: Frequency (default)
Frequency setting: 4 hours
Multiple copies: not selected (default)
Table 9: staging_stu_lnxmedia storage unit parameters
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
156
A–152 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Final destination storage unit tape_stu_lnxmedia
Final destination volume pool: server_tapes
Final destination media owner: any (default)
Use alternate read server: not selected (default)
Start Window: 7 days a week - 24 hours a day
Start day/time: Sun 12:00:00 AM
End day/time: Sat 12:00:00 AM
Table 9: staging_stu_lnxmedia storage unit parameters

7 Click OK to save the changes to the Disk Staging Schedule.

The Disk Staging Schedule window is closed, and the New Storage Unit
window is displayed.

8 Click OK to save the changes to the New Storage Unit,

staging_stu_lnxmedia.

The New Storage Unit window is closed. The list of storage units is displayed A
in the right pane of the Administration Console.

9 Verify that the entry for the staging_stu_lnxmedia storage unit is

displayed in the list of storage units displayed in the right pane of the
Administration Console.

Configuring a policy to perform backups to a staging storage unit

In the steps that follow, you configure a policy that writes its backup images to the
new staging_stu_lnxmedia storage unit.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server system.

lnxmaster

2 Select NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the

Administration Console.

The list of currently configured policies is displayed in the right pane of the
Administration Console.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
157 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–153
 3 Right-click the entry for the inlinecopy_backup policy and, in the
resulting menu, click Copy to New.

The Copy to New Policy dialog box is displayed.

4 Type the policy name in the New policy name field, and click OK.

New policy name: staging_backup

The Change Policy - staging_backup window is displayed.

5 Use the policy attribute information provided in the staging_backup

policy attributes table to configure the policy attributes.

Policy Attribute parameter Parameter value/settings

Policy name: staging_backup
Policy type: MS-Windows
Policy storage: staging_stu_lnxmedia
All other policy attributes: Use current settings for all other
policy attributes
Table 10: staging_backup policy attributes

6 After configuring the policy attributes, click the Schedules tab of the
staging_backup policy.

The Schedules tab of the policy is displayed

7 Delete the Full schedule that is displayed in the Schedules tab.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

8 Verify that no schedules are listed on the Schedules tab of the policy.

9 Click New to add a new schedule.

The Add Schedule - Policy staging_backup window is displayed

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

158
A–154 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 10 Configure a new Full schedule using the parameters listed in the
staging_backup Full schedule attributes table.

Schedule parameter Parameter value/settings

Name: Full
All other schedule Attributes: Use the default settings
Start Window settings: Use the current settings: no
backup windows are open -
enabling only manual backups.
Table 11: staging_backup Full schedule attributes

11 Click the Clients tab of the policy.

12 Verify that winclient.example.com is the only client listed in the

Clients tab.

13 Click the Backup Selections tab of the policy. A

14 Modify the entry for the backup selection that is currently listed, to identify
G:\data as the file system path for the backup selection.

15 Verify that the Backup Selections window now includes only: G:\data.

16 Click OK to save the changes to the staging_backup policy.

17 Verify that the new staging_backup policy is displayed in the list of

policies in the right pane of the NetBackup Administration Console.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Performing and monitoring backups to a disk staging storage unit

In the steps that follow, you perform several backup jobs that write their backup
images to a disk staging storage unit. After each backup job has run successfully
you monitor the disk volume used by the disk staging storage unit, and observe the
behavior of NetBackup.
Earlier in this exercise, you set the staging_stu_lnxmedia storage unit
frequency to four (4) hours.This setting controls the frequency at which
NetBackup relocates images from the storage unit disk volume to the specified
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
159 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–155
 relocation media. To save time in this lab exercise, you simulate the automatic
relocation of the images by performing the manual relocation function provided in
the Administration Console.
As you continue to run backup jobs that write the backup images to the storage
unit, the high water mark of the disk staging storage unit is reached (at 90%).
When this happens, you observe the NetBackup activity that occurs as the backup
images are which have been relocated to long-term storage are purged from the
disk staging storage unit to make room for the new backup images.

1 Access the console of the client system, winclient.example.com.

winclient

2 Log on to the client system (if you are not already logged in) using the student
user ID.

3 Right-click the Computer icon on the desktop of the client system, and select
Open.

4 Right-click the entry for the DATA (G:) drive, and select Open to view the
contents of the disk volume.

5 Right-click the entry for the data folder and select Properties.

6 Record the size of the data folder in the space provided.

Size of G:\data:
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

7 Close the data Properties window.

8 Access the console of the media server system, lnxmedia.example.com.

lnxmedia

9 Log on to the media server system (if necessary) using the student user ID.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
160
A–156 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 10 Right-click the Terminal icon on the desktop of the media server system, and
select Open.

11 View the available disk space on the disk volume that is being used as the disk
staging volume (/staging).

df -h /staging

12 Record the Size and Available space on the /staging volume.

Size:
Available:

Note: Awareness of the amount of the client data that is being backed up to
the staging storage unit, and the size of the disk volume that is being
used as the target for the disk staging storage unit is important to
anticipating the behavior you observe in the upcoming steps.
A

13 Allow the Terminal window to remain open on the media server system. You
return to this window later in this exercise.

14 Access the console of the master server system,

lnxmaster.example.com.

lnxmaster
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

15 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server system.

16 Click NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the

Administration Console.

The list of currently configured policies is displayed in the right pane of the
Administration Console.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

161 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–157
 17 Right-click the staging_backup policy and, in the menu, click Manual
Backup.

The Manual Backup window is displayed.

18 Click OK in the Manual Backup window to initiate the backup operation.

19 Select the Activity Monitor in the left pane of the Administration Console.

20 Note the most recent Job IDs displayed in the Activity Monitor.

Two new Job IDs are listed.

Note the Job Policy information for these two jobs:

– 1st job - _DSSU_POLICY_staging_stu_lnxmedia
– 2nd job - staging_backup

Note: The first job listed is a job that looks for backup images to relocate from
the disk staging disk volume to the specified destination storage location.
In the staging_stu_lnxmedia storage unit you set the frequency for
this activity to 4 hours. For the remainder of this course, a
_DSSU_POLICY_staging_stu_lnxmedia job will run every four
hours to perform automatic relocation of backup images from the staging
volume. The second job is the job that performs the backup of the client
data to the specified staging storage unit.

21 View the Job Details for the Job ID that performs the backup of the client data
to the staging storage unit.

22 Wait until the job has completed successfully, then record the value of the
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Current kilobytes written information that is displayed on the Detail Status

tab of the Job Details window.

Current kilobytes written

Note: If the backup job does not run successfully, record the status code and
notify your instructor.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

162
A–158 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 23 Close the Job Details window.

24 Access the console of the media server system, lnxmedia.example.com.

lnxmedia

25 Access the Terminal window that is open on the media server system. This
window was left open from a previous step in this exercise.

26 View the available disk space on the disk volume that is being used as the disk
staging volume (/staging).

df -h /staging

27 Record the Size and Available space on the /staging volume.

A
Total Size of disk volume:
Available: After backup #1:

Note: The Available on the /staging volume of the media server has
decreased by approximately 600 MBytes.

28 Note the files that are present in the /staging directory.

ls /staging
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

29 There should be four files in the folder. These files are the backup image files
created by the backup of the client that you just performed. Four (4) files are
written to this storage unit folder for each backup image that is written. The
following files are examples of the four files related to a backup image:

– winclient.example.com_1332366114_C1_F1.133236114.img
– winclient.example.com_1332366114_C1_F1.133236114.info
– winclient.example.com_1332366114_C1_HDR.133236114.img
– winclient.example.com_1332366114_C1_HDR.133236114.info

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

163 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–159
 Note: The backup image name includes the name of the client whose data is
included in the backup image (Example: winclient.example.com). The 10-
digit number in the backup image file name (Example: 133236114) is the
CTIME timestamp associated with the start time of the backup job that
created the backup image.

30 Allow the Terminal window to remain open on the media server system. You
return to this window later in this exercise.

31 Access the console of the master server system,

lnxmaster.example.com.

lnxmaster

32 Initiate a second manual backup using the staging_backup policy.

33 Use the Activity Monitor to monitor the progress of the backup job that is
created as a result of the second manual backup operation.

Note that only a single backup job is initiated as a result of the manual backup
operation. (The job that accompanied the first backup job that used the
staging_backup policy was a backup image relocation job. From this
point on, that job will run every four hours.)

34 Verify that the job runs successfully before continuing to the next step. If the
job fails, record the status code and notify your instructor.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

35 Access the console of the media server system, lnxmedia.example.com.

lnxmedia

36 Access the Terminal window that is open on the media server system. This
window was left open from a previous step in this exercise.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

164
A–160 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 37 View the available disk space on the disk volume that is being used as the disk
staging volume (/staging).

df -h /staging

38 Record the Size and Available space on the /staging volume.

Total Size:
Available: - After backup #1:
Available: - After backup #2:

Note: The Free Space on the STAGING (I:) drive of the media server has
decreased again by approximately 600 MBytes.

39 List the files that are present in the /staging directory.

ls /staging
A

Note: There are four files in the folder for each backup image that has been
written to the folder. Because you have performed two backups to the
folder there are a total of eight files currently present in the folder.

40 Record the two unique 10-digit CTIME timestamps associated with the backup
images that reside in the /staging directory. These timestamps are part of the
file names of the backup images. An example of an image file name is:

winclient.example.com_1332446741_C1_F1.1332446741.img

In the example above, the CTIME timestamp is 1332446741.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CTIME timestamp - backup image #1:

CTIME timestamp - backup image #2:

41 Allow the Terminal window to remain open on the media server system. You
return to this window later in this exercise.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

165 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–161
 Disk staging backup image relocation
As you have observed, as backup jobs that write to the staging disk volume
continue, the storage unit approaches its high water mark. If the disk volume
reaches its capacity before backup images have been relocated, subsequent backup
jobs that write to the storage unit fail.
The disk staging schedule that you configured in the staging_stu_lnxmedia
storage unit has a Frequency setting of four (4) hours. This means that every four
hours NetBackup automatically relocates backup images that reside on the storage
unit disk volume to the specified relocation destination. When relocation occurs,
even though the relocated backup images are written to the specified destination
storage unit, the backup images are not immediately removed from the staging
disk volume. Backup images are retained on the staging disk volume until disk
space is needed to write new backup images. At that time, the relocated images are
purged from the staging disk volume.
In the following steps, you perform the manual relocation of backup images that
are resident on the staging_stu_lnxmedia storage unit using the NetBackup
Administration Console. The action simulates the automatic relocation of the
images. In this scenario, the staging schedule of the staging_stu_lnxmedia
storage unit causes backup images to be relocated to tapes in the server_tapes
volume pool.

1 Access the console of the master server system,

lnxmaster.example.com.

lnxmaster

2 Select Media and Device Management > Media in the left pane of the
NetBackup Administration Console.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

The list of Media IDs configured in NetBackup is displayed in the right pane of
the Administration Console.

3 Click the Refresh button on the tool bar of the Administration Console (or F5,
or Actions > Refresh) to refresh the display of the volume information.

4 Record the Media IDs and their associated Volume Pool names of the tapes
that are currently assigned (tapes that are assigned have a date and time stamp

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

166
A–162 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 in the Time Assigned column). The number of tapes and the media IDs that
are currently assigned may vary.

Assigned Media ID: Volume Pool:

5 Select NetBackup Management > Storage > Storage Units in the left pane
of the Administration Console.

The configured storage units are displayed in the right pane of the
Administration Console.

6 Click the entry for the staging_stu_lnxmedia storage unit, to highlight A

the entry for the storage unit.

7 Select Actions > Manual Relocation to Final Destination.

A NetBackup dialog box is displayed.

8 Click OK to acknowledge the message in the dialog box.

9 Access the Activity Monitor to view the results of the manual relocation
operation.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Two jobs are added to the Activity Monitor as a result of the manual
relocation operation (it may take a few moments for the entry for the second
job to appear):
– Backup job - Job Policy: _DSSU_POLICY_staging_stu_lnxmedia
– Duplication job

10 Right-click the Job ID for the Duplication job and select Details. (or select
Actions > Details).

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

167 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–163
 11 View the File List pane located on the Job Overview tab for the Duplication
job. Record the names of the backup images that are displayed in the File List
pane.

Backup ID Example: winclient.example.com_133240979

Backup ID #1:
Backup ID #2:

12 Compare the CTIME timestamps included in the Backup IDs you recorded in
the previous step with the CTIME timestamps you recorded from the /
staging directory of the media server (a few pages previous to this).

Note: The Backup IDs identified in the previous two steps are the backup images
that were relocated. Relocation means that the images have been copied to
the specified destination storage unit (in this case, written to tapes in the
server_tapes pool, using the tape_stu_lnxmedia storage unit).

13 Close the Job Details window for the Duplication job.

14 Select Media and Device Management > Media in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

The Media IDs are displayed in the right pane of the Administration Console.

15 Click the Refresh icon on the tool bar (or F5, or Actions > Refresh) to refresh
the display of the media information.

16 Record the Media IDs of all tapes that are assigned.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Assigned Media ID: Volume Pool:

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

168
A–164 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Note: There should be at least two tapes that are assigned now, that were not
assigned when you recorded the Media IDs of assigned tapes a few minutes
ago. In this scenario, the tapes used in the relocation of images are
members of the server_tapes volume pool.

17 Access the console of the media server system, lnxmedia.example.com.

lnxmedia

18 Access the Terminal window that is open on the media server system. This A
window was left open from a previous step in this exercise.

19 View the available disk space on the disk volume that is being used as the disk
staging volume (/staging).

df -h /staging

20 Record the Size and Available space on the /staging volume.

Total Size:
Available: - After backup #1:
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Available: - After backup #2:

Available: After manual relocation

Note: The client data being backed up during each backup using the
staging_backup policy is about 600 MBytes in size.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

169 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–165
 21 Do you think the next backup of the client using the staging_backup
policy will be successful?

Answer:

22 Has the Available space on the /staging disk volume changed as a result of
the manual relocation of the backup images?

Answer:

23 Allow the Terminal window to remain open on the media server system. You
return to this window later in this exercise.

24 Access the console of the master server system,

lnxmaster.example.com.

lnxmaster

25 Select NetBackup Management > Policies in the right pane of the

Administration Console.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

26 Initiate a third manual backup using the staging_backup policy.

27 Use the Activity Monitor to monitor the progress of the backup job that is
created as a result of the manual backup operation.

28 Verify that the job runs successfully before continuing to the next step. If the
job fails, record the status code and notify your instructor.

29 Access the console of the media server system, lnxmedia.example.com.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
170
A–166 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 lnxmedia

30 Access the Terminal window that is open on the media server system. This
window was left open from a previous step in this exercise.

31 View the available disk space on the disk volume that is being used as the disk
staging volume (/staging).

df -h /staging

32 Record the Size and Available space on the /staging volume.

Total Size:
Available: - After backup #1:
Available: - After backup #2:
Available: After manual relocation: A

Available: - After backup #3:

Note: Backup job #3 was successful because as the disk staging volume reached
its configured high water mark, backup images on the volume were
automatically purged to make room for the new backup image data.

33 Close the Terminal window on the media server system,

lnxmedia.example.com.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

34 Access the console of the master server system,

lnxmaster.example.com.

End of lab

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

171 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–167
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

172
A–168 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups
In this lab, you perform tasks to reinforce the concepts presented in the lesson,
including:
• Optimizing client backup performance using multiple data streams
• Optimizing tape drive performance using multiplexing
• Optimizing backups using synthetic backups A

Two parallel versions of the labs enable you to choose the level of detail that suits
your experience:
• Appendix A provides high level step-by-step lab instructions.
• Appendix B provides complete detailed step-by-step lab instructions and
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

solutions.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

173 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–169
 Exercise 1: Optimizing client backups using multiple data streams

In this exercise, you configure NetBackup to perform backups of a client using

multiple data streams, and perform backup jobs to view the impact that using
multiple data streams can have on client backup performance.

Note: It should not be presumed that the use of multiple data streams when
performing client backups will always result in improved backup
performance. Planning of the policy contents based upon the disk layout on
the client system, and testing of the use of multiple data streams for
performing client backups is advised.

1 Access the console of the client system, winclient.example.com.

winclient

2 Log on to the client system, using the student user ID.

Note: You may be logged on to the client system from a previous lab activity.

3 Right-click the Computer icon on the desktop of the client system, and select
Open.

A Computer window is opened, displaying the drives that are configured on

the client system.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

4 Record the Drive Names and Total size of the disks that are present on the
client, winclient.example com.

Drive Name (letter) Total Size

C:
DATA (G:)

5 Close the Computer window.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

174
A–170 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 6 Access the console of the master server system.

lnxmaster

7 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server.

Note: The NetBackup Administration Console may be open from a previous

lab activity.

8 Select NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the

Administration Console.

9 Copy the winclient_test_advdisk1_master policy to create a new

policy: Make the changes to the new policy as described:

– The new policy name is: winclient_test_multistream

– Change the Policy storage attribute of the new policy to write backup
images using the advdisk1_stu_winserver storage unit.
– Change the policy attribute to select Allow multiple data streams
– Change the Backup Selections of the new policy to remove the current
A
entries, and add the ALL_LOCAL DRIVES backup directive from the
Windows 2008 Directive set.

Note: When the ALL_LOCAL_DRIVES directive is used in the Backup

Selections of a policy, NetBackup backs up all local drives except for
drives that use removable media. This directive also includes critical
system-related components. The ALL_LOCAL_DRIVES directive does
not automatically result in the use of multiple data streams during client
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

backups.

10 Given the number of disk drives that are configured on the

winclient.example.com client, how many backup streams should be
used to back up the client?

Number of data streams (jobs):

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

175 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–171
 Note: The number of jobs (data streams) used to back up the client data is
determined based upon the entries in the policy’s Backup Selections.

To optimize the backup of the clients using a policy that implements the use of
multiple data streams, there are other configuration considerations.
Just because multiple jobs are generated for a client during backup operations
does not mean that the jobs will run concurrently.
Specific configuration steps must be taken:
– Set the Maximum jobs per client Global Attribute to a value equal to the
number of concurrent jobs the client is allowed to run. (NetBackup
Management > Host Properties > Master Server Properties > Global
Attributes)
– Set the Maximum concurrent jobs setting of the destination storage unit
to a value that enables the client jobs to run concurrently.

11 Change the Maximum jobs per client Global Attribute to allow up to three (3)
concurrent backup jobs to run for NetBackup client systems.

Note: The Restart Daemons dialog box indicates that a restart of the NetBackup
daemons is required for certain Host Properties changes to become
effective. Changing the Maximum jobs per client setting does not require
a restart of the NetBackup daemons.

12 Change the Maximum concurrent jobs setting of the destination storage unit
(advdisk1_stu_winserver) to a value of three (3).

13 Perform a manual backup of winclient.example.com, using the Full

schedule of the winclient_test_multistream policy.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

14 Click the Activity Monitor entry in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

15 How many backup jobs are generated as a result of the manual backup request?

Number of backup jobs:

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

176
A–172 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 16 How many of the jobs are Active at the same time?

Number of concurrently active jobs:

Note: The first (lowest-numbered) job is a parent job. That job is the parent of
three additional jobs. The parent job is not counted against the number of
jobs that can run concurrently for the client.

Note: Because the ALL_LOCAL_DRIVES backup directive backs up the entire

client system, the jobs take longer to complete than other backup jobs you
have run during the course. The estimated completion time is 10 minutes.

17 Monitor the progress of the jobs. You may continue with the lab steps while the
backup jobs continue to run. Verify that all the job run to successful completion
(status 0). If any of the jobs fail, record the status code, and notify your
instructor.

18 View the Job Details for each of the backup jobs. Record your observations.

Observations:

19 Close any open Job Details windows.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

177 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–173
 Exercise 2: Optimizing tape drive performance using multiplexing

In this exercise, you configure NetBackup to perform multiplexed backups to a

media manager (tape-based) storage unit.

Note: Multiplexed backups can provide a significant performance benefit for

backups that are written to tape storage when the performance
characteristics of the tape hardware (tape drives) are significantly faster
than the speed at which the data from a single client stream can be read and
delivered to the tape drive. When using multiplexing, NetBackup
interleaves the backup images from multiple clients onto the tape, thereby
allowing the tape drive to operate at optimum efficiency. Testing is
required to determine the number of multiplexed backup images that are
required to optimize the performance of your tape hardware.

lnxmaster

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server system.

2 Select NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the

Administration Console.

3 Create a policy to perform multiplexed backups. To create the new policy, copy
the lnxclient_test_bdisk_media to create a new policy.

The name of the new policy is linux_test_MPX.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

178
A–174 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 4 Modify the new policy to make the changes described in the table:

Attributes:
Policy storage: tape_stu_lnxmedia
Policy volume pool: server_tapes
All other policy Attributes: use the default settings
Schedules:
Full: Media multiplexing = 3
Differential-Inc Media multiplexing = 3
Clients: lnxclient.example.com
lnxmaster.example.com
lnxmedia.example.com
All clients are:
Hardware: Linux
Operating System: RedHat 2.6.18
Backup Selections: no changes
Table 1: winclient_test_MPX policy changes

5 Verify that the linux_test_MPX policy is added to the list of policies

displayed in the right pane of the Administration Console.

6 Perform a manual backup using the Full schedule of the linux_test_MPX

A
policy, to back up the three clients listed in the policy’s Client list.

7 Select Activity Monitor in the left pane of the Administration Console.

8 How many jobs are initiated as a result of the most recent manual backup
request?
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Answer:

9 How many of the jobs run concurrently? Record your observations.

Answer:

10 Verify that all three backup jobs run to successful completion. If any of the jobs
fail, record the status code, and notify your instructor.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

179 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–175
 11 View the Job Details of the first (lowest-numbered) job. View the Status pane
on the Detailed Status tab. Record the Media ID and file number to which
the backup image created by this job were written.

Media ID File number

12 View the Job Details of the second job. View the Status pane on the Detailed
Status tab. Record the Media ID and file number to which the backup image
created by this job were written.

Media ID File number

13 View the Job Details of the third job. View the Status pane on the Detailed
Status tab. Record the Media ID and file number to which the backup image
created by this job were written.

Media ID File number

The previous three jobs were not multiplexed onto the same tape. The first
two jobs were active concurrently because the storage unit has two tape
drives. The first job used a tape mounted in one tape drive, and the second
job used another tape mounted in the second tape drive. When the first of
the two backup jobs finished, the third job was written to the same tape as
the backup job that had just completed.

Note: Additional configuration is required to enable NetBackup to perform

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

multiplexed backups. Specifically, the media manager (tape) storage unit

must be configured to Enable Multiplexing.

14 Modify the configuration of the tape_stu_lnxmedia storage unit to

Enable Multiplexing, and to set the Maximum streams per drive parameter to
a value of three (3) streams.

15 Perform a manual backup using the Full schedule of the linux_test_MPX

policy, to back up the three clients listed in the policy’s Client list.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

180
A–176 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 16 Select Activity Monitor in the left pane of the Administration Console.

17 How many jobs are initiated as a result of the most recent manual backup
request?

Answer:

18 How many of the jobs run concurrently? Record your observations.

Answer:

19 Verify that all three backup jobs run to successful completion. If any of the jobs
fail, record the status code, and notify your instructor.

20 View the Job Details of the first (lowest-numbered) job. View the Status pane
on the Detailed Status tab. Record the Media ID and file number to which
the backup image created by this job were written.

Media ID File number

21 View the Job Details of the second job. View the Status pane on the Detailed
A
Status tab. Record the Media ID and file number to which the backup image
created by this job were written.

Media ID File number

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

22 View the Job Details of the third job. View the Status pane on the Detailed
Status tab. Record the Media ID and file number to which the backup image
created by this job were written.

Media ID File number

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

181 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–177
 The three jobs were multiplexed onto the same tape. The Detailed Status
for the jobs shows that the backup images were not only written to the
same Media ID (tape), but also to the same file number on the tape. The
images were multiplexed on the tape.

23 Close any open Job Details windows.

24 Run the Tape Contents report against the Media ID that was used to write the
multiplexed backup. Use the Report Settings:

– Media Owner: lnxmedia.example.com

– Media ID: (media ID of tape used in most recent backup jobs)

The report results are displayed on the bottom portion of the Reports interface.

25 Locate the entries for the File Number that you obtained from the Job Details
of the most recent backup jobs (you recorded these file numbers on a previous
page of this exercise). Note that there are three Backup IDs that have the same
File Number:

– An entry for a Backup ID for lnxclient.example.com

– An entry for a Backup ID for lnxmaster.example.com
– An entry for a Backup ID for lnxmedia.example.com

The report output confirms that the backup images were multiplexed on the
tape.

Note: The Tape Contents report reads the actual backup headers from the tape to
generate its output.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

182
A–178 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Exercise 3: Optimizing backups using synthetic backups

In this exercise, you configure a policy and its associated schedules that enable the
creation of synthetic backup images.
A synthetic backup image is created by NetBackup by combining the contents of a
full backup image and of multiple incremental backup images to form a new
backup image of the client data. The policy used to create a synthetic backup must
have the Checkpoint Restart and True Image Restore features enabled.
To prepare for performing synthetic backups in this exercise, you:
• Configure a synthetic_tapes volume pool to house synthetic backup
images
• Configure a policy that includes full, differential incremental, and synthetic
full schedules.

Configuring a volume pool to house synthetic backup images

Although it is not a requirement, in the following steps you configure a new
volume pool to house synthetic backup images.

lnxmaster

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server system. A

2 Select Media and Device Management > Media > Volume Pools in the left
pane of the Administration Console.

The volume pools that exist in the NetBackup environment are displayed in the
right pane of the Administration Console.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

3 Create a new volume pool that has the following characteristics:

Pool name: synthetic_tapes

Description: For synthetic backups
Maximum number of partially full media: 0 (default)
Catalog Backup: not selected (default)

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

183 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–179
 4 Verify that the new volume pool is added to the list of volume pools displayed
in the right pane of the Administration Console.

Configuring a policy for synthetic backups

In the following steps you configure a policy and its associated schedules to enable
the creation of synthetic backup of the client data.
The policy that is used to perform synthetic backups is also used to perform
standard full and incremental backup. The full and incremental backup images are
used by NetBackup to create the synthetic backup images.
The policy must have the Collect true image restore information attribute enabled.
A key component of this policy is the schedule that has the Synthetic backup
parameter enabled.

5 Copy the winclient_test_tape_master policy to create a new policy

named winclient_test_synthetics.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

184
A–180 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 6 Modify the new policy to make the changes described in the table:

Attributes:
Collect true image restore info: selected
with move detection: selected
All other policy attributes: no changes
Schedules:
Full: no changes
Differential-Inc: no changes
Full-synthetic: new schedule
Full-synthetic schedule:
Name: Full-synthetic
Type of backup: Full
Synthetic backup: selected
Frequency: 1 week (default)
Override policy storage selection: selected
Storage unit: tape_stu_lnxmaster
Override policy volume pool: selected
Volume pool: synthetic_tapes
Retention: 2 weeks (default)
All other schedule attributes: use default settings
Start Window: none - manual backups only
Clients: winclient.example.com A
(no changes)
Backup Selections:
delete the entry for: G:\data\mixed
only remaining entry: G:\data\smallfiles
Table 2: winclient_test_synthetics policy settings
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Note: Use the information provided in the table to modify the policy. Verify that
you have made all the changes called for in the table, including the
inclusion of the Full-synthetic schedule.

7 After making the changes to the winclient_test_synthetics policy,

save the changes, and close the policy.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

185 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–181
 8 Verify that the winclient_test_synthetics policy is added to the list
of policies displayed in the right pane of the Administration Console.

Manually expiring all images on a tape

In the next step, you use the bpexpdate command provided by NetBackup to
manually expire all images on a tape, and return the tape to the scratch_tapes
pool.

Note: At this point in the course, you may be nearing the point where you do not
have unassigned tapes left in the robot to allow backup jobs to run
successfully. Perform the next steps to manually expire all backup images
that have been written to three tapes. This activity causes the tape to
become unassigned, and moved back to scratch pool.

CAUTION Always use the bpexpdate command carefully. Expiring all images
on a tape causes all images on the tape to be expired. When this
happens the tape is immediately available for reallocation by
NetBackup. After a tape has been reallocated, there is no
opportunity to import the contents of the tape to recover the expired
data.

1 Select Media and Device Management > Media in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

2 Click the Refresh icon, located on the tool bar of the Administration Console
(or use F5, or View > Refresh), to update the media information displayed in
the right pane.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

3 Identify and record the Media IDs of three tapes that have an Active or Full
Media Status, and that are members of either the NetBackup or
server_tapes volume pools.

Media ID 1:
Media ID 2:
Media ID 3:
Table 3: Media IDs to be manually expired

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

186
A–182 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 4 Access a Terminal window on the master server system.

5 Type su - root, and press Enter, to become superuser.

6 Execute the bpexpdate command to expire the first media ID listed in the table.

bpexpdate -m mediaID -d 0

7 When you are prompted Are you sure that the data on this media is not
critical to your business..., type y, and press Enter.

The command prompt is returned immediately.

8 Execute the bpexpdate command to expire the second media ID listed in the
table.

bpexpdate -m mediaID -d 0

9 When you are prompted Are you sure that the data on this media is not
critical to your business..., type y, and press Enter.

The command prompt is returned immediately.

A
10 Execute the bpexpdate command to expire the third media ID listed in the
table.

bpexpdate -m mediaID -d 0

11 When you are prompted Are you sure that the data on this media is not
critical to your business..., type y, and press Enter.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

The command prompt is returned immediately.

12 Select Media and Device Management > Media in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

13 Click the Refresh icon, located on the tool bar of the Administration Console
(or use F5, or View > Refresh), to update the media information displayed in
the right pane.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

187 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–183
 14 Verify that the three Media IDs that you expired have all been returned to the
scratch_tapes volume pool, and that the date/time stamp has been
removed from the Time Assigned column for the tapes.

The tapes are available for immediate reallocation, as required.

Running backups using the policy for synthetic backups

In the following steps, you run a full backup and two differential backups using the
policy that you configured for synthetic backups. Between the backup jobs you
make changes to the file system of the client.

1 Perform a manual backup of the client, winclient.example.com, using

the Full schedule of the winclient_test_synthetics policy.

2 Select Activity Monitor in the left pane of the Administration Console.

3 View the entry for the most recent backup job. Verify that the backup runs to
successful completion (status 0).

If the job fails, record the status code and notify your instructor.

4 View the Job Details for the backup job. Record the number of files that
were backed up, the Media ID of the tape that was used to perform the
backup. Determine the volume pool of the Media ID used for the backup job.
(Check Media and Device Management > Media to determine the answer.)

Number of Files: Media ID Volume Pool

1001 server_tapes
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Note: The backup job that you just performed is a standard Full backup. This
backup used a tape from the volume pool specified in the policy attributes.

5 Close the Job Details window for the job.

6 Access the console of the client system, winclient.example.com.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

188
A–184 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 winclient

7 Right-click the Computer icon on the desktop of the client system, and select
Open.

8 Right-click the entry for the G:\ drive, and select Open to access the contents
of the drive.

9 Right-click the entry for the G:\data folder, and select Open.

10 Right-click the entry for the G:\data\mixed folder, and select Open.

11 Right-click the entry for the Podcast_HHO_cyberbullying*.mp3 file

that is present in the folder, and click Copy, to copy the file.

12 Navigate to the G:\data\smallfiles folder, right-click, and then click

Paste, to paste the file to the folder.

13 Verify that the Podcast_HHO_cyberbullying*.mp3 file has been

copied to the G:\data\smallfiles folder. A

14 Delete the following files from the G:\data\smallfiles folder:

– file995.txt
– file996.txt
– file997.txt
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

– file998.txt
– file999.txt

15 Allow the Computer window to remain open on the client system. You return
to this Computer window in a few moments.

16 Access the console of the master server system.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

189 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–185
 lnxmaster

17 Perform a second manual backup of the client, winclient.example.com,

this time using the Differential-Inc schedule of the policy,
winclient_test_synthetics.

18 Select Activity Monitor in the left pane of the Administration Console.

19 View the entry for the most recent backup job. Verify that the backup runs to
successful completion (status 0).

If the job fails, record the status code and notify your instructor.

20 View the Job Details for the backup job. Record the number of files that were
backed up, the Media ID of the tape that was used to perform the backup.
Determine the volume pool of the Media ID used for the backup job. (Check
Media and Device Management > Media to determine the answer.)

Number of Files: Media ID Volume Pool

Note: The backup job that you just performed is a standard Differential backup.
This backup used a tape from the volume pool specified in the policy
attributes. As a differential backup, it only backed up files that changed.
The TIR feature of NetBackup contains a record of all the files that were
present in the directory at the time of t he backup regardless of whether or
not the files were backed up.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

21 Close the Job Details window for the job.

22 Access the console of the client system, winclient.example.com.

winclient

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

190
A–186 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 23 Access the Computer window on the client system. This window was left
open from an earlier step in this exercise.

24 Navigate to the G:\data\mixed folder.

25 Right-click the entry for the Symantec Technology Network

(STN)_files folder, and click Copy, to copy the folder.

26 Navigate to the G:\data\smallfiles folder, and paste Symantec

Technology Network (STN)_files folder to the smallfiles
folder.

27 Verify that the Symantec Technology Network (STN)_files

folder and its contents have been copied to the G:\data\smallfiles
folder. (21 files were copied.)

28 Delete the following files from the G:\data\smallfiles folder:

– file990.txt
– file991.txt
– file992.txt
– file993.txt
– file994.txt A

29 Allow the Computer window to remain open on the client system. You return
to this Computer window in a few moments.

30 Access the console of the master server system.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

lnxmaster

31 Perform another manual backup of the client, winclient.example.com,

using the Differential-Inc schedule of the policy,
winclient_test_synthetics.

32 Select Activity Monitor in the left pane of the Administration Console.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

191 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–187
 33 View the entry for the most recent backup job. Verify that the backup runs to
successful completion (status 0).

If the job fails, record the status code and notify your instructor.

34 View the Job Details for the backup job. Record the number of files that were
backed up, the Media ID of the tape that was used to perform the backup.
Determine the volume pool of the Media ID used for the backup job. (Check
Media and Device Management > Media to determine the answer.)

Number of Files: Media ID Volume Pool

Note: In the last several steps you have performed a full backup, and two
differential backups of the client. Between backups new files have been
added to the file system of the client (that is being backed up), and a
number of files have been deleted.

35 Close the Job Details window for the job.

Performing a synthetic backup

In the following steps, you initiate a synthetic backup of the client, and monitor the
results of that synthetic backup job.

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server.

2 Select NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Administration Console.

3 Perform a synthetic backup of the client, winclient.example.com,

using the Full-synthetic schedule of the policy,
winclient_test_synthetics.

4 Select Activity Monitor in the left pane of the Administration Console.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

192
A–188 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 5 View the entry for the most recent backup job. Verify that the backup runs to
successful completion (status 0).

If the job fails, record the status code and notify your instructor.

6 Look carefully at the Job Details for the backup job. Record the information in
the space provided:

Job Policy;
Job Schedule
Data Movement:
Media ID (for read):
Media ID (for write):
Current files written:

Note: The Job Details of the job (Status pane of the Detailed Status tab)
indicate that two tapes and two tape drives were used to perform the
synthetic backup job. The first tape was the tape to which the full and
differential incremental backup images had been written. That tape was
mounted on a drive for reading. The second tape was a new tape, assigned
for the purpose of writing the synthetic backup image. That tape was
mounted on a second tape drive. The Current Files written field on the
Detailed Status tab shows a value of zero (0), indicating that no client files
were written during the synthetic backup. The client system was not A
involved in the synthetic backup image creation.

7 Close the Job Details window for the job.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Performing a TIR restore from a synthetic backup image

In the following steps, you perform a True Image Restore (TIR) restore using the
synthetic backup image created in the previous steps of this exercise. You restore
the client data to an alternate directory location on the client system.

lnxmaster

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

193 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–189
 1 Click the Backup, Archive, and Restore object, located in the left pane of the
NetBackup Administration Console.

2 Click the Restore Files tab on the BAR GUI.

3 In the BAR GUI, select Actions > Specify NetBackup Machines and Policy
Type.

4 Make the following selections in the Specify NetBackup Machines and

Policy Type window.

– Server to use for backups and restores: lnxmaster.example.com

– Source client for restores: winclient.example.com
– Destination client for restores: winclient.example.com
– Policy type for restores: MS-Windows

5 Click OK to save the changes to the Specify NetBackup Machines and

Policy Type window settings.

6 In the Restore Type drop-down menu, click True Image Backups.

7 Click the Use Backup History to set date range icon.

8 In the Backup History window, locate and click the entry for the most recent
Full Backup image that used the winclient_test_synthetics policy.

9 Click OK to close the Backup History window.

NetBackup searches its image catalog and locates the backup image or images
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

that meet the criteria specified. The results of the search are displayed in the
Directory Structure pane of the BAR GUI.

10 Click to expand the entry for winclient.example.com that is displayed

in the Directory Structure pane.

The contents of the backup image are displayed in the Contents of the
selected directory pane of the BAR GUI.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

194
A–190 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 11 Click the symbol to the left of the G drive entry in the Directory Structure
pane, to expand the entry.

12 Click the symbol to the left of the data folder entry in the Directory
Structures pane, to expand the folder.

13 Click the smallfiles folder entry in the Directory Structure pane, to

expand the folder.

14 In the Contents of the selected directory pane, mark the check boxes to the
left of the unnamed folder and the folder for Symantec Technology Network
(STN).

15 Click the Preview button.

The Media Required window is displayed.

16 Record the Media ID that is required to perform the restore. Is this is the media
ID to which the synthetic backup image was written?

Media ID required:

17 Click OK to close the Media Required window. A

18 Click the Restore button.

The Restore Marked Files window is displayed.

19 Click the Restore everything to a different location (maintaining existing

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

structure) radio button.

20 Type G:\TIR-restore in the Destination field, located directly below the radio
button.

21 Allow all other Restore Marked Files window parameters to remain at their
default settings.

22 Click Start Restore on the Restore Marked Files window.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

195 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–191
 Within moments a View Progress window is displayed, with the Do you want
to view the progress of the restore? message.

23 Click Yes, in the View Progress window.

The Task Progress tab of the BAR GUI is selected.

24 View the progress of the restore in the Task Progress tab.

25 Verify that the restore job runs to successful completion. Take note of the
messages displayed in the Progress pane of the Task Progress tab.

Note: You can also use the Activity Monitor to view the restore job.

26 If the restore operation fails, notify your instructor.

Verifying the restore of files on the client system

In the final steps of this exercise, you view the files restored to the alternate
directory location (G:\TIR-restore) on the client system,
winclient.example.com, to verify that the files and directories of the client
were restored.

1 Access the console of the client system, winclient.example.com.

winclient
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

2 Access the Computer window on the client. The Computer window is open
from a previous step in this exercise.

3 Navigate to G:\ in the Computer window.

4 Verify that the folder TIR-restore is present on the G:\ drive.

The G:\TIR-restore folder was created by the most recent restore

operation.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

196
A–192 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 5 Right-click the G:\TIR-restore folder, and select Open.

6 Note the files (992 files) and the single folder (with its contents) that are
present in the smallfiles folder. The 10 files you deleted prior to the two
incremental backup jobs were not restored.

7 Close the Computer window on the client system.

8 Access the console of the master server system.

End of lab

A
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

197 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–193
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

198
A–194 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Lab 6: Working with Support
In this lab, you perform tasks to reinforce the concepts presented in the lesson,
including:
• Viewing, stopping, and starting NetBackup services and processes
• Running reports that provide troubleshooting information
• Viewing and setting debug log verbosity
• Enabling NetBackup legacy debug logging
• Using nbsu and nbcplogs to gather troubleshooting information and debug
log files

Two parallel versions of the labs enable you to choose the level of detail that suits
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

your experience:
• Appendix A provides high level step-by-step lab instructions.
• Appendix B provides complete detailed step-by-step lab instructions and
solutions.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

199 Lab 6: Working with Support
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–195
 Exercise 1: Viewing, stopping, and starting NetBackup services

When managing NetBackup or troubleshooting NetBackup-related issues you may

be required to view, stop, and restart NetBackup-related services, daemons, and
processes. NetBackup and the operating system of the systems on which
NetBackup is running each provides methods for performing these tasks. In this
lab exercise, you use three primary methods to view the running NetBackup and
NetBackup-related processes:
• Using the Activity monitor
• Using operating system-provided utilities
• Using NetBackup-provided command line interfaces

Using the Activity Monitor to view NetBackup services and processes

In the following steps, you use the Activity Monitor to view the running
NetBackup services and processes.

1 Access the console of the master server system.

lnxmaster

2 Log on to the lnxmaster system as student.

Note: You may be logged in to the master server from a previous lab activity. If
you are, you can continue to use that login session.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Note: The NetBackup Administration Console may be open from a previous

lab activity. If it is, you can skip to the first step after the logon steps.

3 Right-click the Terminal icon on the desktop of the master server, and select
Open to open a terminal window.

4 Type jnbSA& at the command prompt, and press Enter.

The NetBackup Administration Console login window is displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
200
A–196 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 5 Login to the NetBackup Administration Console using the student User
name (password = training).

6 The NetBackup Administration Console window is displayed.

7 Select the entry for the Activity Monitor, located in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

The Activity Monitor is displayed in the right pane of the Administration

Console.

8 Note the three tabs located at the bottom of the Activity Monitor display:

– Jobs (this tab is selected by default)

– Daemons
– Processes

9 Click the Daemons tab.

10 Note the following about the services that are listed:

– Daemons that are listed include daemons that are running and daemons that
are stopped.
– Daemons are listed for the master server (the local system) only.

Note: It is normal, and even expected, that some daemons are not running. Some
daemons run only on a NetBackup server, based upon the role of the server
(master server, media server, client). Certain daemons are running only if a
certain feature or option of NetBackup is configured or enabled. A
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

11 Locate the entry for the bprd daemon.

Note that the bprd daemon has a Status of Running.

Note: The bprd daemon runs only on the master server system.

12 Right-click the entry for the bprd daemon for the master server.

The menu of available actions is displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
201 Lab 6: Working with Support
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–197
 13 Click Details in the menu, to view the details of the selected daemon.

The Daemon Details: bprd window is displayed.

CAUTION You should not stop NetBackup daemons while backup or

restore operations are in progress.

14 Note the information about the daemon that is provided in the Daemon Details
window, and that you can stop the daemon, using the Stop button provided.

Note: Do not stop NetBackup services at this time.

15 Click Close, to close the Daemon Details window.

16 Click the Processes tab, located at the bottom of the Activity Monitor pane.

17 Note the long list of NetBackup processes. The running processes are listed,
including the PID (process ID) that is associated with each process.

Note: You cannot stop or start NetBackup processes using the Activity Monitor
interface.

18 Close the NetBackup Administration Console window (File > Exit).

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Viewing NetBackup processes using operating system utilities

In the following steps, you use utilities provided by the operating system of the
system that NetBackup is running on, to view the NetBackup services that are
running on the system.

1 Access the desktop of the master server system.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

202
A–198 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 lnxmaster

2 In a terminal window, type su - root and press Enter, to become

superuser.

3 Use the ps command, provided by the Linux operating system to view the
processes running on the system.

ps -ef |more

4 Use the spacebar to advance the display of the processes, looking for processes
that are related to NetBackup.

Note: It can be difficult to determine all of the processes that are specifically
related to NetBackup when viewing the process list using the operating
system-provided commands. The use of NetBackup-provided commands
provides a much more convenient method of viewing NetBackup-related
daemons and processes.

5 Continue to press the spacebar until the command prompt is returned.

6 Allow the Terminal window to remain open on the master server. You use this
Terminal window to perform the next steps in the exercise.

Managing NetBackup services from the command line

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

In the following steps, you use command line interfaces provided with NetBackup
to view, stop, and start the NetBackup services.
NetBackup provides command line interfaces to view, stop, and start its services.
The interfaces provided vary slightly, depending upon the operating system that is
running on the NetBackup system, and the role of the system (master server, media
server, or client).
On Windows-based NetBackup servers and clients the key command line
interfaces are:
• bpps - used to view the running NetBackup services and processes
• bpup - used to stop all running NetBackup services and processes
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
203 Lab 6: Working with Support Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–199
 • bpdown - used to start all NetBackup services and processes
On UNIX/Linux-based NetBackup servers and clients the key command line
interfaces are:
• bpps - used to view the running NetBackup services and processes
• netbackup stop- used to stop all running NetBackup daemons and
processes
• netbackup start - used to start all NetBackup services and processes

CAUTION Use caution when stopping NetBackup services. Do not stop the
NetBackup services unless you are fully aware of the implications
this action will have on production backup and restore operations.

Note: A Terminal window may be open, and logged in as superuser, from a

previous lab activity. If it is, you can skip the next step.

1 Open a Terminal window on the master server, type su - root and press
Enter, to become superuser.

Viewing the running NetBackup services and processes

In the following steps, you use the bpps command to view the running
NetBackup services and processes.

Note: The steps described below can be used on any NetBackup master server,
media server, or client system, to view running NetBackup services and
processes.

2 Type the command, and press Enter.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

bpps -a |more

The bpps command displays the list of running NetBackup services and
processes on an operational NetBackup server system.
The list of services displayed by the command varies substantially between
master server, media server, and client systems.

3 Press the space bar to scroll through the command output until the command
prompt is returned.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

204
A–200 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Stopping the running NetBackup services and processes
In the following steps, you use the NetBackup command line interfaces to stop all
running NetBackup services and processes on the master server system.

Note: The steps described below can be used on any UNIX or Linux-based
NetBackup master server or media server to stop all NetBackup services
and processes - - with the exception of the NetBackup Administration
Console and the Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI.

CAUTION Use caution when stopping NetBackup services. Do not stop the
NetBackup services unless you are fully aware of the implications
this action will have on production backup and restore operations.

1 Access the Terminal window on the master server system.

2 Type the command: netbackup stop, and press Enter, to stop all
NetBackup services and processes on the master server system.

Within a few moments, the shutdown of the NetBackup daemons and

processes completes, and you are returned to the command prompt.

3 Verify that the NetBackup daemons and processes have been stopped, by
executing the bpps -a command.

Starting the NetBackup services and processes

In the following steps, you use the NetBackup command line interfaces to start the
A
NetBackup services and processes on the master server system.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Note: The steps described below can be used on any UNIX or Linux-based
NetBackup master server or media server to start all NetBackup services
and processes - with the exception of the NetBackup Administration
Console and the Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI.

1 Access the Terminal window on the master server system.

2 Type the command: netbackup start, and press Enter, to start all
NetBackup services and processes on the master server system.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

205 Lab 6: Working with Support Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–201
 Within a few moments, the shutdown of the NetBackup daemons and
processes completes, and you are returned to the command prompt.

3 Verify that the NetBackup daemons and processes have been started, by
executing the bpps -a command.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

206
A–202 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Exercise 2: Running NetBackup reports for troubleshooting

In this exercise, you review the NetBackup reports that often provide useful
information for troubleshooting NetBackup-related problems. These reports
include the:
• Status of Backups report
• Client Backups report
• Problems report
• All log entries
• Media Logs report

Note: You ran many of these reports in an earlier lab activity in this course.

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server system.

2 Select NetBackup Management > Reports in the left pane of the

Administration Console.

3 Click the symbol to the left of the Reports object, to expand Reports.

The reports are listed below the expanded Reports object:

– Status of Backups report
– Client Backups report
– Problems report
– All log entries
A
– Media Logs report
– Tape Reports (report category)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

– Disk Reports (report category)

– Vault Reports (report category)

4 Select and run any of the reports to review the information provided by the
report.

Note: You can run any of the reports listed above using the default Report
Settings, to view a sample of the report output.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

207 Lab 6: Working with Support Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–203
 5 When you have run the reports and are satisfied with your understanding of the
report output contents, proceed to the next exercise.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

208
A–204 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Exercise 3: Viewing and setting NetBackup log verbosities

In this exercise, you view the configuration parameters used to change the log
verbosity of NetBackup log files.
NetBackup debug logs provide important information to support personnel when
troubleshooting NetBackup and NetBackup-related problems. The level of detail
provided in the logs can be adjusted by setting the log verbosity.
For many problems, the default log verbosity may be sufficient to gather the log
entries needed to identify a problem. In some cases, NetBackup support personnel
may request that you increase the logging levels of all logs or for the logs of a
specific service, daemon, or process.

lnxmaster

1 Access the open NetBackup Administration Console window on the master

server system.

2 Select NetBackup Management > Host Properties > Master Servers in the
left pane of the Administration Console.

The host name of the master server (lnxmaster.example.com) is

displayed in the list of master servers in the right pane of the Administration
Console.

3 Click the entry for the master server host name,

lnxmaster.example.com, to highlight the entry.
A
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

4 Select Actions > Properties.

The Master Server Host Properties window is displayed.

5 Click the Logging entry in the Properties list on the left side of the Master
Server Host Properties window.

The default logging level settings are displayed in the Logging window.

The Global logging level setting, located near the top of the Logging window
affects the logging levels for both legacy-style and unified-style logs.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

209 Lab 6: Working with Support Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–205
 The middle section of the window contains logging level settings for some of
the most important services and daemons that use legacy-style debug logging.
If altered, these settings override the Global logging level for the specified
service.
The bottom section of the screen contains logging level settings for some of the
most important services and daemons that use unified-style debug logging. If
altered, these settings override the Global logging level for the specified
service.

6 Allow the logging level settings to remain at their default settings.

7 Click OK to close the Master Server Host Properties window.

Note: When gathering information and log files to send to Symantec technical
support, the Symantec technical support representative may direct you to
change the logging levels. Due to the amount of log information that may
be captured, the size of the log files may grow very quickly. You are
advised not to increase the logging levels unless at the direction of a
Symantec technical support representative.

Note: In addition to the logging level settings that can be set in the Master
Server Host Properties window, logging levels for other NetBackup and
media manager related services, daemons, and processes can be set by
including entries in the bp.conf file (Unix/Linux only) or vm.conf (for
media manager log files)

Refer to the Symantec NetBackup Troubleshooting Guide - UNIX, Windows,

and Linux, Release 7.5 for complete details on setting logging verbosity.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

210
A–206 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Exercise 4: Enabling NetBackup debug logging

In this exercise, you enable legacy-style logging on the master server system for all
NetBackup services and processes that utilize legacy-style logs.

Note: Unified-style logging is enabled by default for all NetBackup services that
use unified-style logging. There is no need to manually initiate logging.

1 Access the console of the master server system.

lnxmaster

2 Type su - root, to become superuser.

3 In the Terminal window, change directory to the /usr/openv/logs

directory.

cd /usr/openv/logs

The logs directory contains a many sub-directories, including: bmrd,

bmrsetup, nbars, nbaudit, nbemm, nbevtmgr, nbftclnt, nbim,
nbjm, and many others. These are directories that house the unified-style logs
on the master server. Unified-style logging is enabled by default. There is no
need to do anything to enable unified-style logging.
A

4 Change directory to the nbjm directory (/usr/openv/logs/nbjm).

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

cd nbjm

5 List the contents of the/usr/openv/logs/nbjm directory.

ls -l

The files displayed are the nbjm logs files. The file name contains the date on
which the file was created, in the form: yymmdd (Example: 120406).

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

211 Lab 6: Working with Support
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–207
 6 In the Terminal window, change directory to the /usr/openv/
netbackup/logs directory.

cd /usr/openv/netbackup/logs

The logs folder contains a number of sub-folders, including: admin,

nbliveup, nbregopsc, and user_ops. Some of these directories house
the unified-style logs on the master server. Unified-style logging is enabled by
default.

Note: Logging for most processes that use legacy-style logs is not enabled by
default. To enable legacy-style logging for a daemon or process, you must
create a directory in the /usr/openv/netbackup/logs directory,
that bears the name of the daemon or process (Examples: bprd, bpbrm,
bptm, bpbkar).

Note: The mklogdir script is used to create the directories for all the
NetBackup daemons and processes that use legacy-style logging. You may
also create the log directories manually, to be more selective in choosing
the NetBackup daemons and processes for which logs are required.

7 Locate the mklogdir file in the logs directory. Do not run the command.

8 Run the following mkdir commands to create log directories for: bprd,
bpbrm, bptm, bpbkar, and tar on the master server system.

– mkdir bprd
– mkdir bpbrm
– mkdir bptm
– mkdir bpbkar
– mkdir tar
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

9 List the contents of the /usr/openv/netbackup/logs directory and

verify the creation of the log directories.

ls -l

10 Change directory to the newly-created bprd directory (/usr/openv/

netbackup/logs/bprd).

cd bprd
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
212
A–208 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 11 List the contents of the bprd directory.

ls -l

12 Record your observations of the contents of the bprd directory.

Observations:

Note: You created the bprd directory manually. bprd (the NetBackup Request
Daemon) is one of the NetBackup daemons that uses legacy-style logging.
bprd runs continually on the master server system (only). If bprd is
running when the bprd log directory is created, logging does not begin
until bprd is stopped and restarted.

13 Type the command: netbackup stop, and press Enter, to stop all
NetBackup services and processes on the master server system.

netbackup stop

14 Wait for the command prompt to be returned. Verify that the NetBackup
daemons and processes have been stopped by running the bpps -a command.

bpps -a

15 Type the command: netbackup start, and press Enter, to start all A
NetBackup services and processes on the master server system.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

netbackup start

16 Wait for the command prompt to be returned. Verify that the NetBackup
daemons and processes have been started by running the bpps -a command.

bpps -a

17 List the contents of the bprd directory.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

213 Lab 6: Working with Support
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–209
 ls -l

18 Record your observations of the contents of the bprd directory

Observations:

19 Allow the Terminal window to remain open on the master server system. You
use this window in the next exercise.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

214
A–210 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Exercise 5: Using nbsu and nbcplogs

In this exercise, you use the nbsu and nbcplogs commands to collect
troubleshooting information and log files. The output files generated by these
NetBackup utilities is provided to Symantec, for analysis by NetBackup technical
support representatives to assist you in solving NetBackup or NetBackup-related
problems.

Running nbsu to gather troubleshooting information

In the following steps, you run the nbsu command to gather troubleshooting
information for the NetBackup master server system.

Note: The NetBackup support utility (nbsu) is a command line tool. It queries
the host and gathers appropriate diagnostic information about NetBackup
and the operating system. nbsu provides a wide range of control over the
types of diagnostic information gathered.

The NetBackup support utility (nbsu) writes the information it gathers to text files
in the folder or directory name listed below. The file name of the output file has the
format: hostname_timestamp (Example:
winserver.example.com_mmddyyyyhhmmss

UNIX/Linux-based NetBackup server systems:

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/support/output/nbsu

Windows-based NetBackup server systems:

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

install_path\NetBackup\bin\support\output\nbsu

1 Access the Terminal window on the master server system. This window is
open from a step in the previous exercise.

2 At the command prompt, type: nbsu -help |more, and press Enter.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

215 Lab 6: Working with Support
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–211
 3 Briefly review the output of the extensive help information provided for nbsu.
Note the six phases of the information gathered by nbsu:

– Determine Operating System environment information

– Determine NetBackup environment information
– Gather diagnostic lists
– Select the diagnostic commands or procedures to execute
– Execute the selected diagnostic commands or procedures
– nbsu final processing

4 Press the spacebar until the command prompt is displayed.

Note: The output file of the nbsu command is written to a directory relative to
the directory you are in when the command is executed. It is recommended
that you create a directory to which the nbsu output should be directed,
and change to that directory before running the command.

5 Execute the command to create a support directory named /support.

mkdir /support

6 Change directory to the new directory:

cd /support

7 Run the nbsu command without any command options:

nbsu
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

8 Monitor the execution of the nbsu command in the Command Prompt

window. The command may take a few minutes to complete.

When gathering of the troubleshooting information has been completed, you

are returned to the command prompt. A prompt in the output of the command
indicates: The results are located in the./output/nbsu/<######>

9 From your current directory location, change directory to ./output/nbsu.

cd ./output/nbsu

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

216
A–212 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 10 List the contents of the directory, and record your observations.

Directory contents of nbsu output:

Note: In a troubleshooting situation, you would provide the nbsu output file to
Symantec technical support for analysis.

Running the nbcplogs command

In the following steps, you use the nbcplogs (NetBackup log uploader) to gather
logs files and troubleshooting information in preparation for transfer to Symantec
technical support for analysis.
nbcplogs gathers log files generated by NetBackup and its components on the
system on which the command is initiated, and creates a package that can be
transferred to Symantec technical support for analysis. When provided with a
Symantec case ID and the proper credentials (provided by Symantec technical
support) nbcplogs can automatically perform the file transfer of its output
package.
By default, nbcplogs runs the nbsu utility to gather troubleshooting
information, and includes the nbsu output in the package that is created for
transfer to Symantec.

Note: Because nbcplogs includes nbsu data collection, there is no need to use
both commands. Run nbcplogs to gather and transfer both the gathered A
troubleshooting information and the gathered log files.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

1 In the Terminal window, change directory to /support.

cd /support

2 Use the nbcplogs command to gather troubleshooting information (using

nbsu), and to gather log files for the last 15 minutes of the current day. Write
the output files to /support/nbcplogs-out.

Type the command, and press Enter.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

217 Lab 6: Working with Support
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–213
 nbcplogs -d 15min /support/nbcplogs-out

3 Monitor the progress of the nbcplogs command execution in the Terminal

window.

4 When the command is ready to write its output file, it prompts:

is there at least XX.X M (MB) disk space available on /support? (Y/N)

Note: The size of the nbcplogs output file varies greatly depending upon the
period of time that you are gathering logs for, and the degree of backup and
restore activity that is occurring on the system. Always check that there is
adequate available disk space on the specified target disk volume to house
the output of the nbcplogs utility.

5 Type Y, and press Enter.

nbcplogs proceeds to gather and write its output file, including the output of
the nbsu command.

This may take several minutes, depending upon the size of the log files that are
gathered.

6 When the creation of the command output is completed, you are returned to the
command prompt.

7 In the Terminal window, navigate to the /support/nbcplogs-out

directory.

8 Record the names of the log directories that have been collected by
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

nbcplogs, and the name of the large tar.gz file that is present in the
directory.

Table 1: Folder and tar file names in C:\support\nbcplogs-out

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

218
A–214 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Example: lnxmaster_master_20120331_143015.tar
Table 1: Folder and tar file names in C:\support\nbcplogs-out

9 The output of the nbcplogs file is ready to send to Symantec.

Note: nbcplogs gathers troubleshooting and log information only from the
system on which it was executed. In a production NetBackup environment
it is often necessary to collect troubleshooting and log information from
other NetBackup systems, from media servers and clients, in addition to
collecting the information from the master server.

10 Close any open Computer windows.

11 Close any open Command Prompt windows.

End of lab

A
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

219 Lab 6: Working with Support
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
A–215
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

220
A–216 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Appendix B
Lab Solutions
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

221
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

222
B–2 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 B

Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation)

This lab activity provides you with an introduction to the lab delivery environment
used for this course, enabling you to successfully navigate and use the lab systems
provided for the course.
Symantec NetBackup courses may be delivered in a number of settings:
• In a traditional classroom, with physical systems provided for performing lab
activities
• In a virtual classroom, with online access provided to lab systems
Regardless of the setting in which you attend this NetBackup 7.5 Administration
course, the lab environment is provided using virtual lab systems. The lab systems
are deployed using one of two delivery platforms:
• VMware Workstation
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

• The Hatsize delivery platform

The user interfaces provided in these two lab delivery environments differ. This
lab introduction activity provides you with practice navigating and performing
typical activities related to the use of the virtual machines provided for this course.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

223 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation) Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–3
 Lab environment overview
The labs for this course are performed within a virtual environment consisting of
six virtual machines, as illustrated on the slide. This virtual environment has been
developed specifically for this course and is described in the following sections.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

224
B–4 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 B

Virtual machine configuration

The lab activities for this course use the six virtual machines identified on the slide
and in Table 1. The introductory page of each lab activity identifies the virtual
machines that are used in the lab activity. Icons, such as those shown in the first
column on the slide, are displayed to indicate which virtual machine is used to
perform each of the lab steps.

System Name Description Fully Qualified Host Name

vtl Virtual tape library with two vtl.example.com
tape drives
lnxmaster NetBackup 7.5 master/EMM/ lnxmaster.example.com
media server
lnxmedia NetBackup 7.5 media server lnxmedia.example.com
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

winclient NetBackup 7.5 client winclient.example.com

lnxclient NetBackup 7.5 client lnxclient.example.com
winserver OpsCenter 7.5 server and winserver.example.com
NetBackup media server
Table 1: Virtual Machine names and descriptions

Note: In the following exercises, the virtual machines are identified by the system
names listed in Table 1.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

225 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation) Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–5
 Virtual machine account information
Refer to Table 2 for the logon credentials for each of the virtual machines used in
this lab environment. For most lab steps, log on to the virtual machines using the
student user ID. In some cases, the lab instructions may direct you to log on to a
virtual machine as the Administrator or root user.

System Student Logon Administrator Logon

Credentials Credentials
lnxmaster User: student User: Administrator
Password: training Password: training
lnxmedia User: student User: Administrator
Password: training Password: training
winclient User: student User: Administrator
Password: training Password: training
winserver User: student User: Administrator
Password: training Password: training
lnxclient User: student User: root
Password: training Password: training
vtl User: root
Password: veritas1
Table 2: Virtual Machine logon credentials

Accessing virtual machines

How and where you attend the NetBackup 7.5 Administration class determines
how you access to the virtual machines in the lab environment. Your instructor will
direct you to the appropriate set of lab procedures for the environment you are
using in this class.
• If you are working with VMware Workstation, in either a physical or virtual
classroom, continue to the VMware Workstation introduction section on the
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

following page.
• If you are working with Hatsize, locate and complete the Lab introduction
exercise for Hatsize.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

226
B–6 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 B

VMware Workstation introduction

In this lab activity, you become familiar with the lab environment used in the
Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer course, including the methods
used to access the lab systems.
The hands-on portion of this lab activity enables you to perform basic operations
on virtual machines, as shown on the VMware Workstation introduction slide.
Adopting the best practice guidelines provided in this lab enables you to perform
the remaining lab activities of this course more efficiently.

Note: Only use these exercises if the class is using the VMware Workstation lab
environment. Instructions for Hatsize lab environments are located in a
separate lab activity.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Two parallel versions of the lab activities included in this course enable you to
choose the level of detail that suits your NetBackup experience level:
• Appendix A provides step-by-step lab instructions.
• Appendix B provides complete lab instructions and solutions.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

227 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation) Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–7
 VMware Workstation lab environment
In the VMware Workstation lab environment, each of the virtual machines is
connected to a single virtual network residing on the host machine. You use the
VMware Workstation user interface on the host machine to access the console of
the virtual machines.
In this lab environment, the majority of lab steps are performed on the NetBackup
7.5 master server that is running on the lnxmaster virtual machine. As you
work through the lab steps, the lab instructions direct you to select the virtual
machine that is used to perform the lab steps.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

228
B–8 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 B

VMware Workstation interface

The screen shot on the slide shows the summary view of VMware Workstation
user interface. This view provides access to the virtual machines.
To access the console of a virtual machine, click the tab associated with the name
of the virtual machine. On the slide shown on this page, the tab for the vtl virtual
machine was selected.
If a virtual machine is in the powered-off state, when you click the tab for the
virtual machine, the body of the VMware Workstation user interface provides
information about the virtual machine. The VMware Workstation tool bar and the
Commands area of the user interface enable you to perform operations on the
virtual machine, such as “Power the virtual machine on.”
When the virtual machine is powered on, the body of the VMware Workstation
user interface displays the console of the virtual machine, enabling you to interact
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

with the virtual machine as you would with a physical system.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

229 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation) Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–9
 Exercise 1: Starting virtual machines in VMware Workstation

In this exercise, you start the virtual machines in your lab environment. This is
equivalent to booting or powering on the virtual machines.

Note: It is imperative that you start the virtual machines in the order specified in
Table 3. Failure to start the virtual machines in the specified order may
cause tape device failures and the subsequent failure of backup and restore
operations that use the tape devices.

Startup
order Virtual Machine Name Description
1 vtl.example.com Virtual tape library with two
tape drives; shared by
lnxmaster and
lnxmedia
2 lnxmaster.example.com NetBackup 7.5 master/
EMM/media server
3 lnxmedia.example.com NetBackup 7.5 media server
4 winclient.example.com NetBackup 7.5 client
5 lnxclient.example.com NetBackup 7.5 client
6 winserver.example.com OpsCenter 7.5 server and
NetBackup media server
Table 3: Virtual Machine startup order

1 If VMware Workstation is not already running, start it now.

Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

a On the desktop of your host system, double-click the VMware

Workstation icon.

b Select View > Current View > Summary.

End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

230
B–10 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 The VMware Workstation user interface is displayed, as shown in the
following screen shot.

2 Review the current Devices settings for each virtual machine.

Solution

a To select a virtual machine, click the tab for the virtual machine.

b Use the Summary view to locate the Devices tab and review the
configuration information for the virtual machine.

c Click each of the remaining virtual machine tabs and review the Devices
tab information for each virtual machine.

End of Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

231 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–11
 vtl

3 Start the vtl virtual machine.

Solution

a In VMware, click the vtl tab.

b Click the green Power On button on the toolbar to start the virtual
machine.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Wait until the virtual machine has started and the login prompt is displayed.
End of Solution

lnxmaster

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

232
B–12 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Note: Always start and stop virtual machines in the specified order, and wait
for the previous virtual machine to load prior to starting another virtual
machine.
B

4 Start the lnxmaster virtual machine.

Solution

a In VMware, click the lnxmaster tab.

b Click the green Power On button on the toolbar to start the virtual
machine.

Wait until the logon window is displayed.

End of Solution

lnxmedia

5 Start the lnxmedia virtual machine.

Solution

a In VMware, click the lnxmedia tab.

b Click the green Power On button on the toolbar to start the virtual
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

machine.

Wait until the logon window is displayed.

End of Solution

winclient
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
233 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation) Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–13
 6 Start the winclient virtual machine.

Solution

a In VMware, click the winclient tab.

b Click the green Power On button on the toolbar to start the virtual
machine.

Wait until the logon window is displayed.

End of Solution

lnxclient

7 Start the lnxclient virtual machine.

Solution

a In VMware, click the lnxclient tab.

b Click the green Power On button on the toolbar to start the virtual
machine.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Wait until the login window is displayed on the RedHat desktop.

End of Solution

winserver

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

234
B–14 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 8 Start the winserver virtual machine.

Solution

B
a In VMware, click the winserver tab.

b Click the green Power On button on the toolbar to start the virtual
machine.

Wait until the logon window is displayed.

End of Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

235 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation) Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–15
 Exercise 2: Logging on to virtual machines (VMware Workstation)

In this exercise, you log on to each virtual machine to become familiar with the
logon procedures and credentials for each system.

Note: Under normal circumstances, it is not necessary to access the console of the
vtl virtual machine. Do not log on to the vtl virtual machine unless
directed to do so by your instructor.

1 Access the console of the lnxmaster virtual machine and log on using the
student user ID.
– User name: student
– Password: training

lnxmaster
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Solution

a Click the lnxmaster tab.

b On the desktop of lnxmaster, click the mouse to establish keyboard

control.

c Click the entry for the student user ID.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

236
B–16 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 d When prompted, type training in the password field, and click Log In
(or press Enter).

Wait until the RedHat Linux desktop is displayed before continuing.

End of Solution
B

2 Obtain the fully qualified host name and operating system information for the
system. Record this information in the space provided.

Solution

a Navigate to System > About this Computer on the desktop of the

lnxmaster system.

b When the System Monitor window is displayed, record the fully qualified
host name of the system, and the operating system version information.

c Close the System Monitor window.

End of Solution

Fully qualified host name: lnxmaster.example.com

lnxclient OS version: RedHat Enterprise Linux Server 6.1

3 Obtain the IP address of the eth1 interface of the system. Record this
information in the space provided.

Solution

a Double-click the Terminal icon on the desktop of lnxmaster to open a

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

terminal window.

b At the command prompt, type the following command, and press Enter.

ifconfig eth1
End of Solution

lnxmaster IP address for eth1: 10.10.2.13

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

237 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation) Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–17
 lnxmedia

4 Access the console of the lnxmedia virtual machine and log on using the
student user ID.

– User name: student

– Password: training

Solution

a Click the lnxmedia tab.

b On the desktop of lnxmedia, click the mouse to establish keyboard

control.

c Click the entry for the student user ID.

d When prompted, type training in the password field, and click Log In
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

(or press Enter).

Wait until the RedHat Linux desktop is displayed before continuing.

End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

238
B–18 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 5 Obtain the fully qualified host name and operating system information for the
system. Record this information in the space provided.

Solution
B

a Navigate to System > About this Computer on the desktop of the

lnxmedia system.

b When the System Monitor window is displayed, record the fully qualified
host name of the system, and the operating system version information.

c Close the System Monitor window.

End of Solution

Fully qualified host name: lnxmedia.example.com

lnxmedia OS version: RedHat Enterprise Linux Server 6.1

6 Obtain the IP address of the eth1 interface of the system. Record this
information in the space provided.

Solution

a Double-click the Terminal icon on the desktop of lnxmedia to open a

terminal window.

b At the command prompt, type the following command, and press Enter.

ifconfig eth1
End of Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

lnxmedia IP address for eth1: 10.10.2.14

winclient

7 Access the console of the winclient virtual machine and log on using the
student user ID.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

239 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation) Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–19
 – User name: student
– Password: training
Solution

a Click the winclient tab.

b On the desktop of winclient, click the mouse to establish keyboard

control.

c From the VMware tool bar, select VM > Send Ctrl+Alt+Del.

d Click the icon to select the student user ID.

e When prompted, type the password for the student user ID.

› User name: student

› Password: training

f To log on, click the blue logon arrow or press Enter on your keyboard.

Wait until the Windows desktop is displayed before continuing.

End of Solution

Record the IP address assigned to this system and the operating system used by
the system.

winclient IP address: 10.10.2.101

winclient OS version: Windows 2008 R2 Service Pack 1

lnxclient
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

8 Access the console of the lnxclient virtual machine and log on using the
student user ID.

– User name: student

– Password: training

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

240
B–20 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 B

Solution

a Click the lnxclient tab.

b On the desktop of lnxclient, click the mouse to establish keyboard

control.

c Click the entry for the student user ID.

d When prompted, type training in the password field, and click Log In
(or press Enter).

Wait until the RedHat Linux desktop is displayed before continuing.

End of Solution

9 Obtain the fully qualified host name and operating system information for the
system. Record this information in the space provided.

Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

a Navigate to System > About this Computer on the desktop of the

lnxclient system.

b When the System Monitor window is displayed, record the fully qualified
host name of the system, and the operating system version information.

c Close the System Monitor window.

End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

241 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation) Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–21
 Fully qualified host name: lnxclient.example.com
lnxclient OS version: RedHat Enterprise Linux Server 6.1

10 Obtain the IP address of the eth1 interface of the system. Record this
information in the space provided.

Solution

a Double-click the Terminal icon on the desktop of lnxclient to open a

terminal window.

b At the command prompt, type the following command, and press Enter.

ifconfig eth1
End of Solution

lnxclient IP address for eth1: 10.10.2.102

winserver

11 Access the console of the winserver virtual machine and log on using the
student user ID.

– User name: student

– Password: training
Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

a Click the winserver tab.

b On the desktop of winserver, click the mouse to establish keyboard

control.

c From the VMware tool bar, select VM > Send Ctrl+Alt+Del.

d Click the icon to select the student user ID.

e When prompted, type the password for the student user ID.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

242
B–22 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 › User name: student
› Password: training

f To log on, click the blue logon arrow or press Enter on your keyboard.
B
Wait until the Windows desktop is displayed before continuing.
End of Solution

Record the IP address and the operating system version of the system in the
space provided.

winserver IP address: 10.10.2.21

winserver OS version: Windows 2008 R2 Service Pack 1
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

243 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation) Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–23
 Exercise 3: Adjusting the VMware view (VMware Workstation)

In this exercise, you adjust the VMware view controls to become familiar with
navigating a virtual machine.

lnxmaster

1 In the VMware Workstation menus, enable the Quick Switch view.

Solution

a Access the console of the lnxmaster virtual machine.

b In the VMware Workstation menus, select View > Quick Switch to enable
the Quick Switch view (or click the Quickswitch icon on the VMware
Workstation tool bar).

End of Solution

Note: If the Quick Switch icon is not displayed on the tool bar, modify the tool
bar display of VMware Workstation by selecting View > Toolbars. For
this course, display only the View toolbar, and hide the Power, Snapshot,
ACE, and Replay tool bars.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

How is the Quick Switch view different from the default view?

Answer: The workspace is enlarged to fit the screen. The display of

the other virtual machine tabs is included on the screen.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

244
B–24 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 2 Change back to the default view.

Solution
Press F11.
B
If the view does not change, press Ctrl+Alt on the keyboard to release the
keyboard from the virtual machine and press F11 again.
End of Solution

Note: When working through the lab exercises, use the F11 shortcut to toggle
between the default and Quick Switch views, as desired.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

245 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation) Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–25
 Exercise 4: Running basic commands (VMware Workstation)

In this exercise, you verify that the virtual machines can communicate using TCP/
IP on the virtual network.

Verifying communications from lnxmaster

1 Access the console of the lnxmaster virtual machine.

lnxmaster

2 On lnxmaster, open a Terminal window.

Solution
On the desktop, double-click the Terminal icon.
End of Solution

3 From the command prompt, ping each of the other five virtual machines in
the lab environment using both the fully qualified domain names and the short
names. The domain name is example.com. The names of the remaining
virtual machines are:

– lnxmedia.example.com
– winclient.example.com
– lnxclient.example.com
– winserver.example.com
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

– vtl.example.com
Solution
ping lnxmedia.example.com
ping lnxmedia
ping winclient.example.com
ping winclient
ping lnxclient.example.com
ping lnxclient
ping winserver.example.com
ping winserver

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

246
B–26 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 ping vtl.example.com
ping vtl
End of Solution

Was a reply received from each of the virtual machines, indicating that the B
lnxmaster master server system can communicate successfully with the
other virtual machines?

Answer: Yes, the output of the ping command shows a reply is

received from each of the virtual machine IP addresses.

Note: If a ping command reports “unknown host” or timeout errors, verify

the command syntax, and then contact the instructor for assistance.

Note: To reinforce a best practice, fully qualified host names are used for
system names throughout the remainder of the course.

Verifying communications from lnxmedia

1 Access the console of the lnxmedia virtual machine.

lnxmedia

2 On lnxmedia, open a Terminal window.

Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

On the desktop, double-click the Terminal icon.

End of Solution

3 From the command prompt, ping each of the other five virtual machines in
the lab environment using both the fully qualified domain names and the short
names. The domain name is example.com. The names of the remaining
virtual machines are:

– lnxmaster.example.com
– winclient.example.com
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
247 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation) Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–27
 – lnxclient.example.com
– winserver.example.com
– vtl.example.com
Solution

ping lnxmaster.example.com
ping lnxmaster
ping winclient.example.com
ping winclient
ping lnxclient.example.com
ping lnxclient
ping winserver.example.com
ping winserver
ping vtl.example.com
ping vtl
End of Solution

Was a reply received from each of the virtual machines, indicating that the
lnxmedia system can communicate successfully with the other virtual
machines in the lab environment?

Answer: Yes, the output of the ping command shows a reply is

received from each of the virtual machine IP addresses.

Note: To verify network communications from every virtual machine to all other
virtual machines in the lab environment, access a command prompt
window or terminal window on each virtual machine and ping all other
systems, using both their fully qualified and short names. Remember, when
the ping command is issued from a UNIX/Linux system, the pings are
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

sent until the command is manually terminated (use Ctrl+C to terminate the
ping command).

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

248
B–28 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Exercise 5: Using SSH (VMware Workstation)

In this exercise, you establish an SSH connection using PuTTY from winserver B
to lnxmaster, lnxmedia, or lnxclient, the Linux-based systems in this
virtual lab environment. An SSH connection may be used when performing
command line operations on the Linux-based client to improve performance of
those operations.

Note: When directed to access the lnxmaster, lnxmedia, or lnxclient

tabs in VMware, as an alternative to clicking on the tabs for these systems
in VMWare Workstation, you can use an SSH connection from the
winserver virtual machine. In some cases, this method of connection
may be preferred for performance reasons.

winserver

1 On the desktop of winserver, use PuTTY to connect to

lnxclient.example.com using SSH and log in as the student user.
– Login: student
– Password: training
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Solution

a Access the console of the winserver virtual machine.

b Double-click the PuTTY icon.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

249 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (VMware Workstation) Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–29
 c On the PuTTY Configuration screen, under Saved Sessions, select
lnxclient.example.com.

d Click Load.

e Click Open.

f When prompted, log in as the student user:

› Login: student
› Password: training
End of Solution

2 From the remote session into lnxclient, ping winserver by its fully
qualified name (winserver.example.com).

Solution
ping winserver.example.com
End of Solution

Was a reply received from winserver.example.com, indicating that the

lnxclient and winserver systems can communicate successfully using
PuTTY and ping?

Answer: Yes, the output of the ping command shows a reply is

received from the winserver.example.com virtual
machine. PuTTY can be used from
winserver.example.com to access the Linux-based
virtual machines in the lab environment.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

3 Close the PuTTY console window.

End of lab

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

250
B–30 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 B

Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize)

This lab activity provides you with an introduction to the lab delivery environment
used for this course, enabling you to successfully navigate and use the lab systems
provided for the course.
Symantec NetBackup courses may be delivered in a number of settings:
• In a traditional classroom, with physical systems provided for performing lab
activities
• In a virtual classroom, with online access provided to lab systems
Regardless of the setting in which you attend this NetBackup 7.5 Administration
course, the lab environment is provided using virtual lab systems. The lab systems
are deployed using one of two delivery platforms:
• VMware Workstation
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

• The Hatsize delivery platform

The user interfaces provided in these two lab delivery environments differ. This
lab introduction activity provides you with practice navigating and performing
typical activities related to the use of the virtual machines provided for this course.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

251 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–31
 Lab environment overview
The labs for this course are performed within a virtual environment consisting of
six virtual machines, as illustrated on the slide. This virtual environment has been
developed specifically for this course and is described in the following sections.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

252
B–32 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 B

Virtual machine configuration

The lab activities for this course use the six virtual machines identified on the slide
and in Table 1. The introductory page of each lab activity identifies the virtual
machines that are used in the lab activity. Icons, such as those shown in the first
column on the slide, are displayed to indicate which virtual machine is used to
perform each of the lab steps.

System Description Fully Qualified Host Name

Name
vtl Virtual tape library with vtl.example.com
two tape drives
lnxmaster NetBackup 7.5 master/ lnxmaster.example.com
EMM/media server
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

lnxmedia NetBackup 7.5 media lnxmedia.example.com

server
winclient NetBackup 7.5 client winclient.example.com
lnxclient NetBackup 7.5 client lnxclient.example.com
winserver OpsCenter 7.5 server and winserver.example.com
NetBackup media server
Table 1: Virtual Machine names and descriptions

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

253 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize) Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–33
 Note: In the following exercises, the virtual machines are identified by the system
names listed in Table 1.

Virtual machine account information

Refer to Table 2 for the logon credentials for each of the virtual machines used in
this lab environment. For most lab steps, log on to the virtual machines using the
student user ID. In some cases, the lab instructions may direct you to log on to a
virtual machine as the Administrator or root user.

System name student Logon Administrator Logon

Credentials Credentials
lnxmaster User: student User: Administrator
Password: training Password: training
lnxmedia User: student User: Administrator
Password: training Password: training
winclient User: student User: Administrator
Password: training Password: training
winserver User: student User: Administrator
Password: training Password: training
lnxclient User: student User: root
Password: training Password: training
vtl User: root
Password: veritas1
Table 2: Virtual Machine logon credentials

Accessing virtual machines

How and where you attend the NetBackup 7.5 Administration class determines
how you access the virtual machines in the lab environment. Your instructor will
direct you to the appropriate set of lab procedures for the environment you are
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

using in this class.

• If you are working with Hatsize, continue to the Hatsize introduction section
on the following page.
• If you are working with VMware Workstation, in either a physical or virtual
classroom, locate and complete the Lab introduction exercise for VMware
Workstation.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

254
B–34 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 B

Hatsize introduction
In this lab activity, you become familiar with the lab environment used in the
Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer course, including the methods
used to access the lab systems.
The hands-on portion of this lab activity enables you to perform basic operations
on virtual machines, as shown on the Hatsize introduction slide. Adopting the best
practice guidelines provided in this lab enables you to perform the remaining lab
activities of this course more efficiently.

Note: Only use these exercises if the class is using the hosted Hatsize platform to
access the lab environment. Instructions for VMware Workstation lab
environments are introduced in a separate lab activity.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Two parallel versions of the labs enable you to choose the level of detail that suits
your experience level:
• Appendix A provides step-by-step lab instructions.
• Appendix B provides complete lab instructions and solutions.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

255 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize) Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–35
 Hatsize lab environment
Table 4 provides a translation of virtual machine system names referred to in the
lab guide to the corresponding system names in the Hatsize interface. Each system
name is prefixed with K#- (number) in Hatsize.

System
Hatsize Name Description
Name
vtl K#-vtl.example.com Virtual tape library with
two tape drive (not visible
in Hatsize)

lnxmaster K#-lnxmaster.example.com NetBackup 7.5 master/

EMM/media server
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

lnxmedia K#-lnxmedia.example.com NetBackup 7.5 media

server
winclient K#-winclient.example.com NetBackup 7.5 client
lnxclient K#-lnxclient.example.com NetBackup 7.5 client
winserver K#-winserver.example.com OpsCenter 7.5 server
and NetBackup media
server
Table 3: Virtual Machine names and descriptions

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

256
B–36 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 B

Hatsize interface
The screen shot on the slide shows the Hatsize interface used to access the virtual
machines included in your lab environment. Instead of using tabs, such as the tabs
displayed in the VMware Workstation user interface, you access Hatsize virtual
machines from the Operations and Window menus. Other key interface elements
include:
• Title Bar: Indicates the currently connected machine and whether you have
control of the machine or are in view-only mode
• Operations: Is used to make the initial connection to virtual machines (other
than the VM that is designated as the Primary VM)
• Window: Is used to switch between active virtual machines, after the initial
connection has been made to the VMs
• System Control: Is used to start, stop, and restart virtual machines
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

• Time Remaining: Indicates the time remaining in the session

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

257 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize) Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–37
 Exercise 1: Connecting to the lab environment (Hatsize)

In this exercise, you log on to Hatsize. For each lab environment in Hatsize, a
specific virtual machine is marked as the primary machine. All other machines are
marked as secondary machines. When you connect to the Hatsize interface, you
are initially and automatically connected to the primary machine. In this lab
environment, the primary machine is the virtual machine, lnxmaster.

1 Locate the Hatsize portal URL and login credentials from your registration e-
mail. Record your credentials here:

Hatsize user name:

Hatsize password:

2 In Internet Explorer, open the Hatsize portal URL and log on with your
assigned user name and password.

Solution
The logon screen in the browser is similar to this:
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

End of Solution

3 After logging in, find your class in the Current Classes table and click Enter.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

258
B–38 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Sample:

4 In the Agenda for your class, find the Day 1 lab session and click OPEN.

Note: All lab sessions listed for your course are identical. You can connect to
your lab environment using any of the Lab entries listed for the course.

5 Confirm that you see the primary machine connecting. For this course, the
primary machine is lnxmaster.

6 Wait for the first console window to open. This console window is for the
virtual machine designated as the primary machine for this lab environment.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

259 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize) Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–39
 The console that is displayed is similar to this screen shot.

lnxmaster

7 Click in the console window and log on to lnxmaster using the following
credentials:

User name student

Password training
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

260
B–40 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Exercise 2: Connecting to additional virtual machines (Hatsize)

In this exercise, you connect to additional virtual machines to become familiar B

with switching between systems.

lnxmaster

1 Use the Operations menu to connect to the secondary virtual machine,

lnxmedia.
Solution

Select Operations > Connect To Secondary > K#-lnxmedia.

End of Solution

lnxmedia

2 Click in the console window of the lnxmedia system and log on to the
system using the following credentials:

User name student

Password training

3 Use the Window menu to switch back to lnxmaster.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Solution
Select Window > K#-lnxmaster.
End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

261 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–41
 Note: If you have not yet connected to one of the secondary machines, you are
unable to use the Window menu to switch to the console of that machine.
You must first use the Operations menu to perform a “Connect to
Secondary” operation to make the initial connection the virtual machine.

lnxmaster

4 Use the Operations menu to connect to the secondary virtual machine,

winclient.

Solution
Select Operations > Connect To Secondary > K#-winclient.
End of Solution

winclient

5 Use the Operations menu to send a Ctrl-Alt-Del to the virtual machine.

Solution
Select Operations > Send Ctrl-Alt-Del.
End of Solution

6 Click in the console window of the winclient system and log on to the
system using the following credentials:
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

User name student

Password training

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

262
B–42 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 7 Use the Operations menu to connect to the secondary virtual machine,
lnxclient.

Solution
B
Select Operations > Connect To Secondary > K#-lnxclient.
End of Solution

lnxclient

8 Click in the console window of the lnxclient system and log in to the
system using the following credentials:

User name student

Password training

9 Use the Operations menu to connect to the secondary virtual machine,

winserver.

Solution
Select Operations > Connect To Secondary > K#-winserver.
End of Solution

winserver

10 Use the Operations menu to send a Ctrl-Alt-Del to the virtual machine.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Solution
Select Operations > Send Ctrl-Alt-Del.
End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

263 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize) Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–43
 11 Click in the console window of the winserver system and log on to the
system using the following credentials:

User name student

Password training

12 Use the Window menu to switch back to the lnxmaster virtual machine.

Solution
Select Window > K#-lnxmaster.
End of Solution

Note: In general, there is no need to log into the vtl virtual machine in your lab
environment. Only log into the vtl virtual machine at the direction of
your instructor.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

264
B–44 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Exercise 3: Running basic commands (Hatsize)

In this exercise, you verify that the virtual machines can communicate using TCP/ B
IP on the virtual network.

System Name Fully Qualified Host Name

vtl vtl.example.com
lnxmaster lnxmaster.example.com
lnxmedia lnxmedia.example.com
winclient winclient.example.com
lnxclient lnxclient.example.com
winserver winserver.example.com

Verifying communications from lnxmaster

1 Access the console of the lnxmaster virtual machine.

lnxmaster

2 On lnxmaster, open a Terminal window.

Solution
On the desktop, double-click the Terminal icon.
End of Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

3 From the command prompt, ping lnxmedia, using its fully qualified host
name.

Solution
ping lnxmedia.example.com
End of Solution

Was a reply received to the ping command, indicating that the lnxmaster
and lnxmedia systems are able to communicate using the fully qualified host
name?
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
265 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize) Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–45
 Answer: Yes, the command output displays a reply is received
from the lnxmedia IP address.

Note: If a ping command reports unknown host or timeout errors, verify the
command syntax, and then contact the instructor for assistance.

4 From the command prompt, ping lnxmedia using its short name
(lnxmedia).

Solution
ping lnxmedia
End of Solution

Was a reply received, indicating that lnxmaster and lnxmedia systems

are able to communicate using the short host name?

Answer: Yes, the command output displays a reply is received

from the lnxmedia IP address.

Note: To reinforce a best practice, fully qualified host names are used for
system names throughout the remainder of the course.

5 From the command prompt of lnxmaster, ping each of the remaining

virtual machines in your lab environment, to verify the TCP/IP
communications with each system. Ping each system using both the short and
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

fully-qualified names. The names of the remaining virtual machines are:

– vtl.example.com
– winclient.example.com
– lnxclient.example.com
– winserver.example.com

Solution
ping vtl.example.com
ping vtl
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
266
B–46 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 ping winclient.example.com
ping winclient
ping lnxclient.example.com
ping lnxclient
B
ping winserver.example.com
ping winserver
End of Solution

Was a reply received, indicating that systems are able to communicate

successfully?

Answer: Yes, the output of each ping command displays a reply

received from the IP address of the system that is
pinged.

Note: If a ping command reports unknown host or timeout errors, verify the
command syntax, and then contact the instructor for assistance.

Verifying communications from lnxmedia

1 Use the Window menu to switch to the console of lnxmedia.

Solution

Select Window > K#-lnxmedia.

End of Solution

lnxmedia
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

2 Open a Terminal window and ping each of the following virtual machines,
using both the fully qualified and short names.

– lnxmaster.example.com
– vtl.example.com
– winclient.example.com
– lnxclient.example.com
– winserver.example.com

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

267 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize) Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–47
 Solution
ping lnxmaster.example.com
ping lnxmaster
ping vtl.example.com
ping vtl
ping winclient.example.com
ping winclient
ping lnxclient.example.com
ping lnxclient
ping winserver.example.com
ping winserver
End of Solution

Was a reply received, indicating that systems are able to communicate

successfully?

Answer: Yes, the output of each ping command displays a reply

received from the IP address of the system that is
pinged.

Note: If a ping command reports unknown host or timeout errors, verify the
command syntax, and then contact the instructor for assistance.

Verifying communications from winclient

1 Use the Window menu to switch to the console of winclient.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Solution

Select Window > K#-winclient.

End of Solution

winclient

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

268
B–48 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 2 Open a command prompt and ping each of the following virtual machines,
using both the fully qualified and short names.

– lnxmaster.example.com
– lnxmedia.example.com B
– vtl.example.com
– lnxclient.example.com
– winserver.example.com

Solution
ping lnxmaster.example.com
ping lnxmaster
ping lnxmedia.example.com
ping lnxmedia
ping vtl.example.com
ping vtl
ping lnxclient.example.com
ping lnxclient
ping winserver.example.com
ping winserver
End of Solution

Was a reply received, indicating that systems are able to communicate

successfully?

Answer: Yes, the output of each ping command displays a reply

received from the IP address of the system that is
pinged.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Note: If a ping command reports unknown host or timeout errors, verify the
command syntax, and then contact the instructor for assistance.

Verifying communications from lnxclient

1 Use the Window menu to switch to the console of lnxclient.

Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

269 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize) Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–49
 Select Window > K#-lnxclient.
End of Solution

lnxclient

2 Open a Terminal window and ping each of the following virtual machines,
using both the fully qualified and short names.

– lnxmaster.example.com
– lnxmedia.example.com
– winclient.example.com
– winserver.example.com

Solution
ping lnxmaster.example.com
ping lnxmaster
ping lnxmedia.example.com
ping lnxmedia
ping winclient.example.com
ping winclient
ping winserver.example.com
ping winserver
End of Solution

Was a reply received, indicating that systems are able to communicate

successfully?

Answer: Yes, the output of each ping command displays a reply

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

received from the IP address of the system that is

pinged.

Note: If a ping command reports unknown host or timeout errors, verify the
command syntax, and then contact the instructor for assistance.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

270
B–50 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Verifying communications from winserver

1 Use the Window menu to switch to the console of winserver.

Solution B

Select Window > K#-winserver.

End of Solution

winserver

2 Open a command prompt and ping each of the following virtual machines,
using both the fully qualified and short names.

– lnxmaster.example.com
– lnxmedia.example.com
– winclient.example.com
– lnxclient.example.com
– vtl.example.com

Solution
ping lnxmaster.example.com
ping lnxmaster
ping lnxmedia.example.com
ping lnxmedia
ping winclient.example.com
ping winclient
ping lnxclient.example.com
ping lnxclient
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

ping vtl.example.com
ping vtl
End of Solution

Was a reply received, indicating that systems are communicating successfully?

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

271 Lab 0: Introduction to Lab Environment (Hatsize)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–51
 Answer: Yes, the output of each ping command displays a reply
received from the IP address of the system that is
pinged.

Note: If a ping command reports unknown host or timeout errors, verify the
command syntax, and then contact the instructor for assistance.

Note: In general, you do not need to log in to the vtl virtual machine in your lab
environment. If TCP/IP communications with the vtl virtual machine
indicate a potential issue, notify your instructor.

End of lab
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

272
B–52 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 B

Lab 0: Verifying the NetBackup Installation

In this lab, you perform tasks to prepare for the remainder of the course, including:
• Verifying the master server installation and license keys
• Verifying the installation and license keys of two media servers
• Verifying the OpsCenter configuration and license keys
• Verifying the NetBackup device, storage unit, Storage Lifecycle Policy,
volume and volume pool, and policy configuration
• Run backup and restore jobs to verify NetBackup operation.

Note: If you are attending this training as a continuation of the Symantec

NetBackup 7.5 for Windows: Administration course, you can skip this lab
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

activity. You perform the steps in previous lab activities of the course

Two parallel versions of the labs enable you to choose the level of detail that suits
your experience:
• Appendix A provides high level step-by-step lab instructions.
• Appendix B provides complete detailed step-by-step lab instructions and
solutions.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

273 Lab 0: Verifying the NetBackup Installation Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–53
 Exercise 1: Verifying master server license keys

Verifying the NetBackup license keys

In the steps that follow, you verify the NetBackup license key on the master server,
to determine if the license key is valid and, if necessary, add a new, valid
evaluation license key.

Note: A NetBackup evaluation license key is used for purposes of this course.
This license key enables all NetBackup functionality for a limited time. It
is possible that the evaluation license key that was installed at the time the
course was released has expired. If this is the case, a new, valid license key
must be installed before NetBackup can be used.

Verifying the NetBackup license keys

In the steps that follow, you verify the NetBackup license key on the master server,
to determine if the license key is valid and, if necessary, add a new, valid
evaluation license key.

Note: A NetBackup evaluation license key is used for purposes of this course.
This license key enables all NetBackup functionality for a limited time. It
is possible that the evaluation license key that was installed at the time of
the course release has expired. If this is the case, a new, valid license key
must be installed before NetBackup can be used.

lnxmaster
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

1 Log in to the lnxmaster master server using the student user ID.

2 Right-click the Terminal icon on the desktop of your master server system,
lnxmaster, and select Open.

3 Type su - root, and press Enter, to become superuser.

4 Type the command: get_license_key, and press Enter.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

274
B–54 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 5 When the menu is displayed, type F, and press enter to List Active License
Keys.

6 When prompted to Enter the name of the host, press Enter to accept the
B
default, lnxmaster.example.com

7 The output of the command displays information about the NetBackup license
key or keys for the system. Locate and record the

Host: lnxmaster.example.com
Product: NetBackup Enterprise Server
Expires (date):

8 Is the NetBackup license key still valid, or has it expired?

Answer:

9 If the NetBackup license key on your master server has expired, perform the
following steps to add a new, valid NetBackup evaluation license key.

Note: If the license key on your master server is valid, review the following steps
for adding a license key to the master server system.

10 Contact your instructor to obtain a valid NetBackup license key. Record the
new license key in the space provided:
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

NetBackup license key:

11 In the menu, type A (Add a License Key), and press Enter.

12 When prompted to Enter license key, type the license key provided by your
instructor, and press Enter.

13 Note the results of the adding the license key.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

275 Lab 0: Verifying the NetBackup Installation Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–55
 Note: You must be superuser to enter a license key. You can list license keys
using the get_license_key utility without superuser privileges.

14 When the menu is displayed, type F, and press enter to List Active License
Keys.

15 When prompted to Enter the name of the host, press Enter to accept the
default, lnxmaster.example.com

16 The output of the command displays information about the NetBackup license
key or keys for the system. Locate and record the information in the table.

Host: lnxmaster.example.com
Product: NetBackup Enterprise Server
Expires (date):

17 Type q, and press Enter, to Quit License Key Utility.

Viewing, stopping, and starting processes on a NetBackup server

In the following steps, you use NetBackup commands to view, stop, and start the
NetBackup processes on the master server system.

CAUTION Special caution must be used when stopping NetBackup

daemons and processes because that operation disrupts backup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

and restore activity that is in progress at the time that the

operation is performed.

1 At the command prompt, type bpps -a, and press Enter, to list the running
NetBackup processes.

2 Note the long list of processes that is displayed in the command output.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

276
B–56 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Note: You must be superuser to run the bpps, netbackup stop and,
netbackup start, commands.

B
3 At the command prompt, type netbackup stop, and press Enter to stop all
running NetBackup processes.

The command takes a few moments to complete.

4 At the command prompt, type bpps -a, and press Enter, to list the running
NetBackup processes.

5 Note that no NetBackup processes are displayed in the command output.

6 At the command prompt, type netbackup start, and press Enter, to start
the NetBackup processes.

7 At the command prompt, type bpps -a, and press Enter, to list the running
NetBackup processes.

8 Note the long list of processes that is displayed in the command output.

9 At the command prompt, type exit, and press Enter, to exit superuser.

Viewing NetBackup master server directory contents

In the steps that follow, you locate key NetBackup installation directories and view
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

the contents of these directories. In addition, you view the Windows PATH
environment variable settings, to verify that important NetBackup directories are
included in the PATH.

lnxmaster

1 Change directory to the /usr/openv/netbackup directory.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

277 Lab 0: Verifying the NetBackup Installation Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–57
 2 List the directory contents and note the directories that reside in the /usr/
openv/netbackup directory, including the bin, Client, db, and logs
directories.

3 Locate the version file, and view the contents of the file.

4 Record the NetBackup version number indicated by the contents of the

version file.

NetBackup version:

5 Locate the bp.conf file, and view the contents of the file.

6 Record the information found in the bp.conf file.

First SERVER entry:

First SERVER entry:

Third SERVER entry:

OPS_CENTER_SERVER_NAME:

7 Execute the command: echo $PATH.

The key NetBackup directories are listed in the table.

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin
/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/admincmd
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/goodies
/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/support
/usr/openv/volmgr/bin
Table 1: Important NetBackup directory paths on UNIX/Linux servers

Note: Additional NetBackup paths may be included in the PATH environment

variable as needed, depending upon whether optional NetBackup-related
software is installed on the system. An example of this optional software is
the OpsCenter Server.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

278
B–58 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Exercise 2: Verifying the lnxmedia media server license keys

The evaluation license key that was initially installed on your media server
systems has expired. Before you can continue with the course you must install a B
valid NetBackup license key.

1 Log in to the lnxmedia media server using the student user ID.

2 Right-click the Terminal icon on the desktop of your media server system,
lnxmedia, and select Open.

3 Type su - root, and press Enter, to become superuser.

4 Type the command: get_license_key, and press Enter.

5 When the menu is displayed, type F, and press enter to List Active License
Keys.

6 When prompted to Enter the name of the host, press Enter to accept the
default, lnxmedia.example.com

7 The output of the command displays information about the NetBackup license
key or keys for the system. Locate and record the

Host: lnxmedia.example.com
Product: NetBackup Enterprise Server
Expires (date):
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

8 Is the NetBackup license key still valid, or has it expired?

Answer:

9 If the NetBackup license key on your media server has expired, perform the
following steps to add a new, valid NetBackup evaluation license key.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

279 Lab 0: Verifying the NetBackup Installation Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–59
 Note: If the license key on your media server is valid, review the following steps
for adding a license key to the master server system.

10 Contact your instructor to obtain a valid NetBackup license key. Record the
new license key in the space provided:

NetBackup license key:

11 In the menu, type A (Add a License Key), and press Enter.

12 When prompted to Enter license key, type the license key provided by your
instructor, and press Enter.

13 Note the results of the adding the license key.

Note: You must be superuser to enter a license key. You can list license keys
using the get_license_key utility without superuser privileges.

14 When the menu is displayed, type F, and press enter to List Active License
Keys.

15 When prompted to Enter the name of the host, press Enter to accept the
default, lnxmedia.example.com

16 The output of the command displays information about the NetBackup license
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

key or keys for the system. Locate and record the information in the table.

Host: lnxmedia.example.com
Product: NetBackup Enterprise Server
Expires (date):

17 Type q, and press Enter, to Quit License Key Utility.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

280
B–60 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Viewing, stopping, and starting processes on a NetBackup server
In the following steps, you use NetBackup commands to view, stop, and start the
NetBackup processes on the media server system.

B
CAUTION Special caution must be used when stopping NetBackup
daemons and processes because that operation disrupts backup
and restore activity that is in progress at the time that the
operation is performed.

1 At the command prompt, type bpps -a, and press Enter, to list the running
NetBackup processes.

2 Note the processes that are displayed in the command output.

Far fewer daemons and processes are running on the media server than on the
master server, especially during periods of low backup and restore activity.

Note: You must be superuser to run the bpps, netbackup stop and,
netbackup start, commands.

3 At the command prompt, type netbackup stop, and press Enter.

The command takes a few moments to complete.

4 At the command prompt, type bpps -a, and press Enter, to list the running
NetBackup processes.

5 Note that no NetBackup processes are displayed in the command output.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

6 At the command prompt, type netbackup start, and press Enter, to start
the NetBackup processes.

7 At the command prompt, type bpps -a, and press Enter, to list the running
NetBackup processes.

8 Note the processes that are displayed in the command output.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

281 Lab 0: Verifying the NetBackup Installation
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–61
 Exercise 3: Applying what you have learned

In this lab exercise you apply what you have learned in the previous exercises to
verify the installation of NetBackup 7.5 on an additional Windows-based media
server that is provided in your lab environment.

Scenario
The winserver system in your lab environment is a Windows-based media
server system that is associated with the lnxmaster master server. The
NetBackup 7.5 server and client software has been pre-installed on the
winserver system, but the installation has not been verified.

Objectives and Requirements

Your task is to verify the NetBackup media server and client installation on
winserver, including:
• Verifying the presence of key NetBackup directories and files
• Verifying the version of NetBackup that is installed
• Verifying that key NetBackup directories are included in the PATH
environment variable for the system
• Verifying that a valid NetBackup evaluation license key is installed; and
installing a new, valid evaluation license key, as required
• Verifying that NetBackup services are running on the system

Key Information
The table provides information relating to the configuration of the winserver
media server system.

Host name of system: winserver.example.com

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Host name of master server lnxmaster.example.com

Administrator account password training
student account password training

Obtain a valid NetBackup evaluation license key. Record the key below.

NetBackup evaluation key

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

282
B–62 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Verify the Solution
When you have successfully verified the items listed in the Objectives and
Requirements section of this lab exercise, you can be confident that the
winserver system is ready to be configured for operation as a NetBackup
media server. B

Note: The winserver system is also an OpsCenter 7.5 server in this lab
environment. You verify the OpsCenter installation and use the OpsCenter
user interface in the next lab activity.

Changes made to Windows system to support this lab environment

Note: The Windows 2008 environment has been optimized for simplicity of use
in this lab environment. Some non-default changes include being able to
view file extensions and hidden files and folders, and changing the Local
Security Policy of User Account Control: Run all administrators in Admin
Approval Mode to Disabled to reduce the number of Window's security
authorization prompts that are displayed.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

283 Lab 0: Verifying the NetBackup Installation Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–63
 Exercise 4: Verifying the OpsCenter installation

OpsCenter provides monitoring and reporting capabilities for NetBackup and

other supported backup applications. In this lab exercise, you verify the operation
of OpsCenter, including the verification of the OpsCenter license key. Standard
OpsCenter reporting is a no-charge feature of NetBackup. OpsCenter Analytics
provides for additional reporting capabilities and requires a license key.

1 Access the console of your winserver system.

winserver

2 Log on to winserver using the student user ID.

3 Locate the WebUI Login icon on the desktop of winserver. Right-click the
WebUI Login and select Open.

When the browser window opens, a message is displayed indicating “There is

a problem with this Website’s security certificate”.

4 Click Continue to this website (not recommended).

The OpsCenter log on screen is displayed.

5 Type the default OpsCenter username and password and click Log On.

Username: admin
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Password: password
Domain: OpsCenterUsers(vx) (provided by default)

Note: If the Domain field on the OpsCenter Log On screen is vacant it generally
indicates that the OpsCenter server services may not be running. If you
encounter this situation, notify your instructor.

The OpsCenter Web interface is displayed.

6 Note the primary tabs provided by the OpsCenter interface.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
284
B–64 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 – Home
– Monitor
– Manage
– Reports
B
– Search & Hold
– Settings

The Monitor tab is selected by default.

7 Locate and click the Settings tab.

8 Note the sub-tabs under the Settings tab.

– User Preferences
– Configuration
– Views
– Users
– Recipients
– Chargeback

9 Click the Settings > Configuration sub-tab.

10 Note the large number of configuration categories that are listed under the
Settings > Configuration sub-tab, including the NetBackup, Agent, License,
Data Purge, SMTP Server, and ThreatCon tabs.

11 Click the License tab (under Settings > Configuration).

12 Note there is no license keys configured. Base function of OpsCenter does not
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

require a license key.

13 Click the NetBackup tab.

14 Record the name of the NetBackup master server listed under the NetBackup
tab.

NetBackup master server lnxmaster.example.com

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

285 Lab 0: Verifying the NetBackup Installation Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–65
 Note: The presence of a master server name under the Settings > Configuration
> NetBackup tab indicates that OpsCenter has been configured to collect
information from that master server.

15 View the information displayed in the General tab located at the bottom of the
OpsCenter user interface.

16 Click to view the Data Collection Status tab to view detailed information
about the information types that have been collected.

17 Feel free to browse the OpsCenter user interface to view the contents of other
tabs provided by the interface.

18 Log out of OpsCenter.

19 Close the Web browser window.

20 Continue to the next exercise.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

286
B–66 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Exercise 5: Verifying the NetBackup configuration

NetBackup 7.5 has been pre-installed and configured to enable you to perform B
NetBackup management and administration tasks in a working backup
environment. This exercise provides you with an introduction to the NetBackup
configuration.

Verifying the NetBackup configuration

In the following steps, you verify the NetBackup device, storage unit, volume
pool, media, and policy configuration that is the starting point for this Symantec
NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer course.

1 Access the console of the master server system.

lnxmaster

2 In the open Terminal window on the master server, execute the command,
jnbSA&, to launch the NetBackup Administration Console.

The NetBackup Administration Console login window is displayed.

3 Log in to the NetBackup Administration Console using the user name,

student. (password = training)

The NetBackup Administration Console is displayed.

4 Select Media and Device Management > Devices in the left pane of the
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Administration Console.

5 Verify the NetBackup device configuration by checking for the robot and tape
drives entries in the NetBackup Administration Console.

– Two entries for the TLD(0) robot exist:

› one entry for lnxmaster.example.com
› one entry for lnxmedia.example.com
– Two entries exist for tape drives:
› one entry for QUANTUM SUPERDLT1.000
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
287 Lab 0: Verifying the NetBackup Installation Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–67
 › one entry for QUANTUM SUPERDLT1.001
› Two drive paths exist for each of the tape drives; a path to the drive for
lnxmaster.example.com and a path for
lnxmedia.example.com.

6 Use the Device Monitor to verify that the status of both tape drives is UP, and
that the drive paths to the drives are UP, from each media servers,
lnxmaster.example.com and lnxmedia.example.com.

7 Verify the NetBackup storage unit configuration in the NetBackup

Administration Console. The following storage units should exist:

– advdisk1_stu_lnxmaster
– advdisk2_stu_lnxmaster
– bdisk_stu_lnxmaster
– bdisk_stu_lnxmedia
– catalog_stu_lnxmaster
– tape_stu_lnxmaster
– tape_stu_lnxmedia

8 Verify the NetBackup Storage Lifecycle Policy configuration in the

NetBackup Administration Console. A single SLP should exist:
SLP1_test

9 Verify the volume pool configuration in the NetBackup Administration

Console. The following volume pools should exist:

– CatalogBackup
– DataStore
– duplicate_tapes
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

– NetBackup
– None
– scratch_tapes
– server_tapes

10 Verify the media (tape volumes) configuration in the NetBackup

Administration Console. Entries for the following Media IDs should exist:
090000 through 09000D (14 tapes).

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

288
B–68 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 The Media Status, Time Assigned, Images, and Valid Images column
information for the tapes may vary substantially. The majority of the tapes
should be unassigned, and be in the scratch_tapes volume pool. A few
tapes should be in the server_tapes volume pool, and there should be least
one tape is each of the duplicate_tapes and CatalogBackup volume B
pools.

11 Verify the policy configuration in the NetBackup Administration Console.

The following policies should exist:

– catalog_backup
– inlinecopy_backup
– lnxclient_test_bdisk_media
– lnxclient_test_wizard (deactivated)
– winclient_test_bdisk_master
– winclient_test_slp
– winclient_test_tape_master
– winclient_test_wizard (deactivated)

Verifying file system backup operations

In the following steps you perform manual backups to disk and tape storage to
verify the success of the catalog recovery operation.

lnxmaster

1 Select NetBackup Management >Policies in the left pane of the

Administration Console.

2 Run a manual backup of the lnxclient.example.com client using the

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Full schedule of the lnxlcient_test_bdisk_media policy.

3 Use the Activity Monitor to monitor the progress of the backup job. Verify
that the job runs to successful completion. If the job fails, record the status
code, and notify your instructor.

4 Run a manual backup of the winclient.example.com client using the

Full schedule of the winclient_test_bdisk_master policy.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

289 Lab 0: Verifying the NetBackup Installation Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–69
 5 Use the Activity Monitor to monitor the progress of the backup job. Verify
that the job runs to successful completion. If the job fails, record the status
code, and notify your instructor.

6 Run a manual backup of the winclient.example.com client using the

Full schedule of the winclient_test_tape_master policy.

7 Use the Activity Monitor to monitor the progress of the backup job. Verify
that the job runs to successful completion. If the job fails, record the status
code, and notify your instructor.

8 Run a manual backup of the winclient.example.com client using the

Full-slp schedule of the winclient_test_slp policy. This backup
request results in multiple jobs.

9 Use the Activity Monitor to monitor the progress of the resulting backup and
duplication jobs. Verify that all the job runs to successful completion. If any of
the jobs fail, record the status code or codes, and notify your instructor.

Verifying file system restore operations

In the following steps you perform a simple file system restore operation to verify
the ability of NetBackup to successfully restore client file system data.

lnxmaster

1 Use the Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI on the master server system, to
perform a restore of file system data using the following information:
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

– Server to use for the restore: lnxmaster.example.com

– Source client for the restore: winclient.example.com
– Destination client for the restore: winclient.example.com
– Policy type for the restore: MS-Windows
– Restore from the most recent Full Backup that was created using the
winclient_test_tape_master.
– Restore the folder, G:\data\smallfiles, and its contents to the
alternate directory, G:\alt-directory\smallfiles folder.
– Mark the check box for Overwrite existing files

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

290
B–70 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 2 View the status of the restore operation using the View Status window of the
Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI.

3 Verify that the status of the restore job is successful.

B

If the restore fails, note any error messages posted in the View Status window.
Access the Activity Monitor to view the entry for the failed restore job.
Record the status code for the failed restore job, and notify your instructor.

4 Close the Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI on the master server system.

End of lab
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

291 Lab 0: Verifying the NetBackup Installation
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–71
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

292
B–72 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 B

Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup

In this lab, you perform tasks to reinforce the concepts presented in the lesson,
including:
• Customizing the NetBackup Activity Monitor to enable more efficient
monitoring of NetBackup jobs
• Managing jobs using the suspend, resume, restart, and job priority controls that
are provided in the NetBackup Administration Console
• Using NetBackup reports to enable more efficient management of NetBackup
• Optional: Viewing the available OpsCenter reports and running selected
reports.

Two parallel versions of the labs enable you to choose the level of detail that suits
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

your experience:
• Appendix A provides high level step-by-step lab instructions.
• Appendix B provides complete detailed step-by-step lab instructions and
solutions.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

293 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–73
 Exercise 1: Customizing the Activity Monitor

In this exercise, you customize the NetBackup Activity Monitor to enable you to
more efficiently monitor and manage NetBackup jobs. To accomplish this, you
perform two primary tasks:
• Modifying the Activity Monitor column layout
• Configuring and selecting filters to alter the jobs displayed in the Activity
Monitor.

Customizing the Activity Monitor column layout

By default, the NetBackup Activity Monitor displays a large amount of
information about NetBackup jobs. The job information is provided by displaying
columns of job-related information in a default order on the Activity Monitor
screen. The column layout (the order in which the columns are displayed) can be
customized to be displayed according the preference of the backup administrator.
In the following steps, you customize the layout of the Activity Monitor to match a
set of administrator-provided criteria.

1 Access the console of the master server system.

lnxmaster

2 Right-click the Terminal icon, located on the desktop of the master server
system, and select Open.

3 In the Terminal window, execute the command, jnbSA&, to launch the

NetBackup Administration Console.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

The NetBackup Administration Console login window is displayed.

4 Log in to the NetBackup Administration Console using the user name,

student. (password = training)

5 Click the Activity Monitor object in the left pane of the Administration
Console.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

294
B–74 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 The Activity Monitor displays entries for recent jobs. By default, entries for
jobs are retained for 78 hours following the completion of the job. After the 78
hours have elapsed, the entry for the job is eligible for automatic deletion from
the jobs database the next time the job cleanup process runs.

Note: The duration for which completed jobs are retained in the jobs database can
be altered. For details, refer to the Symantec NetBackup Administrator’s
Guide, Volume 1, Release 7.5.

If you are completing this lesson as part of the Symantec NetBackup 7.5 for B
Unix: Administration or Symantec NetBackup 7.5 for Unix: Install, Configure,
and Deploy courses, multiple jobs are displayed in the Activity Monitor as a
result of tasks you performed in previous lab activities of the course.

6 Look briefly at the column headings displayed in the Activity Monitor. All
available columns are displayed by default.

7 Click the entry for any job displayed in the Activity Monitor, to highlight the
job.

8 Select View > Column Layout.

The Column Layout window is displayed. This window enables you to

remove columns from the Activity Monitor display, and to change the order in
which the columns are displayed (from left to right). If a column heading has
been hidden, you can display it again.

9 Modify the column layout of the Activity Monitor to display the column
headings in the order listed in the following table:

Column # Heading Column # Heading

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

1 Job ID 11 Media Server

2 Parent Job ID 12 Storage Unit
3 Type 13 Deduplication Rate
4 Status 14 Start Time (and date)
5 Priority 15 End Time (and date)
6 State 16 % Complete (Estimated)
Table 1: Activity Monitor column layout example

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

295 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–75
 7 State Details 17 KB Per Second
8 Job Policy 18 Kilobytes
9 Job Schedule 19 Files
10 Client 20 Attempt
Table 1: Activity Monitor column layout example

Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to relocate the selected column.
The Show and Hide buttons can be used to display the column in the Activity
Monitor or hide it from view.

10 When you have completed the column layout changes, click OK to close the
Column Layout window.

11 View the Activity Monitor display and verify that the column layout matches
the specifications provided by the backup administrator.

Note: You can further customize the Activity Monitor column layout to meet
your personal preference at any time.

Using job filters to filter the Activity Monitor jobs display

Busy computing environments that run hundreds or thousands of backup and other
job types per day, present a challenge to the backup administrators that monitor
and manage this backup activity. To help the NetBackup administrator address the
challenge, the NetBackup Activity Monitor supports the use of job filters. These
filters enable the administrator to manage the view of the jobs displayed in the
Activity Monitor.
In the next steps, you create job filters to gain experience in using this Activity
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Monitor capability:
• Configure a filter to display only restore jobs
• Configure a filter to display only unsuccessful jobs
• Configure a filter to display only jobs for a specified client system

Creating policies to test the job filters

In the next steps you configure two policies that you use when testing the job
filters that you create later in this exercise.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

296
B–76 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 1 Select NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

2 Click the entry for the lnxclient_test_bdisk_media policy, then

select Actions > Copy to New.

The Copy a Policy dialog box is displayed.

3 Type the name of the new policy in the New policy field, and click OK.
B

New policy name: lnxclient_test_failure

The Change Policy - lnxclient_test_failure window is displayed.

4 Make only the following change to the lnxclient_test_failure

policy:

– Access the Backup Selections tab.

– Delete all current entries in Backup Selections.
– Add a Backup Selection entry for: /data/junk

5 Click OK to save the changes to the lnxclient_test_failure policy.

6 Click the entry for the winclient_test_bdisk_master policy, then

select Actions > Copy to New.

The Copy a Policy dialog box is displayed.

7 Type the name of the new policy in the New policy field, and click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

New policy name: winclient_test_failure

The Change Policy - winclient_test_failure window is displayed.

8 Make only the following change to the winclient_test_failure

policy:

– Access the Backup Selections tab.

– Delete all current entries in Backup Selections.
– Add a Backup Selection entry for: G:\data\junk

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

297 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–77
 9 Click OK to save the changes to the winclient_test_failure policy.

Perform manual backup that result in failed jobs

In the steps that follow, you use the policies you just created to perform manual
backup jobs. Due to intended configuration errors in the policies, the backup jobs
that use these policies result in failed backup jobs.

10 Select NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the

Administration Console.

11 Initiate a manual backup of the lnxclient.example.com client using the

Full schedule of the lnxclient_test_failure policy.

Solution

a Click the entry for the lnxclient_test_failure policy.

b Select Actions > Manual Backup.

The Manual Backup dialog box is displayed.

c Click the entry for the Full schedule, and click OK in the Manual Backup
dialog box.

End of Solution

12 Initiate a manual backup of the winclient.example.com client using the

Full schedule of the winclient_test_failure policy.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Solution

a Click the entry for the winclient_test_failure policy.

b Select Actions > Manual Backup.

The Manual Backup dialog box is displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

298
B–78 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 c Click the entry for the Full schedule, and click OK in the Manual Backup
dialog box.

End of Solution

13 Click the Activity Monitor entry in the left pane of the Administration
Console.
B

lnxmaster

Currently, the Activity Monitor displays entries for all recent jobs. By default,
entries for all jobs are retained for 72 hours (3 days) following the completion of
the job.

Configuring a job filter to display only unsuccessful jobs

In the steps that follow, you configure a job filter to display only jobs that end with
a non-zero status.

1 Click the entry for any job in the right pane of the Activity Monitor, to
highlight the entry for the job.

2 Select View > Filter in the Activity Monitor.

The Filter window is displayed.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

3 Note that the Filter window has two tabs:

– Basic
– Advanced

4 Click the Advanced tab of the Filter window.

5 Use the following parameters to create a jobs filter:

– Field: Status
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
299 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–79
 – Comparison: not equal to
– Value: zero (0)

6 Click Add to List, to add the filter.

The filter is added to the Selected Criteria pane of the Filter window

7 Click the OK button on the bottom of the Filter window to activate the filter.

The Filter window is closed and you are returned to the Activity Monitor.

8 Record your observations of the jobs that are displayed in the Activity
Monitor.

Observations:
The only jobs that are displayed in the Activity Monitor are jobs that have
failed, or that ended in a status code 1 (partially successful).

Note: When a jobs filter is applied and in use, the title bar located directly above
the Jobs list displays a (Filter Applied) message. This message is located
at the right side of the title bar.

9 Select View > Filter in the Activity Monitor.

The Filter window is displayed.

10 Click the Clear All button to remove the Status filter, then click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

After disabling the filter, entries for all jobs are displayed in the Activity
Monitor.

Note: It is important to remember when you have enabled a jobs filter, in order to
avoid being unaware of jobs that are not displayed due to the filter.
Generally, you should disable the jobs filter as soon as you have finished
the task that required the filter.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

300
B–80 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Configuring a job filter to display only jobs for a specific client
In the steps that follow, you create a jobs filter that displays jobs only for a specific
NetBackup client, lnxclient.example.com.

1 Select View > Filter, to access the Filter window again.

The Filter window is displayed.

B
2 Click the Advanced tab of the Filter window.

3 Use the following parameters to create a new filter:

– Field: Client
– Comparison: equal to
– Value: lnxclient.example.com
– Match case: selected

4 Click Add to List, to add the filter.

The filter is added to the Selected Criteria pane of the Filter window

5 Click OK to close the Filter window and activate the filter.

6 Record your observations of the jobs that are displayed in the Activity
Monitor.

Observations:
The only jobs that are displayed in the Activity Monitor are jobs for the
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

client, lnxclient.example.com. The jobs displayed include all job

types for the client (backups, restores, etc.), and include successful and
failed jobs.

Note: When a jobs filter is applied and in use, the title bar located directly above
the Jobs list displays a (Filter Applied) message. This message is located
at the right side of the title bar.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

301 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–81
 Combining jobs filters to create more complex filters
In the next steps, you create and use filters that combine the use of multiple criteria
to filter the jobs that are displayed in the Activity Monitor.

1 Select View > Filter in the Activity Monitor.

The Filter window is displayed.

2 Click the Advanced tab of the Filter window.

3 Note that the Criteria pane of the Filter window currently contains an entry
for the filter you created previously. That filter uses the Client field as part of
the filtering criteria.

4 Use the following parameters to create an additional filter entry:

– Field: Status
– Comparison: not equal to
– Value: zero (0)

5 Click Add to List, to add the filter.

The filter is added to the Selected Criteria pane of the Filter window. There
are now two entries displayed in the Selected Criteria pane:
– Client
– Status

The Filter pane enables you to determine how the filters are used by providing
two primary options:
– Match items that contain ALL of the Criteria (AND)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

– Match items that contain at least one of the criteria (OR)

6 Click the radio button to select the Match items that contain at least one of
the criteria (OR) parameter.

7 Click the OK button to activate the filter.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

302
B–82 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 8 Record your observations of the jobs that are displayed in the Activity
Monitor.

Observations:
Now, the only jobs that are displayed in the Activity Monitor are all jobs
that did not end successfully (ended with a non-zero status code), or any
jobs for the client, lnxclient.example.com.

B
Note: When a jobs filter is applied and in use, the title bar located directly above
the Jobs list displays a (Filter Applied) message. This message is located
at the right side of the title bar.

9 Select View > Filter in the Activity Monitor.

The Filter window is displayed.

10 Click the Advanced tab of the Filter window.

11 Click the Match items that contain at least one of the criteria (AND) radio
button, to change the use of the filter criteria.

12 Click the OK button to close the Filter window and activate the filter.

13 Record your observations of the jobs that are displayed in the Activity
Monitor.

Observations:
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Now, the jobs that are displayed in the Activity Monitor are all jobs that
did not end successfully (ended with a non-zero status code) AND only
those failed jobs for the lnxclient.example.com client.

Configuring a job filter to display only restore jobs

In the steps that follow, you create a jobs filter that displays only restore jobs.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

303 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–83
 1 Select View > Filter to access the Filter window.

The Filter window is displayed.

2 Click the Clear All button, to clear the filter criteria.

All entries are removed from the Criteria pane of the Filter window.

3 Use the following parameters to create the filter criteria:

– Field: Type
– Comparison: equal to
– Value: Restore
– Match case: selected

4 Click Add to List, to add the filter criteria.

The filter is added to the Criteria pane of the Filter window.

5 Click the OK button to close the Filter window and activate the filter.

6 Record your observations of the jobs that are displayed in the Activity
Monitor.

Observations:
Now, only Restore jobs are displayed in the Activity Monitor -
regardless of the client name associated with the job. Both successful and
unsuccessful Restore jobs are displayed as a result of this filter.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Note: When a jobs filter is applied and in use, the title bar located directly above
the Jobs list displays a (Filter Applied) message. This message is located
at the right side of the title bar.

7 Select View > Filter to access the Filter window.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

304
B–84 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 The Filter window is displayed.

8 Click the Clear All button, to clear the filter criteria.

All entries are removed from the Criteria pane of the Filter window.

9 Click the OK button to close the Filter window.

B
After disabling the filter, entries for all jobs are displayed in the Activity
Monitor.

Note: It is important to remember when you have enabled a jobs filter, in order to
avoid being unaware of jobs that are not displayed due to the filter.
Generally, you should disable the jobs filter as soon as you have finished
the task that required the filter.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

305 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–85
 Exercise 2: Managing jobs in the Activity Monitor

In this exercise, you view and use the functions that are available in NetBackup to
manage and control jobs. These include the suspend job, resume job, restart job,
cancel job, and change job priority.

Viewing job priorities

In the steps that follow, you view the default NetBackup job priorities and modify
the Activity Monitor to include the display of the job Priority in the Jobs display.

lnxmaster

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server.

2 Select NetBackup Management > Host Properties in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

3 Click the symbol to the left of the Host Properties entry, to expand Host
Properties.

4 Note the entries that are displayed under Host Properties:

– Master Servers
– Media Servers
– Clients
– Indexing Servers
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

5 Click the Master Servers entry (under Host Properties).

An entry for the master server, lnxmaster.example.com, is displayed in

the right pane of the Administration Console.

6 Click the entry for the master server, lnxmaster.example.com, to

highlight the entry.

7 Select Actions > Properties.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

306
B–86 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 The Master Server Properties window is displayed.

8 Note the long list of Properties categories that are displayed in the left pane of
the Master Server Properties window. These are listed in the table.

Host Property category Host Property category

Global Attributes Clean-up
Universal Settings NDMP B

Retention Periods SharedDisk

Data Classifications Access Control
Fibre Transport VMware Access Host
Servers Network Settings
Bandwidth Credential Access
Restore Failover Default Job Priorities
General Server Enterprise Vault Hosts
Port Ranges Symantec Products
Media Login Banner Configuration
Timeouts Resource Limit
Client Attributes Preferred Network
Distributed Application Restore Throttle Bandwidth
Mapping
Firewall Resilient Network
Logging --------
Table 2: Master Server Host Properties categories
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

9 Click the Default Job Priorities entry, located in the left pane of the Master
Server Properties window.

10 Record the default Job Priority settings for the following job types:

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

307 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–87
 Job Type Default Job Priority Setting
Backup 0
Catalog Backup 0
Catalog Recovery 90000
Duplication 50000
Restore 90000

11 If a Duplication job and a Restore job entered the NetBackup job queue on
the master server system at the same time, and required the use of the same
resources (Examples: the same tape volume, the same tape drive), which of the
jobs would go active first (assuming that the resources existed to allow only
one of the jobs to run at a time)?

Answer:
The default job priority of Restore jobs is 90000, and the default priority
of Duplication jobs is 50000. Given that the higher priority number
represents the higher priority, the Restore job would be granted the
resources and go active ahead of the Duplication job.

Note: You can modify the default Job Priority setting for a particular job type.
Having done so, all jobs of that type use the new default priority, unless
overridden by a specific priority is set for a job.

You can override the default job priority setting for jobs in two ways:
• Modify the Job Priority setting in the policy that is used to initiate the job.
• Modify the Job Priority of the job while the job is in the Queued state, as
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

displayed in the Activity Monitor.

12 Click OK to close the Master Server Properties window.

13 Select NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

14 Click the entry for the winclient_test_bdisk_master policy. Then,

right-click the policy and click Change.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

308
B–88 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 The Change Policy - winclient_test_bdisk_master window is
displayed.

Note: The Job Priority setting on the Attributes tab of a policy enables the
NetBackup administrator to override the default job priority setting for
backup jobs. The setting used in the policy is applied to all backup jobs
that utilize this policy. As you can see, the default priority setting for
backup jobs is zero (0).

15 Click Cancel to close the Change Policy window without making changes to
the winclient_test_bdisk_master policy.

Configuring a policy to use a non-default Job Priority setting

In the steps that follow, you configure a policy to use a non-default Job Priority
setting, in order to test the management of job priorities in the Activity Monitor.
The new policy allows only full manual backups of the contents of the
G:\data\smallfiles folder of the winclient.example.com client.
The backups are written to a basic disk storage unit on the master server system.
The job priority of the backup jobs generated by the new policy is 500.

1 Perform the following steps to create and modify the new policy:
– Copy the winclient_test_bdisk_master policy to create a new
policy named winclient_test_priority_500.
– Modify the winclient_test_priority_500 policy to make a
single change: Change the Job Priority setting of the policy to 500.
Solution

a Click the entry for the winclient_test_bdisk_master policy in

the All Policies pane of the Administration Console.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

b Click Edit > Copy to New.

The Copy a Policy dialog box is displayed.

c Type the name of the new policy in the New policy field:
winclient_test_priority_500

d Click OK in the Copy a Policy dialog box.

The Change Policy - winclient_test_priority_500 window is

opened.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
309 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–89
 e Type: 500, in the Job Priority field of the Attributes tab.

f Click OK to save the change to the policy.

The winclient_test_priority_500 policy is closed.

End of Solution

Configuring a policy that enables testing of job management tasks

In the next steps, you configure a policy to facilitate the testing of the job
management tasks that can be performed using the Activity Monitor. The primary
characteristic of this policy is that it is configured to back up a large amount of
data, thereby giving you time to test the job management tasks.
Create a new policy allows only full manual backups of the contents of ALL
LOCAL DRIVES of the winclient.example.com client. The backups are
written to a basic disk storage unit on the master server system.

2 Perform the following steps to create and modify the new policy:

– Copy the winclient_test_bdisk_master policy to create a new

policy named winclient_test_ALD.
– Modify the winclient_test_ALD policy to make two changes:
– Select the Take checkpoints every policy Attribute, and set the value for
this parameter to take checkpoint every five (5) minutes. This is the
minimum setting for this parameter.
– Delete the current entries in the Backup Selections tab, and add an entry
for the ALL_LOCAL_DRIVES directive (from the Windows2008
Directive Set).
Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

a Click the entry for the winclient_test_bdisk_master policy in

the All Policies pane of the Administration Console.

b Click Edit > Copy to New.

The Copy a Policy dialog box is displayed.

c Type the name of the new policy in the New policy field:
winclient_test_ALD

d Click OK in the Copy a Policy dialog box.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

310
B–90 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 The Change Policy - winclient_test_ALD window is opened.

e On the Attributes tab - Click the Take checkpoints every check box, and
set the value of the parameter to five (5) minutes.

f Click Apply, then click the Backup Selections tab of the policy.

g Click the entry for G:\data\smallfiles, and then click Delete.

h Click Yes to confirm the deletion.

B
i Click New to add a new entry to the Backup Selections of the policy.

j From the drop-down menu for Pathname or directive set, select

Windows 2008.

k From the drop-down menu for Pathname or directive, select

ALL_LOCAL_DRIVES, then click Add.

l Click OK to save the changes to the Add Backup Selection window.

m Click OK to save the change to the policy.

The winclient_test_ALD policy is closed.

End of Solution

3 Verify that the winclient_test_ALD policy is visible in the list of policies

displayed in right pane of the NetBackup Administration Console.

You are ready to run backup jobs and to view and use the job management
functions provided in the Activity Monitor.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Suspending, resuming, and cancelling jobs in the Activity Monitor

In the steps that follow, you initiate a manual backup job using the
winclient_test_ALD policy. While the resulting manual backup job is
running, you use the Suspend job, Resume job, and Cancel job functions. You
also use the Restart job function to restart a failed job.

1 Select NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

311 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–91
 2 Perform a manual backup of the client, winclient.example.com, using
the Full schedule of the winclient_test_ALD policy.

Solution

a Click the entry for the winclient_test_ALD policy.

b Select Actions > Manual Backup.

The Manual Backup dialog box is displayed.

c Click the entry for the Full schedule, and click OK in the Manual Backup
dialog box.

End of Solution

3 Click the Activity Monitor entry in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

4 Locate the entry for the backup that was initiated as a result of your manual
backup request using the winclient_test_ALD policy.

Note: This backup job will take from 4-8 minutes to run, and gives you time to
use the job management functions available in the Activity Monitor. If this
job finishes (see note below), and you need more time to finish the lab
steps, run another manual backup using the winclient_test_ALD
policy.

Note: The backup job that uses the winclient_test_ALD policy does not
complete successfully. The ending Job State is Incomplete, and a Status
129 is displayed. This failure is expected. Do not troubleshoot further.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

5 View the Job State of the job. When the job is Active, click the entry for the
job, to highlight the job.

6 Select Actions > Suspend Job.

Within a few seconds, the Job State changes to Suspended.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

312
B–92 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 7 With the entry for the job highlighted, select Actions > Resume Job.

Within a few seconds, the Job State changes to Queued, and then to Active.

Note: After resuming the job, the job goes Active assuming that the resources
required by this job are available. If the resources required are not
available, this job remains Queued until the resources become available.

8 With the entry for the job highlighted, select Actions > Cancel Job. B

The Cancel Job dialog box is displayed.

9 Click Yes in the Cancel Job dialog box, to cancel the job.

Within a few seconds, the Job State changes to Done.

10 Record the Status of the cancelled job. View the Job Details for the job to find
the meaning of this status code.

Status of the cancelled job: 150

Meaning of the status code: termination requested by administrator

11 With the entry for the job highlighted, select Actions > Restart Job.

12 Observe the Activity Monitor. Does the Job State of the job you re-started
change from Done to Active? Record your observations.

Your observations:
No. The Job State of the job that was restarted does not go Active.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Instead, a new job is initiated, with a new Job ID.

13 Cancel the job again (Actions > Cancel Job).

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

313 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–93
 Note: The backup job that uses the winclient_test_ALD policy does not
complete successfully. The ending Job State is Incomplete, and a Status
129 is displayed. This failure is expected. Do not troubleshoot further.

Viewing and changing job priorities in the Activity Monitor

In the steps that follow, you initiate three manual backup jobs. All three jobs are
used to back up the same client system, winclient.example.com.
The policies you use to run the manual backups are:
• 1st manual backup uses policy: winclient_test_ALD
• 2nd manual backup uses policy: winclient_test_bdisk_master
• 3rd manual backup uses policy: winclient_test_priority_500
Because the Max jobs per client parameter in the Master Server Host
Properties has a default setting of one (1), only one of the backup jobs for the
client can be active at a time.

Note: Perform the following manual backup jobs in quick succession. From the
time that you initiate the first backup job, you have 5-8 minutes to view job
priority information for the jobs and to change job priorities of the jobs.
After the first backup job has completed, the remaining two jobs will finish
quickly. If you need more time to complete any un-finished steps, initiate
the three manual backup operations in the same order, and continue.

1 Verify that the Priority column is visible in the Activity Monitor. If it is not,
change the column layout so that the Priority column is displayed.

2 Initiate three Full manual backup jobs of the client,

winclient.example.com, in quick succession using the following
policies:
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

– 1st - winclient_test_ALD
– 2nd - winclient_test_bdisk_master
– 3rd - winclient_test_priority_500

3 Click the Activity Monitor entry in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

4 Note the three most recent Backup jobs that are added to the Activity Monitor.
These jobs are associated with the manual backups you just initiated.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
314
B–94 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 5 Record the information for the jobs (as obtained from the Activity Monitor):

Policy Name Job ID Job State Priority

winclient_test_ALD Active 0
winclient_test_bdisk_master Queued 0
winclient_test_priority_500 Queued 500

6 Given the Priority setting of the Queued jobs, which of the jobs should run
B
first - the job that uses the winclient_test_bdisk_master policy, or
the job that uses the winclient_test_priority_500 policy?

Answer:
When jobs are in the Queued state, a job that has a higher priority setting
(higher number) should run first - provided the resources needed to run
the job are available.

7 Click the job entry for the Active job (the job that is using the
winclient_test_ALD policy.)

8 Click Actions, to access the Actions menu.

9 Is the Change Job Priority function available for an Active job?

Answer:
In the JAVA NetBackup Administration Console, you can change the
Priority of an Active job. However, since the job is already running, the
new Priority has no impact unless the job is suspended.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

10 Click the entry for the Queued backup job that has the Priority setting of 0, to
highlight the entry for the job. (this job is using the Job Policy,
winclient_test_bdisk_master)

11 Click Actions > Change Job Priority.

The Change Job Priority window is displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

315 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–95
 12 Type 1000 in the Set the job priority to field, and click OK.

13 View the Activity Monitor entry for the job, and verify that the Job Priority of
the Queued job (that uses the winclient_test_bdisk_master policy)
has changed from a setting of 0 to 1000.

14 Click the entry for the Active job, to highlight the entry for the job.

15 Click Actions > Suspend, to suspend the job.

Within a few moments the Job State of the job changes from Active to
Suspended.

16 Describe what happens to the two jobs that were in the Queued Job State.
Which job goes Active first? Record your observations.

Answer:
When the job goes from Active to Suspended, the job that has the Priority
of 1000 (that used the winclient_test_bdisk_master policy)
went from the Queued state to the Active state. After that job was
completed, the backup job that had a Priority of 500 (that used the
winclient_test_priority_500 policy) went from Queued to
Active.

17 Click the entry for the job that has the Suspended Job State (this is the job that
used the winclient_test_ALD policy).
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

18 Click Actions > Resume Job.

Within a few moments the Job State of the job changes from Suspended to
Active.

19 Allow the job to run to completion.(The backup job may take 5-8 minutes to
complete.)

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

316
B–96 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Note: The backup job that uses the winclient_test_ALD policy does not
complete successfully. The ending Job State is Incomplete, and a Status
129 is displayed. This failure is expected. Do not troubleshoot further.

20 Continue to the next exercise as the backup job is running.

B
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

317 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–97
 Exercise 3: Using NetBackup reports

In this exercise, you run NetBackup reports to that provide information that can
enable more effective and efficient management of the backup environment.
The reports available in the NetBackup Administration Console can be divided in
to four general categories:
• General reports - status or problem related reports
• Tape Reports
• Disk Reports
• Vault Reports

1 Access the console of the master server system.

lnxmaster

2 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server.

3 Select NetBackup Management > Reports in the left pane of the

Administration Console.

4 Click the symbol to the left of the Reports object, to expand Reports.

The reports and report categories that are listed under the Reports object are
listed in the table:

Report Category Report Name

General Status of Backups
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Client Backups
Problems
All Log Entries
Images on Media
Media Logs
Tape Reports Images on Tape
Tape Logs
Table 3: NetBackup report categories and reports
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
318
B–98 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Tape Contents
Tape Summary
Tape Written
Tape Lists
Disk Reports Images on Disk
Disk Logs
Disk Storage Unit Status
B
Disk Pool Status
Vault Reports Media Going Off-site
Media Coming On-site
Inventory
Container Inventory
Recovery
Lost Media
Non-Vaulted Images
Table 3: NetBackup report categories and reports

5 Click the Reports object, in the left pane of the Administration Console.

A brief description of the first six reports (listed under the General category in
the table) is displayed in the right pane of the Administration Console.

6 Run the Status of Backups report to obtain a listing of all backup jobs for the
client, lnxclient.example.com, that were written by the media server,
lnxmaster.example.com, in the last seven days. Use the report criteria
provided in the table.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Date/Time Range:
Between: Today’s date minus 7days
Earliest available: not selected
and: greyed out (Current Time is selected)
Current Time: selected
Media Server: lnxmaster.example.com
Client: lnxclient.example.com
Job ID: -- blank--
Table 4: Status of Backups report criteria

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

319 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–99
 Solution

a Click the entry for the Status of Backups report in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

b For the Date/Time Range enter today’s date minus 7 days.

c Select lnxmaster.example.com from the drop-down list for Media

Server.

d Select lnxlient.example.com from the drop-down list for Client.

e Leave all other default settings.

f Click Run Report.

End of Solution

7 View the output of the report. Consider how the information in this report can
be useful in your backup environment.

Note: A potentially useful approach to evaluating problems pointed out by report

output is to look for shared or common characteristics of the failing jobs
(jobs using the same policy, backing up the same client, writing to the same
media server or storage unit, and so on).
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

320
B–100 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 8 Run the Client Backups report to obtain a listing of all backup jobs that were
performed in the last seven days, for all clients,. Use the report criteria
provided in the table.

Date/Time Range:
Between: Today’s date minus 7days
Earliest available: not selected
and: greyed out (Current Time is selected)
Current Time: selected
B
Client: <All Clients> (default)
Table 5: Client Backups report criteria

Solution

a Click the entry for the Client Backups report in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

a For the Date/Time Range enter today’s date minus 7 days.

b Leave all other default settings.

c Click Run Report.

End of Solution

9 View the output of the report.

The Client Backups report displays a listing of all the backup jobs that
occurred within the specified date and time range, for the specified client, or
for all clients.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Note: Each NetBackup reports includes a default set of columns that are
displayed in the report output. You can customize the reports by altering
the column layout to add, remove, and rearrange the order in which the
report information is displayed.

10 Run the Problems report to obtain a listing of all backup jobs that were run in
the last seven days for the client, winclient.example.com, in which

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

321 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–101
 error messages were posted to the NetBackup error log files. Use the report
criteria provided in the table.

Date/Time Range:
Between: Today’s date minus 7days
Earliest available: not selected
and: greyed out (Current Time is selected)
Current Time: selected
Media Server <All Media Servers> (default)
Client: <All Clients> (default)
Job ID: -- blank -- (default)
Table 6: Problems report criteria

Solution

a Click the entry for the Problems report in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

b For the Date/Time Range enter today’s date minus 7 days.

c Leave all other default settings.

d Click Run Report.

End of Solution

11 Note the contents of the Severity column of the Problems report output.
Record the Severity levels that are present in the output of your Problems
report.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Severity levels in the Problems report

(your answers may vary)
Error
Warning
Critical

The Problems lists all the problem-related messages that were logged by the
master server within the specified date and time range, for the specified client
or for all clients.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

322
B–102 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Note that the ending Status of the jobs with which the messages are associated
is not included in the default Problems report output. Not all jobs that include
a problem-related message ended in the failure of the job. You can modify the
column layout of the report.

Note: Another useful method of obtaining the information provided by the

Problems report is to run the bperror command using one of the
following: bperror -U -problems -s ERROR -d [mm/dd/yyyy],
or bperror -U -problems -s WARNING -d [mm/dd/yyyy]. The
command option, -d, is used to provide the beginning date for the report. B

12 Run the Images on Media report. Include information for the client,
lnxclient.example.com, in the report output.

Solution

a Click the entry for the Images on Media report in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

b Set the Client field to: lnxclient.example.com.

c Click Run Report.

End of Solution

13 Record examples of the two Media Types listed in the report output, and an
example of the Media ID entry associated with each Media Type.

Media Type Contents of Media ID column

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Disk H:\basicstu\lnxclient.example.com_xxxxxxx_Cx_Fx
Removable media 090000 (the media ID of a tape)

The Images on media report obtains the information for the report from the
NetBackup image catalog.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

323 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–103
 14 Run the Media Logs report to obtain a listing of all media log entries for the
media server, lnxmaster.example.com, that were made in the last day
(24 hours).

Date/Time Range:
Between: Current date and time minus 1 day (24 hours)
Earliest available: not selected
and: greyed out (Current Time is selected)
Current Time: selected
Media Server lnxmaster.example.com
Table 7: Media Logs report criteria

Solution

a Click the entry for the Media Logs report in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

b For the Date/Time Range use the current date and time minus 1 day.

c For Media Server select lnxmaster.example.com.

d Click Run Report.

End of Solution

15 Record the Severity levels that are present in the output of the Media Logs
report.

Severity levels in the Media Logs report (your answers may vary)
Info
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Error
Warning
Critical

The Media Logs report shows the media errors or the informational messages
that are recorded in the NetBackup error catalog files.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

324
B–104 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Note: Another useful method of obtaining the information provided by the
Media Logs report is to run the bperror command using one of the
following: bperror -U -media -s ERROR -d [mm/dd/yyyy], or
bperror -U -media -d [mm/dd/yyyy].
The -d command option is used to provide the beginning date for the
report.

B
16 Click the symbol to the left of the Tape Reports object in the left pane of the
Administration Console, to expand Tape Reports.

The Tape Reports are:

– Images on Tape
– Tape Logs
– Tape Contents
– Tape Summary
– Tape Written
– Tape Lists

17 Run the Tape Lists report, using the default Report Settings (<All Media
owners> and <All Media>).

18 Record the Media ID of all tape volumes listed in the output of the Tape Lists
report.

Media IDs (your answers may vary)

Media ID:
Media ID:
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Media ID:
Media ID:
Media ID:
Media ID:

The default Tape Lists report shows information about all the tape volumes
that are in the assigned state. You can modify the report settings to show tapes
assigned to a specific media server (media owner), or you can filter the report
for a specific Media ID.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

325 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–105
 19 Record the Media ID listed in the output of the Tape Lists report that has the
highest number of Valid Images.

Media ID with the most valid images (your answers may vary)
Media ID:

20 Run the Images on Tape report, using the Report Settings listed in the table.

Client: <All Clients> (default)

Media ID as recorded in the previous step
Table 8: Images on Tape report criteria

Solution

a Click the entry for the Images on Tape report in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

b For Media ID use the previously recorded Media ID.

c Click Run Report.

End of Solution

The Images on Tape report shows information about all the active backup
images that reside on all assigned tape volumes, or on a specified tape volume.
This information is derived from the NetBackup image catalog. The report
does not show information about backup images that were written to the tape,
but that have expired. Information on expired backup images no longer exists
in the image catalog.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

326
B–106 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 21 Run the Tape Contents report, using the Report Settings listed in the table.

Media Owner: lnxmaster.example.com

Media ID Use the same Media ID that was used to run the
Images on Tape report
Table 9: Tape Contents report criteria

Solution

B
a Click the entry for the Tape Contents report in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

b For the Media Owner, select lnxmaster.example.com.

c For Media ID, use the same Media ID that was used to run the Images on
Tape report.

d Click Run Report.

The Tape Contents Report dialog box is displayed.

e Click OK in the Tape Contents Report dialog box.

End of Solution

The Tape Contents report is generated by mounting the specified Media ID,
and reading the backup headers that are recorded on the tape. The report output
displays entries for both active and expired backup images that reside on the
tape. When a backup image expires in the NetBackup image catalog, the
contents of the tape on which the backup images resides are not changed.

Note: To run the Tape Contents report, NetBackup must mount the tape on a
tape drive and read the backup headers on the tape. This report takes longer
to run than reports that derive their output from the NetBackup catalogs.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

22 Click the symbol to the left of the Disk Reports object displayed in the left
pane of the Administration Console, to expand Disk Reports.

The Disk Reports are:

– Images on Disk
– Disk Logs
– Disk Storage Unit Status
– Disk Pool Status
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
327 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–107
 23 Click the entry for the Disk Pool Status report in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

24 Run the Disk Pool Status report using the default Report Settings (<All Disk
Pools>).

Entries for the two configured Disk Pools should be displayed:

– adv_dpool1_lnxmaster
– adv_dpool2_lnxmaster

25 Note the Status, Total Capacity, and Used Capacity information that is
displayed in the report output.

26 Run the Disk Storage Unit Status report using the default Report Settings.

Disk Type: <All Disk Types> (default)

Storage Unit: <All Storage Units> (default)
Table 10: Disk Storage Unit Status report criteria

Solution

a Click the entry for the Disk Storage Unit Status report in the left pane of
the Administration Console.

b Leave all default settings.

c Click Run Report.

End of Solution

Entries for the all configured disk-based storage units are displayed.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

– bdisk_stu_lnxmaster
– bdisk_stu_lnxmedia
– advdisk1_stu_lnxmaster
– advdisk2_stu_lnxmaster
– catalog_stu_lnxmaster

27 Note that information is included in the report output for storage units
associated with both BasicDisk and DiskPool Disk Types. Used Capacity and
Available Capacity information is included only for disk storage units
associated with BasicDisk Disk Types.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
328
B–108 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 28 Record the Path information for the bdisk_stu_lnxmaster storage unit.

Path for: bdisk_stu_lnxmaster /bdisk_stu

29 Run the Images on Disk report using the Report Settings shown in the table:

Client: <All Clients> (default)

B
Disk Type: BasicDisk
Disk Pool: greyed out (not selectable for BasicDisk)
Path: The path for the bdisk_stu_lnxmaster
storage unit (as recorded in the previous step)
Table 11: Images on Disk report criteria

Solution

a Click the entry for the Images on Disk report in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

b For the Disk Type, select BasicDisk.

c For the Path, type bdisk_stu_lnxmaster.

d Click Run Report.

End of Solution

Entries for the all backup images that have been written to the specified disk
Path (for BasicDisk) or Disk Pool and Volume (for AdvancedDisk) are
displayed in the report output.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

329 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–109
 30 Run the Disk Logs report to obtain a listing of all disk log entries that were
made in the last 7 days (1 week). Use the report settings provided in the table.

Date/Time Range:
Between: Current date and time minus 7 days
Earliest available: not selected
and: greyed out (Current Time is selected)
Current Time: selected
Media Server: <All Media Servers> (default)
Disk Type: <All Disk Types> (default)
Table 12: Disk Logs report criteria

Solution

a Click the entry for the Disk Logs report in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

b For the Date/Time Range enter the current date and time minus 7 days.

c Leave all other default settings.

d Click Run Report.

End of Solution

31 Record the Severity levels that are present in the output of the Tape Logs
report.

Severity levels in the Tape Logs report (your answers may vary)
Info
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Error
Warning
Critical

32 Run any remaining NetBackup reports that are of interest to you as time
permits.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

330
B–110 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Exercise 4: Optional: Introduction to OpsCenter reports

This is an optional lab exercise. Perform the steps in this exercise as time permits,
or based upon your interest in using OpsCenter to monitor and report on your
NetBackup master server environments.
OpsCenter provides approximately seventy-five (75) reports to help you monitor
and manage your backup environments.
B
In this exercise, you access the Reports available in OpsCenter, view the categories
of reports that are available, and run a small number of selected OpsCenter reports.

1 Access the console of the media server, winserver.example.com.

winserver

2 Right-click the WebUI shortcut located on the desktop of

winserver.example.com, and select Open to launch a Web browser
window.

A security certificate message is displayed in the Internet Explorer window.

3 Click the link: Continue to this website (not recommended).

The Web browser window connects to the OpsCenter Web server, and the Log
On page is displayed.

4 Enter the following OpsCenter log on credentials, and click Log On.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

– Username: admin (default OpsCenter administrator account)

– Password: password (default OpsCenter admin account password)
– Domain: OpsCenterUsers(vx) (default OpsCenter domain)

The OpsCenter Web interface is displayed.

Six tabs are displayed near the top of the OpsCenter Web interface:
– Home
– Monitor
– Manage
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
331 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–111
 – Reports
– Search & Hold
– Settings
The Monitor tab is selected by default.

Accessing the OpsCenter reports

In the steps that follow, you navigate to the Report Templates of the OpsCenter
Web interface, and view the available report categories and reports.

5 Click the Reports tab.

The sub-tabs available under Reports are:

– Report Templates
– My Reports
– My Dashboard
– Schedules
– Manage Folders

The Report Templates sub-tab is selected by default.

The standard report categories and reports that are provided in OpsCenter are
listed in the Name (left-most) column of the OpsCenter window.
The Report Templates folder is the top level of the Report Templates
structure.

6 Click the minus (-) symbol to the left of each of the report folders that are listed
under Report Templates, to collapse the structure. After doing so, only the
top-level folders are displayed.

The top-level report category folders are:

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

– Audit Reports
– Backup
– Catalog
– Chargeback
– Client Reports
– Cloud Reports
– Disk & Tape Device Activity
– Hold Reports
– Media Reports
– Performance Reports
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
332
B–112 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 – Policy Reports
– Restore
– Storage Lifecycle Policy
– Workload Analyzer
– Enterprise Vault Archiving

Each of the report category folders can be expanded to reveal the available
reports (and in some cases, additional report sub-category folders).

OpsCenter provides approximately seventy-five (75) reports to help you B

monitor and manage your backup environments. All of these standard reports
are available under the Report Templates.

Note: OpsCenter provides context sensitive Help, including information and

descriptions off the available reports.

7 With the Reports > Report Templates sub-tab selected, click Help in the
OpsCenter tool bar.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Leave the Help window open and refer to it, as necessary, as you work with
OpsCenter reports.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

333 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–113
 Running selected OpsCenter reports
In the steps that follow you run selected OpsCenter reports to see how these
reports can help you monitor and manage your backup environment.

Running the Advanced Success Rate report

In the steps that follow, you locate and run the Advanced Success Rate report.
(Report Templates > Backup > Status and Success Rate > Success Rate >
Advanced Success Rate)

1 Click the plus (+) symbol to the left of the Backup folder, to expand the folder.

2 Locate the Status and Success Rate folder, located under the Backup folder.

3 Click the plus (+) symbol to the left of the Status and Success Rate folder, to
expand the folder.

4 Locate the Success Rate folder, located under the Status and Success Rate
folder.

5 Click the plus (+) symbol to the left of the Success Rate folder, to expand the
folder.

6 Click the link for the Advanced Success Rate report, to run the report.

The output of the report is displayed in the right pane of the OpsCenter Web
interface.

7 Note the reporting period for the report. The default report shows the success
rates for the past 15 days.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Running the Media Utilization report

In the steps that follow, you locate and run the Media Utilization report. (Report
Templates > Media Reports > Media Utilization)

1 Click the minus (-) symbol to the left of the Backup folder, to collapse the
folder.

2 Locate the Media Reports folder, located under the Report Templates folder.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
334
B–114 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 3 Click the plus (+) symbol to the left of the Media Reports folder, to expand
the folder.

4 Click the link for the Media Utilization report, to run the report.

The output of the report is displayed in the right pane of the OpsCenter Web
interface.

5 Note the reporting period for the report. The default report shows media (tape
B
volumes) utilization for the past 14 days.

The report results show the counts of Assigned, Unassigned, Full, Frozen,
Suspended, and Offsite tapes for each day of the reporting period.

Running the Job Success by Client report

In the steps that follow, you locate and run the Job Success by Client report.
(Report Templates > Client Reports > Job Success by Client)

1 Click the minus (-) symbol to the left of the Media Reports folder, to collapse
the folder.

2 Locate the Client Reports folder, located under the Report Templates folder.

3 Click the plus (+) symbol to the left of the Client Reports folder, to expand the
folder.

4 Click the link for the Job Success by Client report, to run the report.

The graphical output of the report is displayed in the right pane of the
OpsCenter Web interface.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

The report results show the successful and failed jobs for each client in a
stacked bar chart.

Running the Current Disk Usage report

In the steps that follow, you locate and run the Current Disk Usage report.
(Report Templates > Disk and Tape Device Activity > Current Disk Usage)

1 Click the minus (-) symbol to the left of the Client Reports folder, to collapse
the folder.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
335 Lab 1: Monitoring NetBackup Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–115
 2 Locate the Disk and Tape Device Activity folder, located under the Report
Templates folder.

3 Click the plus (+) symbol to the left of the Disk and Tape Device Activity
folder, to expand the folder.

4 Click the link for the Current Disk Usage report, to run the report.

The output of the report is displayed in the right pane of the OpsCenter Web
interface.

The report results show information for configured disk pools, including Total
Capacity, Used Space, Free Space, and Potential Free Space.

The reports you have run are only a small sampling of the reports available in
OpsCenter 7.5. Run additional reports as time permits, and based upon your
interest in OpsCenter.

End of lab
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

336
B–116 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 B

Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage

In this lab, you perform tasks to reinforce the concepts presented in the lesson,
including:
• Viewing robot and drive configuration settings
• Running robtest to verify robot operation
• Using the Device Monitor to view and manage tape drives and drive paths
• Monitoring and managing media using available NetBackup interfaces
• Running tape reports

Two parallel versions of the labs enable you to choose the level of detail that suits
your experience:
• Appendix A provides high level step-by-step lab instructions.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

• Appendix B provides complete detailed step-by-step lab instructions and

solutions.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

337 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–117
 Exercise 1: Viewing robot and drive configuration settings

In this exercise, you view NetBackup robot and tape drive configuration entries in
the NetBackup Administration Console.

Viewing the robot configuration

In the following steps, you view the robot configuration using the NetBackup
Administration Console.

1 Access the console of the master server system.

lnxmaster

2 Log on to the lnxmaster system as student.

Note: You may be logged in to the master server from a previous lab activity. If
you are, you can continue to use that login session.

Note: The NetBackup Administration Console may be open from a previous

lab activity. If it is, you can skip to the first step after the logon steps.

3 Right-click the Terminal icon on the desktop of the master server, and select
Open.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

4 Type jnbSA& at the command prompt, and press Enter.

The NetBackup Administration Console login window is displayed.

5 Login to the NetBackup Administration Console using the student User

name (password = training).

6 The NetBackup Administration Console window is displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

338
B–118 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 7 Select Media and Device Management > Devices > Robots in the left pane
of the Administration Console.

Two entries for the configured robot, TLD(0), are displayed in the right pane of
the Robots interface.
Two entries for the robot exist because the drives in the robot are accessible by
two media servers (lnxmaster.example.com and
lnxmedia.example.com.)

Note: The robot and tape drives were configured using the Device Configuration
Wizard in an earlier lesson of the course.

8 Right-click the top entry for TLD(0) in the Robots (right) pane of the
Administration Console. This entry is associated with the Device Host (media B
server), lnxmaster.example.com.

9 Click Change in the menu.

The Change Robot window is displayed.

10 Note the parameters that are used to configure the robot. Give special attention
to the Robot control portion of the window.

The media server that is the robot control host has the Robot is controlled
locally by this device host radio button selected.

The media server that is not the robot control host has the Robot control is
handled by a remote host radio button selected.

11 Is this media server (lnxmaster.example.com) the robot control host?

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Answer: It is anticipated that the master server is the robot control

host. However, this may vary. Either the master server or
media server can function as the robot control host.

12 Click Cancel to close the Change Robot window without making changes to
the robot configuration for the Device Host, lnxmaster.example.com.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

339 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–119
 13 Right-click the bottom entry for TLD(0) in the Robots (right) pane of the
Administration Console. This entry is associated with the Device Host (media
server), lnxmedia.example.com.

14 Click Change in the menu.

The Change Robot window is displayed.

15 Note the parameters that are used to configure the robot. Give special attention
to the Robot control portion of the window.

The media server that is the robot control host has the Robot is controlled
locally by this device host radio button selected.

The media server that is not the robot control host has the Robot control is
handled by a remote host radio button selected.

16 Is this media server (lnxmedia.example.com) the robot control host?

Answer: It is anticipated that the master server is the robot control

host. However, this may vary. Either the master server or
media server can function as the robot control host.

17 Click Cancel to close the Change Robot window without making changes to
the robot configuration for the Device Host, lnxmedia.example.com.

Viewing the tape drive configuration

In the following steps, you view the tape drive configuration using the NetBackup
Administration Console.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

1 Select Media and Device Management > Devices > Drives in the left pane of
the Administration Console.
Two tape drive entries are displayed in the top, right pane of the Drives
interface.

The tape drives in this NetBackup environment are accessible and shared by
the media server systems, lnxmaster.example.com and
lnxmedia.example.com.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

340
B–120 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 When a drive is selected (highlighted) in the top pane of the Drives interface,
the bottom pane displays the two drive paths for the drive; one drive path used
by lnxmaster.example.com to access the drive, and the other path used
by lnxmedia.example.com to access the drive.

Note: The robot and tape drives were configured using the Device Configuration
Wizard in an earlier lesson of the course.

2 Right-click the entry for the top tape drive (QUANTUM SUPERDLT1.000)
displayed in the top pane.

3 Click Change in the menu.

The Change Drive window is displayed. B

4 Note the path information used by the media servers to access the tape drive,
and the parameters that define the operation of the tape drive.

5 Click Cancel to close the Change Drive window without making changes to
the drive parameter settings.

6 Right-click the entry for the bottom drive (QUANTUM SUPERDLT1.001)

displayed in the top pane of the Administration Console.

7 Click Change in the menu.

The Change Drive window is displayed.

8 Note the path information used by the media servers to access the tape drive,
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

and the parameters that define the operation of the tape drive.

9 Click Cancel to close the Change Drive window without making changes to
the drive parameter settings.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

341 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–121
 Note: If changes are made to robot or tape drive configuration settings, it is
necessary to stop and restart the NetBackup device manager. After making
changes to the device configuration, Administration console automatically
prompts you to stop and restart the device manager.

Stopping and restarting the device manager

In the steps that follow, you stop and restart the NetBackup device manager.

CAUTION Use caution when stopping and restarting NetBackup services, as

this action may impact pending and active NetBackup-related
activities.

1 Select Media and Device Management > Devices in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

2 Select Actions > Stop/Restart Media Manager Device Daemon.

The Stop/Restart Media Manager Device Daemon window is displayed.

3 Note the Actions and Options that can be selected in the Stop/Restart Media
Manager Device Daemon window.

– Device Host (media server host name):

– Current status: (not selectable)
– Action:
› Start (greyed out if the Device Manager is currently running)
› Stop (greyed out if the Device Manager is currently stopped)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

› Stop/Restart (default setting)

– Options:
› Eject media from standalone drive(s)
› Enable verbose logging

4 Accept the default settings in the Stop/Restart Media Manager Device

Daemon window, and click OK to initiate the operation.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

342
B–122 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 The Stop/Restart Media Manager Device Daemon window is closed, and
NetBackup initiates the stopping and restarting of the device manager, and its
related services.

5 Go to the next exercise to verify the status of the tape devices using the Device
Monitor.

B
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

343 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–123
 Exercise 2: Using the Device Monitor to manage tape devices

In this exercise, you use the Device Monitor, provided in the NetBackup
Administration Console to view the status of tape drives and disk pools, and to
manage the state of NetBackup storage devices.

lnxmaster

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server.

Note: The NetBackup Administration Console may be open from a previous

lab activity.

2 Select Media and Device Management > Device Monitor in the left pane of
the Administration Console.

3 Note that there are two tabs displayed at the bottom of the right pane of the
Device Monitor interface:

– Drives
– Disk Pools

The Drives tab is selected by default.

Viewing tape drive status

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

In the following steps, you use the Device Monitor to view the status of the tape
drives.

4 Record the Drive Name of each of the tape drives that are displayed in the top
pane.

Drive Name: QUANTUM.SUPERDLT1.000

Drive Name: QUANTUM.SUPERDLT1.001

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

344
B–124 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 5 Note the Path for drives entries in the bottom pane of the Administration
Console.

The tape drives in this lab environment are shared by the media servers,
lnxmaster.example.com and lnxmedia.example.com.
The drive paths displayed in the bottom pane are associated with the tape drive
entry that is currently highlighted in the top pane.
– One drive path entry represents the drive path used by
lnxmaster.example.com to access the tape drive.
– The second drive path entry represents the drive path used by
lnxmedia.example.com to access the tape drive.

Managing tape drive status

In the following steps, you use the Device Monitor to manage the status of the tape
drives and tape drive paths, and to monitor the results. B

CAUTION Taking a tape drive from an up to a down status renders the tape
drive unavailable to NetBackup. Use caution when performing this
activity in a production backup environment, to avoid interfering
with NetBackup-related operations that may be in progress.

6 Click the entry for the top tape drive (QUANTUM.SUPERDLT1.000)

displayed in the top pane of the Device Monitor.

7 Select Actions > Down Drive, to down the drive.

The Shared Drive Action window is displayed.

The Drive Action window displays an entry for each of the drives paths that
are associated with the selected tape drive - the paths to the drive for
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

lnxmaster.example.com and lnxmedia.example.com.

8 Click the boxes associated with both drive paths for the drive, for
lnxmaster.example.com and lnxmedia.example.com.

9 Click OK in the Shared Drive Action window to bring the paths for the drive
down.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

345 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–125
 10 Click the Refresh icon on the tool bar (or F5, or View > Refresh) to update
the display of the Device Monitor.

11 View the Control column of the Device Monitor, and record your observations
about the status of the drive (in the top pane) and the drive paths (in the bottom
pane) for the QUANTUM.SUPERDLT1.000 tape drive.

Observations:
The Control column for the drive indicates <DOWN-TLD>.

12 Record your observations about the status of the drive paths associated with
the QUANTUM.SUPERDLT1.000 tape drive.

Observations:
The Control column for both of the drive paths for the drive that was
taken down indicate the paths are DOWN-TLD.

Note: When you down a tape drive, all drive paths associated with the drive are
taken down. NetBackup cannot use the drive.

Managing drive paths

In the following steps, you perform the steps to manage the individual drive paths
of a shared tape drive.

1 Click the entry for the top tape drive (QUANTUM.SUPERDLT1.000)

displayed in the top pane of the Device Monitor.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

2 Select Actions > Up Drive, to up the drive.

The Shared Drive Action window is displayed.

3 Click the box (to mark the box) associated with the drive path for the drive for
the Device Host, lnxmaster.example.com.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

346
B–126 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 4 Click OK in the Shared Drive Action window to bring the path to the drive up
(the path to the drive from lnxmaster.example.com was previously
down, as the result of a previous step).

5 Click the Refresh icon on the tool bar (or F5, or View > Refresh) to update
the display of the Device Monitor.

6 View the Control column of the Device Monitor, and record your observations
about the status of the drive (in the top pane) and the drive paths (in the bottom
pane) for the QUANTUM.SUPERDLT1.000 tape drive.

Observations:
The Control column for the drive indicates <Mixed>.
B

7 Record your observations about the status of the drive paths associated with
the QUANTUM.SUPERDLT1.000 tape drive.

Observations:
The Control column for the drive path associated with
lnxmaster.example.com shows SCAN-TLD, while the drive path
for the Device Host (media server) lnxmedia.example.com
indicates the path is DOWN-TLD.

Note: When a tape drive is shared, you can take a path from one media server
down and allow paths to other media servers to remain operational.

Click the entry for the top tape drive (QUANTUM.SUPERDLT1.000)

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

8
displayed in the top pane of the Device Monitor.

9 Select Actions > Up Drive, to up the tape drive.

The Shared Drive Action window is displayed.

10 Click the boxes associated with both drive paths for the drive for both Device
Hosts, lnxmaster.example.com and lnxmedia.example.com.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

347 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–127
 11 Click OK in the Shared Drive Action window to bring the drive up.

12 Click the Refresh icon on the tool bar (or F5, or View > Refresh) to update
the display of the Device Monitor. This might take a few moments.

13 View the Device Monitor and verify that the QUANTUM.SUPERDLT1.000

tape drive and its associated drive paths are returned to the up status.

Click the entries for each tape drive, one at a time, so that the drive path entries
for each tape drive are displayed in the bottom pane.

Verify that all drive paths for each tape drive have a status of up.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

348
B–128 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Exercise 3: Running robtest to verify robot operation

In this exercise, you use robtest, the robot test utility provided in NetBackup, to
very the operation of the robotic arm of the tape library that is configured in this
NetBackup environment.

Determining the name of the robot control host

In the following steps, you determine the name of the media server system that
serves as the robot control host for the tape library in the lab environment. The
robtest utility is executed on the media server system that is acting as the robot
control host.

B
Note: When the robtest utility is running it prevents NetBackup from
controlling the robot. Robot commands issued by NetBackup are ignored
by the robot. Quit robtest when you are finished testing to ensure that
scheduled backups continue to run.

lnxmaster

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server.

Note: The NetBackup Administration Console may be open from a previous

lab activity.

2 Select Media and Device Management > Devices > Robots in the left pane
of the Administration Console.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Two entries for the configured robot, TLD(0), are displayed in the right pane of
the Robots interface.
Two entries for the robot exist because the drives in the robot are accessible by
two media servers (lnxmaster.example.com and
lnxmedia.example.com).
Although both media servers must be able to issue requests to control the
robotic arm of the tape library (Examples: move a tape from a tape slot to a
drive, move a tape from a drive to a tape slot), only one media server is
designated to provide robotic control. That media server is configured as the

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

349 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–129
 robot control host. When the other media server requires a robot operation to
be performed, it communicates to the robot control host, that issues the robotic
commands on its behalf.

3 View the entries for the robot in the right pane of the Administration Console.
The entry for the Device Host that lists the connection information for the
robot (Robotic Path) is the robot control host.

Which media server is the robot control host in this environment?

Robot Control Host? It is anticipated that the master server system is

the robot control host. This may vary.

The media server (Device Host) that is not the Robot Control Host displays the
host name of the robot control host in the Robot Control Host column.

Running robtest
In the following steps, you run robtest to test the operation of the robotic
control of your tape library.

Note: robtest is run from the operating system command prompt on the
system that is acting as the robot control host for the robot.

lnxmaster or lnxmedia (robot control host)

1 Access the console of the system that is acting as the robot control host.

2 Right-click the Terminal icon on the desktop of the robot control host, and
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

select Open.

3 Type su - root, and press Enter to become superuser. (the password is

training).

4 Type the robtest command, and press Enter.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

350
B–130 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 robtest is located in the following directory on NetBackup master and
media server systems:

Windows C:\Program Files\Veritas\Volmgr\bin

UNIX/Linux /usr/openv/volmgr/bin

5 When the Robot Selection menu is displayed, type 1 to select the robot, and
press Enter.

Note: robtest does not display a command prompt. Simply type your
command or selection, and press Enter.

6 Type?, and press Enter. (? displays a list of robtest commands) B

The robtest help menu is displayed?.

7 Type s s command, and press Enter. (show slots)

The contents of the tape slots in the robot are displayed.

Note: Note that the robtest output displays the barcodes of the media in the
robot, rather than the NetBackup media IDs that are associated with the
tapes.

8 robtest does not show the contents of all the tape slots on a single screen.
Press return (Enter) to view the entries for the tape slots, until the
READ_ELEMENT_STATUS complete message is displayed.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

9 Type s s 1 command, and press Enter. (show slot 1).

The contents of the tape slot number 1 in the robot is displayed.

10 Type s s 10 command, and press Enter. (show slot 10).

The contents of the tape slot number 10 in the robot is displayed.

11 Type s d command, and press Enter. (show drives).

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

351 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–131
 The contents of both (all) the tape drives in the robot are displayed.

12 Type m s1 d1 command, and press Enter. (move slot1 drive1).

The tape in slot 1 of the robot is moved into drive 1.

13 Type s d command, and press Enter. (show drives).

The contents of the tape drives in the robot are displayed. The barcode of the
tape from slot 1 should be displayed in drive 1.
Verify that the entry for drive 1 indicates “Contains Cartridge = yes”.

14 Type s s 1 command, and press Enter. (show slot 1).

The contents of the tape slot number 1 in the robot is displayed.

Verify that the entry for slot 1 indicates “Contains Cartridge = no”.

15 Type m d1 s1 command, and press Enter. (move drive1 slot1).

The tape in drive 1 of the robot is moved into slot 1.

16 Type s s command, and press Enter. (show slots).

The contents of the tape slots in the robot are displayed.

Verify that the tape that was in drive 1 has been returned to its position in slot
1.

17 Type s d command, and press Enter. (show drives).

The contents of the all tape drives in the robot are displayed.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Verify that both tape drives of the robot are unoccupied. There are no tapes in
the drives.

18 Type q, and press Enter. (returns to the robtest menu)

19 When the Robot Selection menu is displayed, type 2 to quit robtest.

You are returned to the command prompt.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

352
B–132 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 20 Close the Terminal window.

Note: When robtest is running it prevents NetBackup from controlling the

robot. Robot commands issued by NetBackup are ignored by the robot.
Quit robtest when you are finished testing to ensure that scheduled
backups continue to run.

B
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

353 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–133
 Exercise 4: Monitoring and managing media

In this exercise, you use various NetBackup user interfaces to view and manage
media and media states.
NetBackup provides several methods of viewing and managing media. The
primary media management interfaces include:
• The Media and Device Management > Media interface in the NetBackup
Administration Console
• The available_media script
• The NetBackup Management > Reports interface in the NetBackup
Administration Console
• OpsCenter
• Various command line interfaces (CLIs)

lnxmaster

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server.

Note: The NetBackup Administration Console may be open from a previous

lab activity.

2 Perform the following steps to create and modify a new policy:

– Copy the winclient_test_tape_master policy to create a new

policy, named winclient_test_tape_media.
– Modify the new policy to make a single change: change the Policy storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

attribute, so that the policy uses the media server storage unit,
tape_stu_lnxmedia, to write backup images of the client,
winclient.example.com, to tape.
Solution

a Click the entry for the winclient_test_tape_master policy in the

left pane of the Administration Console.

b Click Actions > Copy to New.

The Copy a Policy dialog box is displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
354
B–134 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 c Type the name of the new policy in the New policy field:
winclient_test_tape_media

d Click OK in the Copy a Policy dialog box.

The Change Policy - winclient_test_tape_media window is

opened.

e On the Attributes tab - Click the arrow for the Policy storage field, and
click tape_stu_lnxmedia storage unit entry.

f Click OK to save the change to the policy.

The winclient_test_tape_media policy is closed.

End of Solution
B

3 Perform a manual backup of winclient.example.com, using the Full

schedule of the winclient_test_tape_media policy.

Solution

a Click the entry for the winclient_test_tape_media policy.

b Select Actions > Manual Backup.

The Manual Backup dialog box is displayed.

c Click the entry for the Full schedule, and click OK in the Manual Backup
dialog box.

End of Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

4 Click the Activity Monitor entry in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

5 Monitor the progress of the most recent backup job. Verify that the job runs to
successful completion (status 0). If the job fails, record the status code, and
notify your instructor.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

355 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–135
 6 View the Job Details of the job to obtain the Media ID that was used to write
the backup image. Record the Media ID in the space provided.

Solution

a Click the entry for the most recent backup job displayed in the Activity
Monitor.

b Select Actions > Details.

The Job Details window is displayed.

c Click the Detailed Status tab.

d View the contents of the Status pane to locate the Media ID that was used
for the backup job.

e Record the Media ID of the tape in the space provided.

f Click Close, to close the Job Details window.

End of Solution

Media ID:
Table 1: Media ID used for first backup job

Viewing and managing media states

In the following steps you use the NetBackup Administration console and the
available_media script to view and manage the media states of tape volumes.

1 Select Media and Device Management > Media in the left pane of the
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Administration Console.
Entries for all Media IDs that exist in the NetBackup catalogs are displayed in
the right pane of the Administration Console.
In this environment, the Media IDs listed are those tape volumes that are
housed in the configured tape library.

2 Click the Refresh icon, located on the tool bar of the Administration Console
(or use F5, or View > Refresh), to update the media information displayed in
the right pane.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

356
B–136 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Managing frozen media
In the steps that follow you manually freeze a tape and view the impact that the
Frozen media status has on NetBackup media utilization.

3 Locate and record the Media ID, Media Status, and Volume Pool
information of the tape that was used in the most recent backup job.

Media ID Media Status Volume Pool

server_tapes
Table 2: Information for Media ID used in the most recent backup job

4 Click the entry for the Media ID listed in the previous step, to highlight the
B
entry for the tape.

5 Click Actions, on the tool bar of the NetBackup Administration Console.

6 Click Freeze, in the resulting menu.

Note: The bpmedia command can also be used to freeze, unfreeze, suspend,
and unsuspend tape volumes.

7 The Freeze dialog box is displayed.

8 Click OK in the Freeze dialog box.

9 Click the Refresh icon, located on the tool bar of the Administration Console
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

(or use F5, or View > Refresh), to update the media information displayed.

10 Record the Media Status of the tape.

Media Status: Frozen

11 Access a Terminal window on the master server.

12 Type su - root, to become superuser.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
357 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–137
 13 Type the command, and press Enter.

available_media
The available_media command is located in the following directories on
NetBackup server systems:

Windows: C:\Program
Files\Veritas\NetBackup\bin\goodies
UNIX/Linux: /usr/open/netbackup/bin/goodies

14 View the output of the available_media command. Note that the

command output lists the tapes according to the volume pool they reside in,
and provides retention level, size of the recorded data, and status of the media.
Tapes that are assigned are displayed as ACTIVE in the command output,
while tapes that are unassigned are displayed as AVAILABLE.

Note: The available_media command is a popular command for obtaining

the status of NetBackup media.

15 Locate the entry for the Frozen tape in the available_media command
output.

16 Allow the Terminal window to remain open. You return to this window in
steps later in this exercise.

17 Perform another manual backup of winclient.example.com, using the

Full schedule of the winclient_test_tape_media policy.

Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

a Click the entry for the winclient_test_tape_media policy.

b Select Actions > Manual Backup.

The Manual Backup dialog box is displayed.

c Click the entry for the Full schedule, and click OK in the Manual Backup
dialog box.

End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

358
B–138 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 18 Click the Activity Monitor entry in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

19 Monitor the progress of the most recent backup job. Verify that the job runs to
successful completion (status 0). If the job fails, record the status code, and
notify your instructor.

20 View the Job Details of the job to obtain the Media ID that was used to write
the backup image. Record the Media ID in the space provided.

Solution

a Click the entry for the most recent backup job displayed in the Activity
Monitor.
B

b Select Actions > Details.

The Job Details window is displayed.

c Click the Detailed Status tab.

d View the contents of the Status pane to locate the Media ID that was used
for the backup job.

e Record the Media ID of the tape in the space provided.

f Click Close, to close the Job Details window.

End of Solution

Media ID:
Table 3: Media ID used for second backup job
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

21 Was the same Media ID used for each of the two most recent backup jobs?

Answer:
No. The most recent backup job used a different Media ID because the
first tape that was used is Frozen.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

359 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–139
 22 What is the significance of the Frozen media state.

Answer:
When a tape has the Frozen media status, it cannot be used for write
operations (backups, destination for duplication jobs). The tape can be
used for read (restore, source for duplication jobs) operations.
Backup images on the tape continue to expire when the tape is Frozen,
but when all images have expired, the tape remains assigned. It is not
eligible for reallocation until it is unfrozen.

23 Select Media and Device Management > Media in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

24 Click the Refresh icon, located on the tool bar of the Administration Console
(or use F5, or View > Refresh), to update the media information displayed in
the right pane.

25 Click the entry for the Media ID that has the Frozen media status.

26 Click Actions, on the tool bar of the NetBackup Administration Console.

27 Click Unfreeze, in the resulting menu.

28 The Unfreeze dialog box is displayed.

29 Click OK in the Unfreeze dialog box.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Note: The bpmedia command can also be used to freeze, unfreeze, suspend,
and unsuspend tape volumes.

30 Click the Refresh icon, located on the tool bar of the Administration Console
(or use F5, or View > Refresh), to update the Media information displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

360
B–140 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 31 Record the Media Status of the tape.

Media Status: Active

32 Perform another manual backup of winclient.example.com, using the

Full schedule of the winclient_test_tape_media policy.

Solution

a Click the entry for the winclient_test_tape_media policy.

b Select Actions > Manual Backup.

The Manual Backup dialog box is displayed.

B
c Click the entry for the Full schedule, and click OK in the Manual Backup
dialog box.

End of Solution

33 Click the Activity Monitor entry in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

34 Monitor the progress of the most recent backup job. Verify that the job runs to
successful completion (status 0). If the job fails, record the status code, and
notify your instructor.

35 View the Job Details of the job to obtain the Media ID that was used to write
the backup image. Record the Media ID in the space provided.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Solution

a Click the entry for the most recent backup job displayed in the Activity
Monitor.

b Select Actions > Details.

The Job Details window is displayed.

c Click the Detailed Status tab.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

361 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–141
 d View the contents of the Status pane to locate the Media ID that was used
for the backup job.

e Record the Media ID of the tape in the space provided.

f Click Close, to close the Job Details window.

End of Solution

Media ID:
Table 4: Media ID used for third backup job

36 Record your observations concerning the tape that was used for the third
backup job in this exercise.

Answer:
NetBackup could use either the same tape as was used for the first backup
job (the tape that was previously frozen), or the same tape as was used for
the second backup job. Both tapes have a Media Status of Active, and are
available for use.

Managing suspended media

In the steps that follow you manually suspend a tape and view the impact that the
Suspended media status has on NetBackup media utilization.

1 Select Media and Device Management > Media in the left pane of the
Administration Console.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

2 Click the Refresh icon, located on the tool bar of the Administration Console
(or use F5, or View > Refresh), to update the Media information displayed in
the right pane.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

362
B–142 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 3 Locate the entries for the Media IDs used in the two most recent backup jobs.
Record the Media ID, Media Status, and Volume Pool information for the
tapes.

Media ID Media Status Volume Pool

server_tapes
server_tapes
Table 5: Information for Media IDs used in the most recent backup jobs

4 Click the entry for the first Media ID listed in the table, to highlight the entry
for the tape.

5 Click Actions, on the tool bar of the NetBackup Administration Console.

B

6 Click Suspend (in the menu).

7 The Suspend dialog box is displayed.

8 Click OK in the Suspend dialog box.

9 Click the entry for the second Media ID listed in the table, to highlight the
entry for the tape.

10 Click Actions, on the tool bar of the NetBackup Administration Console.

11 Click Freeze (in the menu).

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

12 The Freeze dialog box is displayed.

13 Click OK in the Freeze dialog box.

14 Click the Refresh icon, located on the tool bar of the Administration Console
(or use F5, or View > Refresh), to update the media information displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

363 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–143
 15 Record the Media Status of the tapes.

Media ID Media Status Volume Pool

server_tapes
server_tapes

16 Perform a manual backup of winclient.example.com, using the Full

schedule of the winclient_test_tape_media policy.

Solution

a Click the entry for the winclient_test_tape_media policy.

b Select Actions > Manual Backup.

The Manual Backup dialog box is displayed.

c Click the entry for the Full schedule, and click OK in the Manual Backup
dialog box.

End of Solution

17 Click the Activity Monitor entry in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

18 Monitor the progress of the most recent backup job. Verify that the job runs to
successful completion (status 0). If the job fails, record the status code, and
notify your instructor.

19 View the Job Details of the job to obtain the Media ID that was used to write
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

the backup image. Record the Media ID in the space provided.

Solution

a Click the entry for the most recent backup job displayed in the Activity
Monitor.

b Select Actions > Details.

The Job Details window is displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

364
B–144 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 c Click the Detailed Status tab.

d View the contents of the Status pane to locate the Media ID that was used
for the backup job.

e Record the Media ID of the tape in the space provided.

f Click Close, to close the Job Details window.

End of Solution

Media ID:
Table 6: Media ID used for fourth backup job

B
20 Select Media and Device Management > Media in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

21 Click the Refresh icon, located on the tool bar of the Administration Console
(or use F5, or View > Refresh), to update the Media information displayed in
the right pane.

22 What is the significance of the Suspended media state.

Answer:
When a tape has the Suspended media status, it cannot be used for write
operations (backups, destination for duplication jobs). The tape can be
used for read (restore, source for duplication jobs) operations.
Backup images on the tape continue to expire when the tape is
Suspended. When all images have expired, the tape is unassigned by
NetBackup. If the tape originated in the scratch pool, it is returned to the
scratch pool. The tape is eligible for reallocation.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

23 Access the Terminal window on the master server system. This window was
left open from a previous step in this exercise.

24 Type the command, and press Enter.

available_media

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

365 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–145
 25 View the output of the available_media command.

26 Locate the entries for the Frozen and Suspended tapes in the
available_media command output.

27 Close the Terminal window.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

366
B–146 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Exercise 5: Running tape reports

In this exercise, you use the Tape Summary and Tape Written reports provided in
the NetBackup Administration Console to obtain media status and utilization
information.

lnxmaster

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server system.

B
Note: The NetBackup Administration Console may be open from a previous
lab activity.

2 Select NetBackup Management > Reports in the left pane of the

Administration Console.

3 Click the symbol to the left of the Reports object, to expand Reports.

4 Click the symbol to the left of the Tape Reports object, to expand Tape
Reports.

Running the Tape Summary report

In the following you run the Tape Summary report.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

5 Click the Tape Summary report, to select the report.

The Report Settings for the report are displayed in the right pane of the
Administration Console.

6 Select the following Report Settings:

– Media Owner: <All Media owners> (default)

– Volume Pool: <All Volume Pools> (default)
– Verbose Listing: selected
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
367 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–147
 7 Click Run Report.

The output of the Tape Summary report is displayed on the bottom portion of
the right pane.

8 Note that this report arranges its output by media server (media owners), listing
the number of Active, Full, Suspended, Frozen, Imported tapes for each media
server. In addition, the report lists the expiration dates for tapes associated with
each media server.

Running the Tape Written report

In the following you run the Tape Written report.

1 Select NetBackup Management > Reports > Tape Reports in the left pane
of the Administration Console.

2 Click the Tape Written report, to select the report.

The Report Settings for the report are displayed in the right pane of the
Administration Console.

3 Select the following Report Settings:

– Date/Time Range:
› Between: Today’s date minus 1 week / Current time (default)
› and Date/Time: greyed out (default)
› Current Time: selected
– Media Server: <All Media Servers> (default)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

4 Click Run Report.

The output of the Tape Written report is displayed on the bottom portion of
the right pane.

5 Note that this report displays the Media ID that have been written to during the
reporting period specified in the report settings. The default report output
displays the name of the media server that owns each tape, the number of times
the tapes were written to during the reporting period, the total size of the data
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
368
B–148 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 that has been written to the tapes, and the retention period associated with the
images on the tape.

Note: You may also use OpsCenter to monitor the status of NetBackup media and
to run media status and utilization reports.

Returning frozen and suspended tapes to the active status

In the final steps of this lab activity, you perform the steps to return frozen and
suspended tapes to the active status using the NetBackup Administration Console.

1 Select Media and Device Management > Media in the left pane of the
Administration Console.
B

2 Click the Refresh icon, located on the tool bar of the Administration Console
(or use F5, or View > Refresh), to update the Media information displayed in
the right pane.

3 Locate and click the entry for any Media ID that has the Frozen media status.

4 Click Actions, on the tool bar of the NetBackup Administration Console.

5 Click Unfreeze, in the resulting menu.

6 The Unfreeze dialog box is displayed.

7 Click OK in the Unfreeze dialog box.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

8 Click the entry for any Media ID that has the Suspended media status.

9 Click Actions, on the tool bar of the NetBackup Administration Console.

10 Click Unsuspend, in the resulting menu.

11 The Unsuspend dialog box is displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

369 Lab 2: Managing and Optimizing Tape Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–149
 12 Click OK in the Unsuspend dialog box.

13 If there are additional frozen or suspended tape listed, perform the steps
necessary to unfreeze or unsuspend them - as described in the previous steps.

14 Click the Refresh icon, located on the tool bar of the Administration Console
(or use F5, or View > Refresh), to update the Media information displayed.

15 Verify that all tape volumes have a Media Status of Active, as displayed in the
right pane of the Administration Console.

End of lab
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

370
B–150 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage B
In this lab, you perform tasks to reinforce the concepts presented in the lesson,
including:
• Configuring an AdvancedDisk storage server, and associated disk pools and
storage units
• Managing AdvancedDisk disk pools
• Configuring and using disk staging

Two parallel versions of the labs enable you to choose the level of detail that suits
your experience:
• Appendix A provides high level step-by-step lab instructions.
• Appendix B provides complete detailed step-by-step lab instructions and
solutions.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

371 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–151
 Exercise 1: Configuring for AdvancedDisk

In this exercise, you configure and AdvancedDisk storage server, and associated
disk pools and storage units, using the NetBackup wizards.

Identifying disk storage volumes for AdvancedDisk

In the following steps, you identify the disk volumes on the NetBackup media
server, winserver.example.com, that you use as the target volumes for
NetBackup AdvancedDisk disk pools and storage units.

1 Access the console of the media server system,

winserver.example.com.

winserver

2 Right-click the Computer icon on the desktop of the media server, and select
Open.

3 In the Computer window, note the disks that have been configured on the
master server system, as shown in the screen shot.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

For purposes of this lab environment, the O:, P:, and Q: disk volumes, with
the ADVDSK1, ADVDSK2, and ADVDSK3 volume labels, have been set
aside as the disk volumes to use for the AdvancedDisk disk storage units on the
master server system.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

372
B–152 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Note: The capacities for the disk volumes allocated for the AdvancedDisk feature
in this lab environment are smaller than would be allocated for use in a
production backup environment. These disks are not representative of the
typical disk volume capacities used for NetBackup disk storage units.

4 Close the Computer window on the media server system.

Configuring an AdvancedDisk storage server

In the steps that follow, you use the Configure Disk Storage Servers wizard to
configure an AdvancedDisk storage server associated with the media server
system, winserver.example.com.

1 Access the console of the master server system.

lnxmaster
B

Note: You may be logged in to the master server from a previous lab activity. If
you are, you can continue to use that login session.

Note: The NetBackup Administration Console may be open from a previous

lab activity. If it is, you can skip to the first step after the logon steps.

2 Right-click the Terminal icon on the desktop of the master server, and select
Open.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

3 Type jnbSA& at the command prompt, and press Enter.

The NetBackup Administration Console login window is displayed.

4 Login to the NetBackup Administration Console using the student User

name (password = training).

The NetBackup Administration Console window is displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

373 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–153
 5 Click the entry for the lnxmaster.example.com (Master Server)
displayed at the top of the object tree in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

The NetBackup wizards are displayed in the right pane of the Administration
Console.

6 Use the Configure Disk Storage Servers wizard to configure an

AdvancedDisk storage server associated with the media server,
winserver.example.com.

Use the information provided in the AdvancedDisk storage server

parameters table to configure the storage server.

Storage Server parameter Parameter value/settings

Type of disk storage to configure: AdvancedDisk
Media server: winserver.example.com
Storage server name winserver.example.com
(field is populated automatically)
Table 1: AdvancedDisk storage server parameters

Solution

a Click the Configure Disk Storage Servers wizard.

The Welcome to the Storage Server Configuration Wizard screen is

displayed.

b Click Next to continue.

The Add Storage Server screen is displayed.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

c Verify AdvancedDisk is selected for the type of disk storage to

configure.

d Click Next to continue.

An expanded Add Storage Server screen is displayed.

e Use the drop-down list to select winserver.example.com for the

Select the Media server associated with the storage server, as indicated in
the table.

The Storage server name and Storage server type fields on the Add
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
374
B–154 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Storage Server screen are automatically populated.

f Click Next to continue.

The Storage Server Configuration Summary screen is displayed.

g Click Next to continue.

The Storage Server Creation Status screen is displayed.

h Monitor the progress of the storage server creation.

When the storage server has been created, the Next button becomes
available for selection.

i Click Next to continue.

The message “Storage server “winserver.example.com” successfully

created” is displayed.

j Allow the Storage Server Creation Status screen to remain open, and
continue to the next step.
B

End of Solution

Configuring an AdvancedDisk disk pool

In the steps that follow, you create an AdvancedDisk disk pool using the
Configure Disk Storage Servers wizard.
In this scenario, you create two AdvancedDisk disk pools associated with the
AdvancedDisk storage server on the media server system,
winserver.example.com.
You create the first of these pools as a continuation of running the Configure Disk
Storage Servers wizard.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

You configure the second AdvancedDisk disk pool later in this lab exercise.

7 Continue the use of the Configure Disk Storage Servers wizard to create an
AdvancedDisk disk pool. Use the parameters in the
adv_dpool1_winserver disk pool parameters table to create the disk
pool.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

375 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–155
 Storage Server parameter Parameter value/settings
Disk Pool Type: AdvancedDisk
Storage server: winserver.example.com
Disk volumes for this disk O:
pool: P:
Disk pool name: adv_dpool1_winserver
Comments: media server AdvancedDisk disk pool
High water mark: 98% (default)
Low water mark: 80% (default)
Limit I/O streams: not checked (default)
Table 2: adv_dpool1_winserver disk pool parameters

Solution

a Click Next on the Storage Server Creation Status screen of the Storage
Server Configuration Wizard (left open from the previous steps).

The Disk Pool Configuration Wizard is started automatically and the

Welcome to the Disk Pool Configuration Wizard screen is displayed.

b Click Next to continue.

The Disk Pool screen is displayed.

c Verify AdvancedDisk is selected for the Type of Disk Pool.

d Click Next to continue.

The Select Storage Server screen is displayed.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

e Mark the check box for the Storage server,

winserver.example.com.

f Click Next to continue.

The Select Volumes screen is displayed.

g Mark the check box for the O:\ and P:\ disk volumes as indicated the
adv_dpool1_winserver disk pool parameters table. (This disk
pool includes only two disk volumes.)

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

376
B–156 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 h Verify that you have selected two disk volumes for inclusion in this disk
pool, as indicated in the adv_dpool1_winserver disk pool
parameters table.

i Click Next to continue.

The Disk Pool Properties screen is displayed.

j Type adv_dpool1_winserver in the Disk pool name field and in the

Comments field type, media server AdvancedDisk disk
pool. Allow the remaining parameters on the Disk Pool Properties
screen to remain at their default settings.

k Click Next to continue.

The Summary screen is displayed.

l Verify that the information for the disk pool displayed on the Summary
screen matches the information provided in the
adv_dpool1_winserver disk pool parameters table. Use the back
button to make any changes required to the disk pool settings.
B
m When you are satisfied with the disk pool settings, click Next to continue.

The Disk Pool Configuration screen is displayed.

When the disk pool has been created, the “Configuration completed
successfully” message is displayed on the screen.

n Click Next to continue.

The Storage Unit Creation screen displays a message indicating that the
disk pool configuration was completed successfully.

o Click Next to continue.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

End of Solution

Creating a storage unit that uses the AdvancedDisk disk pool

In the following steps, you continue the use of the Disk Pool Creation Wizard to
create a storage unit that uses the AdvancedDisk disk pool you created in the
previous steps of this lab exercise.

In the previous step of this exercise, you created the adv_dpool1_winserver

AdvancedDisk disk pool. The Disk Pool Creation Wizard remains open from the
creation of the disk pool.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
377 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–157
 The Storage Unit creation screen is currently displayed.

8 Note that the “Create a Storage Unit that uses the adv_dpool1_winserver”
check box is selected on the Storage Unit creation screen.

9 Click Next to continue.

10 Configure the storage unit using the information provided in the

advdisk1_stu_winserver storage unit parameters table.

Storage Unit parameter Parameter value/settings

Storage unit name: advdisk1_stu_winserver
Media Server:
Use only the selected media selected
servers:
entry for
winserver.example.com selected
Maximum concurrent jobs: 1 (default)
Maximum fragment size: 524288 (default)
Table 3: advdisk1_stu_winserver storage unit parameters

Solution

a Enter advdisk1_stu_winserver for the Storage unit name.

b Mark the radio button for Only use the selected media servers.

c Mark the check box for winserver.example.com.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

d Leave all other default settings.

e Click Next to continue.

The Finished screen of the Disk Pool Configuration Wizard is displayed.

End of Solution

11 Click Finish on the Finished screen to exit the Disk Pool Creation Wizard.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

378
B–158 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Creating an additional AdvancedDisk disk pool and storage unit
In the following steps, you create an additional AdvancedDisk disk pool and
storage unit associated with the AdvancedDisk storage server on the media server,
winserver.example.com.

1 Use the Configure Disk Pool wizard and the information provided in the
adv_dpool2_winserver disk pool parameters table to create an
additional AdvancedDisk disk pool associated with the AdvancedDisk storage
server on the media server, winserver.example.com.

Storage Server parameter Parameter value/settings

Disk Pool Type: AdvancedDisk
Storage server: winserver.example.com
Disk volumes for this disk Q:
pool:
Disk pool name: adv_dpool2_winserver
Comments: media server AdvancedDisk disk pool
High water mark: 98% (default)
Low water mark: 80% (default) B

Limit I/O streams: not checked (default)

Table 4: adv_dpool2_winserver disk pool parameters

Solution

a From the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server

system click the top entry in the left pane of the Administration Console.
This is the lnxmaster.example.com (Master Server) entry.

The NetBackup wizards are displayed in the right pane of the

Administration Console.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

b Click the Configure Disk Pool wizard.

The Welcome to the Disk Pool Configuration Wizard screen is

displayed.

c Click Next to continue.

The Disk Pool screen is displayed.

d Verify AdvancedDisk is selected in the Type pane.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

379 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–159
 e Click Next to continue.

The Select Storage Server screen is displayed.

f For the Storage server name, mark the check box for
winserver.example.com.

g Click Next to continue.

The Select Volumes screen is displayed.

h Click the Q:\ disk volume as indicated the adv_dpool2_winserver

disk pool parameters table. (This disk pool includes only one disk
volume.)

i Verify that you have selected a single disk volume for inclusion in this disk
pool, as indicated in the adv_dpool2_winserver disk pool
parameters table.

j Click Next to continue.

The Disk Pool Properties screen is displayed.

k For the Disk pool name type, adv_dpool2_winserver, and for the
Comments type media server AdvancedDisk disk pool as
described in the disk pool parameters table. Allow the remaining
parameters on the Additional Disk Pool Information screen to remain at
their default settings.

l Click Next to continue.

The Summary screen is displayed.

m Verify that the information for the disk pool displayed on the Summary
screen matches the information provided in the
adv_dpool2_winserver disk pool parameters table. Use the back
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

button to make any changes required to the disk pool settings.

n When you are satisfied with the disk pool settings, click Next to continue.

The Disk Pool Configuration screen is displayed.

When the disk pool has been created, the “Configuration completed
successfully” message is displayed on the screen.

o Click Next to continue.

End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

380
B–160 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 The Storage Unit Creation screen is displayed after the configuration of the
disk pool has been successfully completed.

2 Allow the Disk Pool Creation Wizard to remain open (with the Storage Unit
Creation screen displayed) to enable the completion of the next steps.

3 Use the Disk Pool Configuration Wizard and the information provided in the
advdisk2_stu_winserver storage unit parameters table to create a
storage unit associated with the disk pool you created in the previous steps
(adv_dpool2_winserver).

Storage Unit parameter Parameter value/settings

Storage unit name: advdisk2_stu_winserver
Media Server:
Use only the selected media selected
servers:
entry for
winserver.example.com selected
B
Maximum concurrent jobs: 1 (default)
Maximum fragment size: 524288 (default)
Table 5: advdisk2_stu_winserver storage unit parameters

Solution

a Access the Disk Pool Creation Wizard that remains open from the
creation of the advdisk2_stu_winserver disk pool in the previous
steps.

The Storage Unit Creation screen of the Disk Pool Creation Wizard is
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

currently displayed.

b Note that the “Create a Storage Unit that uses the disk pool” check box
is selected on the Storage Unit creation screen

c Click Next to continue.

d In the Storage Unit name field, type advdisk2_stu_winserver.

e Mark the radio button for Only use the selected media servers.

f Mark the check box for winserver.example.com.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
381 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–161
 g Click Next to continue.

The Finished screen of the Disk Pool Configuration Wizard is displayed.

End of Solution

4 Click Finish on the Finished screen to exit the Disk Pool Creation Wizard.

The NetBackup Administration Console is displayed.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

382
B–162 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Exercise 2: Managing AdvancedDisk disk pools

In this exercise, you use the NetBackup Administration Console and other
provided tools to view and manage NetBackup AdvancedDisk disk pools and their
associated disk volumes.

Viewing and managing storage servers and disk pools

In the steps that follow you use the NetBackup Administration to view storage
server entries, and to view and manage disk pool configuration and status.

lnxmaster

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server.

B
Note: The NetBackup Administration Console may be open from a previous
exercise.

Viewing storage server entries

In the next step you locate and verify the storage server entries in the NetBackup
Administration Console.

2 Select Media and Device Management > Credentials > Storage Servers in
the left pane of the Administration Console.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

3 Note the storage server entries for:

– lnxmaster.example.com
– winserver.example.com

Note: You cannot change the storage server configuration using the Credentials
interface of the NetBackup Administration Console.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

383 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–163
 Viewing and managing disk pool properties
In the following steps, you view and verify disk pool configuration settings using
the NetBackup Administration Console.

4 Select Media and Device Management > Devices > Disk Pools in the left
pane of the Administration Console.

The configured disk pools are displayed in the All Disk Pools pane.

5 Note the entries for the disk pools:

– adv_dpool1_lnxmaster
– adv_dpool1_winserver
– adv_dpool2_lnxmaster
– adv_dpool2_winserver

6 Note the information displayed for the disk pools, including: number of
volumes, number of media servers, used capacity, available size, and server
type.

7 Right-click the entry for the adv_dpool1_lnxmaster disk pool, to

highlight the entry.

8 Click Change, in the resulting menu.

The Change Disk Pool window is displayed.

9 Record the disk volume names and available space of the disk pool:

Volume Name Available Space

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

/advdsk1 4.45 GB
/advdsk2 4.45 GB

Solution
From the Disk volumes area use the small arrows to the right side of the
window to view information about both volumes.
End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

384
B–164 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 10 Click Cancel to close the Change Disk Pool window without making changes
to the disk pool settings.

Note: You can view the configuration settings for any disk pool by right-clicking
the entry for the disk pool, and selecting Change, to access the Change
Disk Pool window.

11 Click the entry for the adv_dpool1_lnxmaster disk pool, to highlight the
entry.

12 Select Actions > Inventory Disk Pools.

The Inventory Disk Pool window is displayed.

13 Select the following parameter in the Inventory Disk Pool window:

Disk Pool: adv_dpool1_lnxmaster

B

14 Click Start Inventory, to inventory the selected disk pool.

15 Note the result of the disk pool inventory that are displayed in the Results pane
of the Inventory Disk Pool window.

Note: You can inventory any configured disk pool using the Inventory Disk Pool
window.

16 Click Close to close the Inventory Disk Pool window.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Monitoring and managing disk pools

In the following steps, you use the Device Monitor to view and manage the status
of disk pools and their associated disk volumes.

1 Perform the following steps to create and modify a new policy:

– Copy the winclient_test_bdisk_master policy to create a new
policy, named winclient_test_advdisk1_master.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

385 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–165
 – Modify the new policy to make a single change: change the Policy storage
attribute, so that the policy uses the master server storage unit,
advdisk1_stu_lnxmaster, to write backup images of the client,
winclient.example.com, to an AdvancedDisk disk pool.
Solution

a Click the entry for the winclient_test_bdisk_master policy in

the left pane of the Administration Console.

b Click Edit > Copy to New.

The Copy a Policy dialog box is displayed.

c Type the name of the new policy in the New policy name field:
winclient_test_advdisk1_master

d Click OK in the Copy a Policy dialog box.

The Change Policy - winclient_test_advdisk1_master

window is opened.

e On the Attributes tab, click the arrow for the Policy storage field, and
click the advdisk1_stu_lnxmaster storage unit entry.

f Click OK to save the change to the policy.

The winclient_test_advdisk1_master policy is closed.

End of Solution

2 Perform a manual backup of winclient.example.com, using the Full

schedule of the winclient_test_advdisk1_master policy.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Solution

a Click the entry for the winclient_test_advdisk1_master policy.

b Select Actions > Manual Backup.

The Manual Backup dialog box is displayed.

c Click OK in the Manual Backup dialog box.

End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

386
B–166 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 3 Click the Activity Monitor entry in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

4 Monitor the progress of the most recent backup job. Verify that the job runs to
successful completion (status 0). If the job fails, record the status code, and
notify your instructor.

5 View the Detailed Status tab of the Job Details, to identify the specific disk
volume that was used to write the backup image. Record the disk volume in the
space provided.

Solution

a Click the entry for the most recent backup job displayed in the Activity
Monitor.

b Select Actions > Details.

The Job Details window is displayed.

B
c Click the Detailed Status tab.

d View the contents of the Status pane to locate the Disk Volume that was
used for the backup job.

e Record the Disk Volume information in the space provided.

f Click Close, to close the Job Details window.

End of Solution

Disk Volume: The disk volume can be either /advdsk1 or /

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

advdsk2 of the adv_dpool1_lnxmaster disk

pool.

Table 6: Disk Volume used for the backup job

Changing the status of a disk pool - from up to down

In the following steps, you use the NetBackup Administration Console to change
the status of a disk pool (from up to down), and verify the results.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

387 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–167
 6 Select Media and Device Management > Device Monitor in the left pane of
the NetBackup Administration Console.

The Device Monitor is displayed in the right pane of the Administration

Console.

7 Note the two tabs located at the bottom of the Device Monitor:

– Drives
– Disk Pools

8 Click the Disk Pools tab, then click Refresh.

The configured disk pools are listed in the Disk Pools pane.

9 Click the entry for the adv_dpool1_lnxmaster disk pool, to highlight the
entry.

10 Select Actions > Down Disk Pool, to down the disk pool.

11 Note that the Disk Pool Status column displays changes to: Down.

12 Perform a manual backup of winclient.example.com, using the Full

schedule of the winclient_test_advdisk1_master policy.

Solution

a Click the entry for the winclient_test_advdisk1_master policy.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

b Select Actions > Manual Backup.

The Manual Backup dialog box is displayed.

c Click OK in the Manual Backup dialog box.

End of Solution

13 Click the Activity Monitor entry in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

388
B–168 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 14 Monitor the progress of the most recent backup job.

15 Verify that the job fails. Record the status code for the failed job.

Status code: 202. Disk pool is down (2073).

Table 7: Disk Volume used for the backup job

16 Access the Job Details for the failed job.

17 Click the Troubleshooter button on the Detailed Status tab to obtain more
information about the failure.

18 Close the Troubleshooter window, and the Job Details window.

Changing the status of a disk pool - from down to up

B
In the following steps, you use the NetBackup Administration Console to change
the status of a disk pool (from down to up), and verify the results.

19 Select Media and Device Management > Device Monitor in the left pane of
the NetBackup Administration Console.

The Device Monitor is displayed in the right pane of the Administration

Console.

20 Click the Disk Pools tab, located at the bottom of the Device Monitor pane.

The configured disk pools are listed in the Disk Pools pane.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

21 Click the entry for the adv_dpool1_lnxmaster disk pool, to highlight the
entry.

22 Select Actions > Up Disk Pool, to return the disk pool to operation.

23 Note that the Disk Pool Status column displays changes to: Up.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

389 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–169
 Merging disk pools
In the following steps, you use the nbdevconfig command provided in
NetBackup to merge two AdvancedDisk disk pools into a single disk pool.

Scenario
In the first exercise of this lab activity, you configured an AdvancedDisk storage
server on the media server, winserver.example.com. After configuring the
storage server, you configured two AdvancedDisk disk pools and the related
storage units for the storage server.
After some consideration, you have decided to merge the two AdvancedDisk disk
pools on winserver.example.com, to form a single disk pool.

lnxmaster

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server.

2 Select Media and Device Management > Devices >Disk Pools in the left
pane of the Administration Console.

The configured disk pools are displayed in the All Disk Pools pane.

Verify the disk volumes included in the disk pool

In the following steps, you verify the disk volumes that are included in the
adv_dpool1_winserver and adv_dpool2_winserver disk pools
associated with the winserver.example.com storage server.

3 Right-click the entry for the adv_dpool1_winserver disk pool and, in

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

the menu, click Change.

The Change Disk Pool window is displayed.

Note: Verify that you are viewing the Change Disk Pool window for the
adv_dpool1_winserver disk pool.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

390
B–170 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 4 Record the Volume Names and Available Space for the disk volumes that are
included in the adv_dpool1_winserver disk pool.

Volume Name Available Space

O:\ 9.9 GB
P:\ 9.9 GB

5 Click Cancel to close the Change Disk Pool window without making changes
to the disk pool parameter settings.

The list of configured disk pools is displayed in the All Disk Pools pane.

6 Right-click the entry for the adv_dpool2_winserver disk pool and, in

the menu, click Change.

The Change Disk Pool window is displayed.

Note: Verify that you are viewing the Change Disk Pool window for the B
adv_dpool2_winserver disk pool.

7 Record the Volume Name and Available Space for the disk volumes that are
included in the adv_dpool2_winserver disk pool.

Volume Name Available Space

Q:\ 9.9 GB

8 Click Cancel to close the Change Disk Pool window without making changes
to the disk pool parameter settings.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

The configured disk pools are displayed in the All Disk Pools pane.

Downing the disk pools

In the following steps, you change the status of the adv_dpool1_winserver
and adv_dpool2_winserver disk pools to DOWN, in preparation for
merging the disk pools.

1 Select Media and Device Management > Device Monitor in the left pane of
the NetBackup Administration Console.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
391 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–171
 2 Click the Disk Pools tab in the right pane of the Device Monitor to access the
list of configured disk pools.

3 Right-click the entry for the adv_dpool1_winserver disk pool and, in

the menu click Down Disk Pool.

4 Verify that the Disk Pool Status of the adv_dpool1_winserver disk pool
has changed to Down.

5 Right-click the entry for the adv_dpool2_winserver disk pool and, in

the menu click Down Disk Pool.

6 Verify that the Disk Pool Status of the adv_dpool2_winserver disk pool
has changed to Down.

Deleting the storage unit for the disk pool to be merged

In the following steps, you locate and remove the storage unit that is associated
with the secondary disk pool (the disk pool that will not be used after the merge
operation is completed is referred to as the secondary disk pool). Removal of the
storage unit associated with the secondary disk pool is required for the merge
operation to be successful.

Note: A storage unit points towards a backup storage device (disk or tape device)
that is used to record and store backup images. Deleting a storage unit does
not delete the backup images that have been written to the storage media.

1 Select NetBackup Management > Storage > Storage Units in the left pane
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

of the NetBackup Administration Console.

2 Right-click the entry for the advdisk2_stu_winserver storage unit and

click Change in the resulting menu.

The Change Storage Unit window is displayed.

3 Verify that the selected storage unit is associated with the

adv_dpool2_winserver disk pool.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

392
B–172 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Note: Using a Filter is another way to search for all storage units associated with
a particular disk pool.

4 Click Cancel to close the Change Storage Unit window.

5 Right-click the entry for the advdisk2_stu_winserver storage unit and

click Delete in the resulting menu.

The Delete Confirmation window is displayed.

6 Verify the name of the storage unit that is displayed in the Delete
Confirmation window is advdisk2_stu_winserver.

7 Click OK in the Delete Confirmation window to delete the storage unit.

8 Verify that the entry for the advdisk2_stu_winserver storage unit is no

longer displayed in the list of storage units in the right pane of the B
Administration Console.

Merging the disk pools

In the following steps, you use the NetBackup nbdevconfig command to
merge the adv_dpool1_winserver and adv_dpool2_winserver disk
pools into a single disk pool named, adv_dpool1_winserver.

Note: The disk pools involved in the merge operation must be in the Down state
when the merge is performed.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

1 Access a Terminal window on the master server.

2 Type su - root to become superuser.

3 Type the command, and press Enter:

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

393 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–173
 nbdevconfig -mergedps -stype AdvancedDisk -primarydp
adv_dpool1_winserver -secondarydp
adv_dpool2_winserver

4 When the command execution has been completed, the command prompt is
returned.

The message: Disk pool adv_dpool2_winserver has been successfully

merged into disk pool adv_dpool1_winserver is displayed.

5 Close the Terminal window.

Verifying the merge of the disk pools

In the following steps you verify the merge of the disk pools, and return the
adv_dpool1_winserver disk pool to the UP status.

1 Select Media and Device Management > Devices > Disk Pools in the left
pane of the NetBackup Administration Console.

2 Click the Refresh button on the tool bar of the Administration Console (or F5,
or View > Refresh) to update the information displayed in the Disk Pools pane
of the Administration Console.

3 Verify that the entry for the adv_dpool2_winserver disk pool is no

longer displayed in the list of disk pools.

Note: If the entry for the disk pool is still displayed after refreshing the display,
close the NetBackup Administration Console, and open a new NetBackup
Administration Console. Then select Media and Device Management >
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Devices > Disk Pools, and verify that the disk pool entry has been removed
from the list of disk pools. Notify your instructor if the disk pool entry is
not removed.

4 Right-click the entry for the adv_dpool1_winserver disk pool and, click
Change in the resulting menu.

The Change Disk Pool window is displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

394
B–174 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 5 Record the Disk Volumes and the Available Space of the disk volumes that are
included in the adv_dpool1_winserver disk pool.

Volume Name Available Space

O:\ 9.9 GB
P:\ 9.9 GB
Q:\ 9.9 GB

6 Verify that the adv_dpool1_winserver disk pool contains three disk

volumes, having merged the Q:\ disk volume into the disk pool.

7 Click Cancel to close the Change Disk Pool window.

Bringing the merged disk pool up

After merging the two disk pools, the status of the adv_dpool1_winserver
disk pool is Down. The disk pool must be brought Up, so that it can be used for
backup and restore operations. In the following steps, you use the Device Monitor B
to change the Disk Pool Status of the adv_dpool1_winserver to Up.

1 Select Media and Device Management > Device Monitor in the left pane of
the NetBackup Administration Console.

2 Click the Disk Pools tab in the right pane of the Device Monitor to access the
list of configured disk pools.

Note: Until the display of information is refreshed, the entry for the disk pool that
was merged may be displayed.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

3 Click the Refresh icon in the tool bar (or F5, or View > Refresh) to update the
Disk Pool information that is displayed.

4 Right-click the entry for the adv_dpool1_winserver disk pool and, in

the menu click Up Disk Pool.

5 Verify that the Disk Pool Status of the adv_dpool1_winserver disk pool
has changed to Up.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

395 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–175
 Exercise 3: Configuring and using disk staging

In this exercise, you configure the disk staging feature of NetBackup. In this
example, you create a disk staging storage unit (DSSU) that sends backup images
to basic disk. Using a schedule, the DSSU copies the images to a secondary
location, which is a tape storage unit.
In addition to configuring the staging storage unit, and its associated staging
schedule, you configure a policy that directs backup images to be written to the
staging storage unit.
After you configure the staging storage unit and policy, you use the policy to run a
manual backup and observe the results.

Configuring a disk staging storage unit.

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server system.

lnxmaster

2 Select NetBackup Management > Storage > Storage Units in the left pane
of the Administration Console.

The list of currently configured storage units is displayed in the right pane of
the Administration Console.

3 Select Actions > New > Storage Unit.

The New Storage Unit window is displayed.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

396
B–176 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 4 Use the information provided in the staging_stu_lnxmedia storage
unit parameters table to configure the new staging_stu_lnxmedia
storage unit.

Storage unit parameter Parameter value/settings

Storage unit name: staging_stu_lnxmedia
Storage unit type Disk
Disk type: BasicDisk
Media server; lnxmedia.example.com
Absolute pathname to directory: /staging
This directory can exist on the root not selected (default)
files system or system disk
Maximum concurrent jobs: 1 (default)
Reduce fragment size to: not selected (default)
High water mark: 90%
Low water mark: 50%
Enable Temporary Staging Area: Selected
B
Table 8: staging_stu_lnxmedia storage unit parameters

Solution
Enter the information provided in the table into the appropriate fields of the
New Storage Unit window.
End of Solution

After clicking the Enable Temporary Staging Area... check box in the New
Storage Unit window, the Staging Schedule becomes available for selection.

5 Click the Staging Schedule button in the New Storage Unit window.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

The Disk Staging Schedule window is displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

397 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–177
 6 Use the information provided in the staging_stu_lnxmedia storage
unit parameters table to configure the Disk Staging Schedule.

Disk staging schedule parameter Parameter value/settings

Name: staging_stu_lnxmedia --
This name cannot be altered.
Priority for relocation jobs 0 (default)
Schedule type: Frequency (default)
Frequency setting: 4 hours
Multiple copies: not selected (default)
Final destination storage unit tape_stu_lnxmedia
Final destination volume pool: server_tapes
Final destination media owner: any (default)
Use alternate read server: not selected (default)
Start Window: 7 days a week - 24 hours a day
Start day/time: Sun 12:00:00 AM
End day/time: Sat 12:00:00 AM
Table 9: staging_stu_lnxmedia storage unit parameters

Solution

a Select the Attributes tab of the Disk Staging Schedule window.

b Set the Frequency to 4 hours.

c From the Final destination storage unit select tape_stu_lnxmedia.

d From the Final destination volume pool select server_tapes.

Leave all other default setting on the Attributes tab of the Schedule.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

f Click the Start Window tab of the Disk Staging Schedule window.

g Enter a start window of 7 days a week and 24 hours a day.

End of Solution

7 Click OK to save the changes to the Disk Staging Schedule.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

398
B–178 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 The Disk Staging Schedule window is closed, and the New Storage Unit
window is displayed.

8 Click OK to save the changes to the New Storage Unit,

staging_stu_lnxmedia.

The New Storage Unit window is closed. The list of storage units is displayed
in the right pane of the Administration Console.

9 Verify that the entry for the staging_stu_lnxmedia storage unit is

displayed in the list of storage units displayed in the right pane of the
Administration Console.

Configuring a policy to perform backups to a staging storage unit

In the steps that follow, you configure a policy that writes its backup images to the
new staging_stu_lnxmedia storage unit.

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server system. B

lnxmaster

2 Select NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the

Administration Console.

The list of currently configured policies is displayed in the right pane of the
Administration Console.

3 Right-click the entry for the inlinecopy_backup policy and, in the

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

resulting menu, click Copy to New.

The Copy to New Policy dialog box is displayed.

4 Type the policy name in the New policy name field, and click OK.

New policy name: staging_backup

The Change Policy - staging_backup window is displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

399 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–179
 5 Use the policy attribute information provided in the staging_backup
policy attributes table to configure the policy attributes.

Policy Attribute parameter Parameter value/settings

Policy name: staging_backup
Policy type: MS-Windows
Policy storage: staging_stu_lnxmedia
All other policy attributes: Use current settings for all other
policy attributes
Table 10: staging_backup policy attributes

6 After configuring the policy attributes, click the Schedules tab of the
staging_backup policy.

The Schedules tab of the policy is displayed

7 Delete the Full schedule that is displayed in the Schedules tab.

Solution

a Click the entry for the Full schedule to highlight the schedule.

b Click the Delete button.

End of Solution

8 Verify that no schedules are listed on the Schedules tab of the policy.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

9 Click New to add a new schedule.

The Add Schedule - Policy staging_backup window is displayed

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

400
B–180 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 10 Configure a new Full schedule using the parameters listed in the
staging_backup Full schedule attributes table.

Schedule parameter Parameter value/settings

Name: Full
All other schedule Attributes: Use the default settings
Start Window settings: Use the current settings: no
backup windows are open -
enabling only manual backups.
Table 11: staging_backup Full schedule attributes

Solution

a In the Attributes tab of the Schedule type Full for the Name of the
schedule.

b Click the Start Window tab of the Add New Schedule window.

c Accept all the default settings on the Start Window tab. The result is that B
only manual backups can be performed using this schedule.

d Click OK in the Add New Schedule window to save the schedule.

End of Solution

11 Click the Clients tab of the policy.

12 Verify that winclient.example.com is the only client listed in the

Clients tab.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

13 Click the Backup Selections tab of the policy.

14 Modify the entry for the backup selection that is currently listed, to identify
G:\data as the file system path for the backup selection.

Solution

a Click the entry for the current backup selection,

G:\data\smallfiles.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

401 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–181
 b Click the Change button.

The Change Backup Selection dialog box is displayed.

c Edit the Pathname or directive field of the Change Backup Selection

dialog box to G:\data.

G:\data should be the only path listed in the Backup Selection tab.

d Click OK to save the change and close the Change Backup Selection
dialog box.

End of Solution

15 Verify that the Backup Selections window now includes only: G:\data.

16 Click OK to save the changes to the staging_backup policy.

17 Verify that the new staging_backup policy is displayed in the list of

policies in the right pane of the NetBackup Administration Console.

Performing and monitoring backups to a disk staging storage unit

In the steps that follow, you perform several backup jobs that write their backup
images to a disk staging storage unit. After each backup job has run successfully
you monitor the disk volume used by the disk staging storage unit, and observe the
behavior of NetBackup.
Earlier in this exercise, you set the staging_stu_lnxmedia storage unit
frequency to four (4) hours.This setting controls the frequency at which
NetBackup relocates images from the storage unit disk volume to the specified
relocation media. To save time in this lab exercise, you simulate the automatic
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

relocation of the images by performing the manual relocation function provided in

the Administration Console.
As you continue to run backup jobs that write the backup images to the storage
unit, the high water mark of the disk staging storage unit is reached (at 90%).
When this happens, you observe the NetBackup activity that occurs as the backup
images are which have been relocated to long-term storage are purged from the
disk staging storage unit to make room for the new backup images.

1 Access the console of the client system, winclient.example.com.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

402
B–182 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 winclient

2 Log on to the client system (if you are not already logged in) using the student
user ID.

3 Right-click the Computer icon on the desktop of the client system, and select
Open.

4 Right-click the entry for the DATA (G:) drive, and select Open to view the
contents of the disk volume.

5 Right-click the entry for the data folder and select Properties.

6 Record the size of the data folder in the space provided.

B
Size of G:\data: 600 MBytes (approximately)

7 Close the data Properties window.

8 Access the console of the media server system, lnxmedia.example.com.

lnxmedia
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

9 Log on to the media server system (if necessary) using the student user ID.

10 Right-click the Terminal icon on the desktop of the media server system, and
select Open.

11 View the available disk space on the disk volume that is being used as the disk
staging volume (/staging).

df -h /staging

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

403 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–183
 12 Record the Size and Available space on the /staging volume.

Size: 1.8 GBytes

Available: 1.7 GBytes

Note: Awareness of the amount of the client data that is being backed up to
the staging storage unit, and the size of the disk volume that is being
used as the target for the disk staging storage unit is important to
anticipating the behavior you observe in the upcoming steps.

13 Allow the Terminal window to remain open on the media server system. You
return to this window later in this exercise.

14 Access the console of the master server system,

lnxmaster.example.com.

lnxmaster

15 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server system.

16 Click NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the

Administration Console.

The list of currently configured policies is displayed in the right pane of the
Administration Console.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

17 Right-click the staging_backup policy and, in the menu, click Manual

Backup.

The Manual Backup window is displayed.

18 Click OK in the Manual Backup window to initiate the backup operation.

19 Select the Activity Monitor in the left pane of the Administration Console.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

404
B–184 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 20 Note the most recent Job IDs displayed in the Activity Monitor.

Two new Job IDs are listed.

Note the Job Policy information for these two jobs:

– 1st job - _DSSU_POLICY_staging_stu_lnxmedia
– 2nd job - staging_backup

Note: The first job listed is a job that looks for backup images to relocate from
the disk staging disk volume to the specified destination storage location.
In the staging_stu_lnxmedia storage unit you set the frequency for
this activity to 4 hours. For the remainder of this course, a
_DSSU_POLICY_staging_stu_lnxmedia job will run every four
hours to perform automatic relocation of backup images from the staging
volume. The second job is the job that performs the backup of the client
data to the specified staging storage unit.

21 View the Job Details for the Job ID that performs the backup of the client data
to the staging storage unit.
B

22 Wait until the job has completed successfully, then record the value of the
Current kilobytes written information that is displayed on the Detail Status
tab of the Job Details window.

Current kilobytes written 610000 KBytes (approximately)

Note: If the backup job does not run successfully, record the status code and
notify your instructor.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

23 Close the Job Details window.

24 Access the console of the media server system, lnxmedia.example.com.

lnxmedia

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

405 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–185
 25 Access the Terminal window that is open on the media server system. This
window was left open from a previous step in this exercise.

26 View the available disk space on the disk volume that is being used as the disk
staging volume (/staging).

df -h /staging

27 Record the Size and Available space on the /staging volume.

Total Size of disk volume: 1.8 GBytes

Available: After backup #1: 1.1 GBytes

Note: The Available on the /staging volume of the media server has
decreased by approximately 600 MBytes.

28 Note the files that are present in the /staging directory.

ls /staging

29 There should be four files in the folder. These files are the backup image files
created by the backup of the client that you just performed. Four (4) files are
written to this storage unit folder for each backup image that is written. The
following files are examples of the four files related to a backup image:

– winclient.example.com_1332366114_C1_F1.133236114.img
– winclient.example.com_1332366114_C1_F1.133236114.info
– winclient.example.com_1332366114_C1_HDR.133236114.img
– winclient.example.com_1332366114_C1_HDR.133236114.info
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Note: The backup image name includes the name of the client whose data is
included in the backup image (Example: winclient.example.com). The 10-
digit number in the backup image file name (Example: 133236114) is the
CTIME timestamp associated with the start time of the backup job that
created the backup image.

30 Allow the Terminal window to remain open on the media server system. You
return to this window later in this exercise.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

406
B–186 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 31 Access the console of the master server system,
lnxmaster.example.com.

lnxmaster

32 Initiate a second manual backup using the staging_backup policy.

Solution

a Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server

system.

b Click NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the

Administration Console.

The list of currently configured policies is displayed in the right pane of the
Administration Console.
B
c Right-click the staging_backup policy and, in the menu, click
Manual Backup.

The Manual Backup window is displayed.

d Click OK in the Manual Backup window to initiate the backup operation.

End of Solution

33 Use the Activity Monitor to monitor the progress of the backup job that is
created as a result of the second manual backup operation.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Note that only a single backup job is initiated as a result of the manual backup
operation. (The job that accompanied the first backup job that used the
staging_backup policy was a backup image relocation job. From this
point on, that job will run every four hours.)

34 Verify that the job runs successfully before continuing to the next step. If the
job fails, record the status code and notify your instructor.

35 Access the console of the media server system, lnxmedia.example.com.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

407 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–187
 lnxmedia

36 Access the Terminal window that is open on the media server system. This
window was left open from a previous step in this exercise.

37 View the available disk space on the disk volume that is being used as the disk
staging volume (/staging).

df -h /staging

38 Record the Size and Available space on the /staging volume.

Total Size: 1.8 GBytes

Available: - After backup #1: 1.1 GBytes
Available: - After backup #2: 522 MBytes

Note: The Free Space on the STAGING (I:) drive of the media server has
decreased again by approximately 600 MBytes.

39 List the files that are present in the /staging directory.

ls /staging

Note: There are four files in the folder for each backup image that has been
written to the folder. Because you have performed two backups to the
folder there are a total of eight files currently present in the folder.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

40 Record the two unique 10-digit CTIME timestamps associated with the backup
images that reside in the /staging directory. These timestamps are part of the
file names of the backup images. An example of an image file name is:

winclient.example.com_1332446741_C1_F1.1332446741.img

In the example above, the CTIME timestamp is 1332446741.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

408
B–188 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 CTIME timestamp - backup image #1:
CTIME timestamp - backup image #2:

41 Allow the Terminal window to remain open on the media server system. You
return to this window later in this exercise.

Disk staging backup image relocation

As you have observed, as backup jobs that write to the staging disk volume
continue, the storage unit approaches its high water mark. If the disk volume
reaches its capacity before backup images have been relocated, subsequent backup
jobs that write to the storage unit fail.
The disk staging schedule that you configured in the staging_stu_lnxmedia
storage unit has a Frequency setting of four (4) hours. This means that every four
hours NetBackup automatically relocates backup images that reside on the storage
unit disk volume to the specified relocation destination. When relocation occurs,
even though the relocated backup images are written to the specified destination
storage unit, the backup images are not immediately removed from the staging B
disk volume. Backup images are retained on the staging disk volume until disk
space is needed to write new backup images. At that time, the relocated images are
purged from the staging disk volume.
In the following steps, you perform the manual relocation of backup images that
are resident on the staging_stu_lnxmedia storage unit using the NetBackup
Administration Console. The action simulates the automatic relocation of the
images. In this scenario, the staging schedule of the staging_stu_lnxmedia
storage unit causes backup images to be relocated to tapes in the server_tapes
volume pool.

1 Access the console of the master server system,

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

lnxmaster.example.com.

lnxmaster

2 Select Media and Device Management > Media in the left pane of the
NetBackup Administration Console.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

409 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–189
 The list of Media IDs configured in NetBackup is displayed in the right pane of
the Administration Console.

3 Click the Refresh button on the tool bar of the Administration Console (or F5,
or Actions > Refresh) to refresh the display of the volume information.

4 Record the Media IDs and their associated Volume Pool names of the tapes
that are currently assigned (tapes that are assigned have a date and time stamp
in the Time Assigned column). The number of tapes and the media IDs that
are currently assigned may vary.

Assigned Media ID: Volume Pool:

5 Select NetBackup Management > Storage > Storage Units in the left pane
of the Administration Console.

The configured storage units are displayed in the right pane of the
Administration Console.

6 Click the entry for the staging_stu_lnxmedia storage unit, to highlight

the entry for the storage unit.

7 Select Actions > Manual Relocation to Final Destination.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

A NetBackup dialog box is displayed.

8 Click OK to acknowledge the message in the dialog box.

9 Access the Activity Monitor to view the results of the manual relocation
operation.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

410
B–190 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Two jobs are added to the Activity Monitor as a result of the manual
relocation operation (it may take a few moments for the entry for the second
job to appear):
– Backup job - Job Policy: _DSSU_POLICY_staging_stu_lnxmedia
– Duplication job

10 Right-click the Job ID for the Duplication job and select Details. (or select
Actions > Details).

11 View the File List pane located on the Job Overview tab for the Duplication
job. Record the names of the backup images that are displayed in the File List
pane.

Backup ID Example: winclient.example.com_133240979

Backup ID #1:
Backup ID #2:

12 Compare the CTIME timestamps included in the Backup IDs you recorded in B
the previous step with the CTIME timestamps you recorded from the /
staging directory of the media server (a few pages previous to this).

Note: The Backup IDs identified in the previous two steps are the backup images
that were relocated. Relocation means that the images have been copied to
the specified destination storage unit (in this case, written to tapes in the
server_tapes pool, using the tape_stu_lnxmedia storage unit).

13 Close the Job Details window for the Duplication job.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

14 Select Media and Device Management > Media in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

The Media IDs are displayed in the right pane of the Administration Console.

15 Click the Refresh icon on the tool bar (or F5, or Actions > Refresh) to refresh
the display of the media information.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

411 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–191
 16 Record the Media IDs of all tapes that are assigned.

Assigned Media ID: Volume Pool:

Note: There should be at least two tapes that are assigned now, that were not
assigned when you recorded the Media IDs of assigned tapes a few minutes
ago. In this scenario, the tapes used in the relocation of images are
members of the server_tapes volume pool.

17 Access the console of the media server system, lnxmedia.example.com.

lnxmedia

18 Access the Terminal window that is open on the media server system. This
window was left open from a previous step in this exercise.

19 View the available disk space on the disk volume that is being used as the disk
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

staging volume (/staging).

df -h /staging

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

412
B–192 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 20 Record the Size and Available space on the /staging volume.

Total Size: 1.8 GBytes

Available: - After backup #1: 1.1 GBytes
Available: - After backup #2: 522 MBytes
Available: After manual relocation 522 MBytes

Note: The client data being backed up during each backup using the
staging_backup policy is about 600 MBytes in size.

21 Do you think the next backup of the client using the staging_backup
policy will be successful?

Answer:
Yes. Because backup images on the /staging disk volume have been
relocated, when additional space is needed to write the next backup
image, the relocated images will be purged to make space available.
B

22 Has the Available space on the /staging disk volume changed as a result of
the manual relocation of the backup images?

Answer:
No. The amount of free space on the staging disk volume /staging did
not changed after the backup images were relocated. NetBackup
maintains the backup images on the disk volume until the High Water
Mark of the storage unit is reached. Then, it purges any images that have
been relocated until it reaches the low water mark. The purging of the
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

relocated images makes room for new backup images to be written.

23 Allow the Terminal window to remain open on the media server system. You
return to this window later in this exercise.

24 Access the console of the master server system,

lnxmaster.example.com.
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
413 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–193
 lnxmaster

25 Select NetBackup Management > Policies in the right pane of the

Administration Console.

26 Initiate a third manual backup using the staging_backup policy.

Solution

a Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server

system.

b Click NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the

Administration Console.

The list of currently configured policies is displayed in the right pane of the
Administration Console.

c Right-click the staging_backup policy and, in the menu, click

Manual Backup.

The Manual Backup window is displayed.

d Click OK in the Manual Backup window to initiate the backup operation.

End of Solution

27 Use the Activity Monitor to monitor the progress of the backup job that is
created as a result of the manual backup operation.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

28 Verify that the job runs successfully before continuing to the next step. If the
job fails, record the status code and notify your instructor.

29 Access the console of the media server system, lnxmedia.example.com.

lnxmedia

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

414
B–194 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 30 Access the Terminal window that is open on the media server system. This
window was left open from a previous step in this exercise.

31 View the available disk space on the disk volume that is being used as the disk
staging volume (/staging).

df -h /staging

32 Record the Size and Available space on the /staging volume.

Total Size: 1.8 GBytes

Available: - After backup #1: 1.1 GBytes
Available: - After backup #2: 522 MBytes
Available: After manual relocation: 522 MBytes
Available: - After backup #3: 1.1 GBytes

Note: Backup job #3 was successful because as the disk staging volume reached
its configured high water mark, backup images on the volume were B
automatically purged to make room for the new backup image data.

33 Close the Terminal window on the media server system,

lnxmedia.example.com.

34 Access the console of the master server system,

lnxmaster.example.com.

End of lab
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

415 Lab 3: Managing and Optimizing Disk Storage Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–195
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

416
B–196 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups
In this lab, you perform tasks to reinforce the concepts presented in the lesson,
including:
• Optimizing client backup performance using multiple data streams
• Optimizing tape drive performance using multiplexing
• Optimizing backups using synthetic backups B

Two parallel versions of the labs enable you to choose the level of detail that suits
your experience:
• Appendix A provides high level step-by-step lab instructions.
• Appendix B provides complete detailed step-by-step lab instructions and
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

solutions.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

417 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–197
 Exercise 1: Optimizing client backups using multiple data streams

In this exercise, you configure NetBackup to perform backups of a client using

multiple data streams, and perform backup jobs to view the impact that using
multiple data streams can have on client backup performance.

Note: It should not be presumed that the use of multiple data streams when
performing client backups will always result in improved backup
performance. Planning of the policy contents based upon the disk layout on
the client system, and testing of the use of multiple data streams for
performing client backups is advised.

1 Access the console of the client system, winclient.example.com.

winclient

2 Log on to the client system, using the student user ID.

Note: You may be logged on to the client system from a previous lab activity.

3 Right-click the Computer icon on the desktop of the client system, and select
Open.

A Computer window is opened, displaying the drives that are configured on

the client system.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

4 Record the Drive Names and Total size of the disks that are present on the
client, winclient.example com.

Drive Name (letter) Total Size

C: 39.8 GB
DATA (G:) 4.99 GB

5 Close the Computer window.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

418
B–198 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 6 Access the console of the master server system.

lnxmaster

7 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server.

Note: The NetBackup Administration Console may be open from a previous

lab activity.

8 Select NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the

Administration Console.

9 Copy the winclient_test_advdisk1_master policy to create a new

policy: Make the changes to the new policy as described:

– The new policy name is: winclient_test_multistream

– Change the Policy storage attribute of the new policy to write backup
images using the advdisk1_stu_winserver storage unit.
– Change the policy attribute to select Allow multiple data streams
– Change the Backup Selections of the new policy to remove the current
B
entries, and add the ALL_LOCAL DRIVES backup directive from the
Windows 2008 Directive set.
Solution

a Click the entry for the winclient_test_advdisk1_master policy

in the left pane of the Administration Console.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

b Click Edit > Copy to New.

The Copy a Policy dialog box is displayed.

c Type the name of the new policy in the New policy name field:
winclient_test_multistream

d Click OK in the Copy a Policy dialog box.

The Change Policy - winclient_test_multistream window is

opened.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

419 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–199
 e On the Attributes tab, click the arrow for the Policy storage field, and
click the advdisk1_stu_winserver storage unit entry.

f On the Attributes tab, click the check box for Allow multiple data
streams, to select that feature.

g Click the Backup Selections tab.

h Delete all current entries in Backup Selections, then add a new entry that
uses the ALL_LOCAL_DRIVES directive, from the Windows2008
Directive set.

i Click OK to save the Add Backup Selection window that is opened to

enable you to enter the ALL_LOCAL_DRIVES directive.

j Verify that the ALL_LOCAL_DRIVES entry has been added to the

Backup Selections of the policy.

k Click OK to save the change to the policy.

The winclient_test_multistream policy is closed.

End of Solution

Note: When the ALL_LOCAL_DRIVES directive is used in the Backup

Selections of a policy, NetBackup backs up all local drives except for
drives that use removable media. This directive also includes critical
system-related components. The ALL_LOCAL_DRIVES directive does
not automatically result in the use of multiple data streams during client
backups.

10 Given the number of disk drives that are configured on the

winclient.example.com client, how many backup streams should be
used to back up the client?
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Number of data streams (jobs): two

Note: The number of jobs (data streams) used to back up the client data is
determined based upon the entries in the policy’s Backup Selections.

To optimize the backup of the clients using a policy that implements the use of
multiple data streams, there are other configuration considerations.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

420
B–200 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Just because multiple jobs are generated for a client during backup operations
does not mean that the jobs will run concurrently.
Specific configuration steps must be taken:
– Set the Maximum jobs per client Global Attribute to a value equal to the
number of concurrent jobs the client is allowed to run. (NetBackup
Management > Host Properties > Master Server Properties > Global
Attributes)
– Set the Maximum concurrent jobs setting of the destination storage unit
to a value that enables the client jobs to run concurrently.

11 Change the Maximum jobs per client Global Attribute to allow up to three (3)
concurrent backup jobs to run for NetBackup client systems.

Solution

a Select NetBackup Management > Host Properties > Master Servers in

the left pane of the NetBackup Administration Console.

The entry for the master server is displayed in the right pane.

b Click the entry for the master server (lnxmaster.example.com), to

highlight the entry.

c Click Actions > Properties.

The Master Server Properties window is displayed. B

d Click Global Attributes in the left pane of the Master Server Properties
window.

The Global Attributes screen is displayed.

e Set the Maximum jobs per client setting to a value of 3.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

f Click OK to save the Host Properties parameter change.

A Restart Daemons dialog box is displayed.

g Click OK to acknowledge the message.

The Master Server Properties window is closed.

End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

421 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–201
 Note: The Restart Daemons dialog box indicates that a restart of the NetBackup
daemons is required for certain Host Properties changes to become
effective. Changing the Maximum jobs per client setting does not require
a restart of the NetBackup daemons.

12 Change the Maximum concurrent jobs setting of the destination storage unit
(advdisk1_stu_winserver) to a value of three (3).

Solution

a Select NetBackup Management > Storage > Storage Units in the left
pane of the NetBackup Administration Console.

The configured storage units are displayed in the right pane of the
Administration Console.

b Right-click the entry for the advdisk1_stu_winserver storage unit

and, in the menu, click Change.

The Change Storage Unit window is displayed.

c Change the Maximum concurrent jobs setting to a value of three (3).

d Click OK to save the change to the storage unit parameter settings.

End of Solution

13 Perform a manual backup of winclient.example.com, using the Full

schedule of the winclient_test_multistream policy.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Solution

a Click the entry for the winclient_test_multistream policy.

b Select Actions > Manual Backup.

The Manual Backup dialog box is displayed.

c Click OK in the Manual Backup dialog box.

End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

422
B–202 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 14 Click the Activity Monitor entry in the left pane of the NetBackup
Administration Console.

15 How many backup jobs are generated as a result of the manual backup request?

Number of backup jobs: four (4)

16 How many of the jobs are Active at the same time?

Number of concurrently active jobs: four (4).

Note: The first (lowest-numbered) job is a parent job. That job is the parent of
three additional jobs. The parent job is not counted against the number of
jobs that can run concurrently for the client.

Note: Because the ALL_LOCAL_DRIVES backup directive backs up the entire

client system, the jobs take longer to complete than other backup jobs you
have run during the course. The estimated completion time is 10 minutes.

17 Monitor the progress of the jobs. You may continue with the lab steps while the
backup jobs continue to run. Verify that all the job run to successful completion
(status 0). If any of the jobs fail, record the status code, and notify your B
instructor.

18 View the Job Details for each of the backup jobs. Record your observations.

Observations:
Your observations may vary. The first job is the parent job. An entry in
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

the Detailed Status indicates that this job determines the number of
streams (jobs) that is used to backup the client. It is clear from the Files
list information, that the second job backed up Shadow Copy
Components, the third job backed up the C:\ drive, and the fourth job
backed up the G:\ drive. The total time for the backup jobs was about 11
minutes.

19 Close any open Job Details windows.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

423 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–203
 Exercise 2: Optimizing tape drive performance using multiplexing

In this exercise, you configure NetBackup to perform multiplexed backups to a

media manager (tape-based) storage unit.

Note: Multiplexed backups can provide a significant performance benefit for

backups that are written to tape storage when the performance
characteristics of the tape hardware (tape drives) are significantly faster
than the speed at which the data from a single client stream can be read and
delivered to the tape drive. When using multiplexing, NetBackup
interleaves the backup images from multiple clients onto the tape, thereby
allowing the tape drive to operate at optimum efficiency. Testing is
required to determine the number of multiplexed backup images that are
required to optimize the performance of your tape hardware.

lnxmaster

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server system.

2 Select NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the

Administration Console.

3 Create a policy to perform multiplexed backups. To create the new policy, copy
the lnxclient_test_bdisk_media to create a new policy.

The name of the new policy is linux_test_MPX.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Solution

a Click the entry for the lnxclient_test_bdisk_media policy in the

left pane of the Administration Console.

b Click Edit > Copy to New.

The Copy a Policy dialog box is displayed.

c Type the name of the new policy in the New policy field:
linux_test_MPX

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

424
B–204 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 d Click OK in the Copy a Policy dialog box.

The Change Policy - linux_test_MPX window is opened.

End of Solution

4 Modify the new policy to make the changes described in the table:

Attributes:
Policy storage: tape_stu_lnxmedia
Policy volume pool: server_tapes
All other policy Attributes: use the default settings
Schedules:
Full: Media multiplexing = 3
Differential-Inc Media multiplexing = 3
Clients: lnxclient.example.com
lnxmaster.example.com
lnxmedia.example.com
All clients are:
Hardware: Linux
Operating System: RedHat 2.6.18
Backup Selections: no changes
Table 1: winclient_test_MPX policy changes B

Solution

a On the Attributes tab, click the arrow for the Policy storage field, and
click the tape_stu_lnxmedia storage unit entry.

b On the Attributes tab, click the arrow for the Policy volume pool field,
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

and click the server_tapes volume pool entry.

c Allow all other policy Attributes to remain at their default settings.

d Click the Schedules tab.

e Modify the Full and Differential-Inc schedules (one at a time) to change

the Media multiplexing parameter to 3.

f Click the Clients tab.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

425 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–205
 g Add entries to backup the lnxmaster.example.com and
lnxmedia.example.com. Each of these clients has the Hardware
and operating system settings: Linux, RedHat2.6.18 client.

h After adding the client entries, verify that the entries for the three clients
are displayed in the Clients tab of the policy.

i Do not change the Backup Selections for the policy.

j Click OK to save the change to the policy.

The linux_test_MPX policy is closed.

End of Solution

5 Verify that the linux_test_MPX policy is added to the list of policies

displayed in the right pane of the Administration Console.

6 Perform a manual backup using the Full schedule of the linux_test_MPX

policy, to back up the three clients listed in the policy’s Client list.

Solution

a Click the entry for the linux_test_MPX policy.

b Select Actions > Manual Backup.

The Manual Backup dialog box is displayed.

c Select the entry for the Full schedule.

d Do not select the entries for the clients.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Note: By default, all clients listed in the policy are backed up.

e Click OK in the Manual Backup dialog box.

End of Solution

7 Select Activity Monitor in the left pane of the Administration Console.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

426
B–206 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 8 How many jobs are initiated as a result of the most recent manual backup
request?

Answer: three (3) jobs

9 How many of the jobs run concurrently? Record your observations.

Answer: Two of the jobs are active concurrently. The other

jobs is Queued. A message is displayed in the State
Details for the third job: Drives are in use in
storage unit (lnxmedia.example.com). When one
of the first two jobs completes, the third job goes
Active.

10 Verify that all three backup jobs run to successful completion. If any of the jobs
fail, record the status code, and notify your instructor.

11 View the Job Details of the first (lowest-numbered) job. View the Status pane
on the Detailed Status tab. Record the Media ID and file number to which
the backup image created by this job were written.

Media ID File number

12 View the Job Details of the second job. View the Status pane on the Detailed
Status tab. Record the Media ID and file number to which the backup image
created by this job were written.

Media ID File number

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

13 View the Job Details of the third job. View the Status pane on the Detailed
Status tab. Record the Media ID and file number to which the backup image
created by this job were written.

Media ID File number

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

427 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–207
 The previous three jobs were not multiplexed onto the same tape. The first
two jobs were active concurrently because the storage unit has two tape
drives. The first job used a tape mounted in one tape drive, and the second
job used another tape mounted in the second tape drive. When the first of
the two backup jobs finished, the third job was written to the same tape as
the backup job that had just completed.

Note: Additional configuration is required to enable NetBackup to perform

multiplexed backups. Specifically, the media manager (tape) storage unit
must be configured to Enable Multiplexing.

14 Modify the configuration of the tape_stu_lnxmedia storage unit to

Enable Multiplexing, and to set the Maximum streams per drive parameter to
a value of three (3) streams.

Solution

a Select NetBackup Management > Storage > Storage Units in the left
pane of the NetBackup Administration Console.

The configured storage units are displayed in the right pane of the
Administration Console.

b Right-click the entry for the tape_stu_lnxmedia storage unit and, in

the menu, click Change.

The Change Storage Unit window is displayed.

c Click the box for the Enable multiplexing parameter, to mark the check
box.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

d Change the Maximum streams per drive setting to a value of three (3).

e Click OK to save the change to the storage unit parameter settings.

End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

428
B–208 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 15 Perform a manual backup using the Full schedule of the linux_test_MPX
policy, to back up the three clients listed in the policy’s Client list.

Solution

a Click the entry for the linux_test_MPX policy.

b Select Actions > Manual Backup.

The Manual Backup dialog box is displayed.

c Select the entry for the Full schedule.

d Do not select the entries for the clients. By default, all clients listed in the
policy are backed up.

e Click OK in the Manual Backup dialog box.

End of Solution

16 Select Activity Monitor in the left pane of the Administration Console.

17 How many jobs are initiated as a result of the most recent manual backup
request?
B
Answer: three (3) jobs

18 How many of the jobs run concurrently? Record your observations.

Answer: All three of the jobs are active concurrently.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

19 Verify that all three backup jobs run to successful completion. If any of the jobs
fail, record the status code, and notify your instructor.

20 View the Job Details of the first (lowest-numbered) job. View the Status pane
on the Detailed Status tab. Record the Media ID and file number to which
the backup image created by this job were written.

Media ID File number

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

429 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–209
 21 View the Job Details of the second job. View the Status pane on the Detailed
Status tab. Record the Media ID and file number to which the backup image
created by this job were written.

Media ID File number

22 View the Job Details of the third job. View the Status pane on the Detailed
Status tab. Record the Media ID and file number to which the backup image
created by this job were written.

Media ID File number

The three jobs were multiplexed onto the same tape. The Detailed Status
for the jobs shows that the backup images were not only written to the
same Media ID (tape), but also to the same file number on the tape. The
images were multiplexed on the tape.

23 Close any open Job Details windows.

24 Run the Tape Contents report against the Media ID that was used to write the
multiplexed backup. Use the Report Settings:

– Media Owner: lnxmedia.example.com

– Media ID: (media ID of tape used in most recent backup jobs)

Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

a Select NetBackup Management > Reports > Tape Reports > Tape
Contents in the left pane of the NetBackup Administration Console.

b Enter the Report Settings:

› Media Owner: lnxmedia.example.com

› Media ID: (media ID of tape used in most recent backup jobs)

c Click Run Report.

d The Tape Contents Report dialog box is displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

430
B–210 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 e Click OK to run the report.

End of Solution

The report results are displayed on the bottom portion of the Reports interface.

25 Locate the entries for the File Number that you obtained from the Job Details
of the most recent backup jobs (you recorded these file numbers on a previous
page of this exercise). Note that there are three Backup IDs that have the same
File Number:

– An entry for a Backup ID for lnxclient.example.com

– An entry for a Backup ID for lnxmaster.example.com
– An entry for a Backup ID for lnxmedia.example.com

The report output confirms that the backup images were multiplexed on the
tape.

Note: The Tape Contents report reads the actual backup headers from the tape to
generate its output.

B
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

431 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–211
 Exercise 3: Optimizing backups using synthetic backups

In this exercise, you configure a policy and its associated schedules that enable the
creation of synthetic backup images.
A synthetic backup image is created by NetBackup by combining the contents of a
full backup image and of multiple incremental backup images to form a new
backup image of the client data. The policy used to create a synthetic backup must
have the Checkpoint Restart and True Image Restore features enabled.
To prepare for performing synthetic backups in this exercise, you:
• Configure a synthetic_tapes volume pool to house synthetic backup
images
• Configure a policy that includes full, differential incremental, and synthetic
full schedules.

Configuring a volume pool to house synthetic backup images

Although it is not a requirement, in the following steps you configure a new
volume pool to house synthetic backup images.

lnxmaster

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server system.

2 Select Media and Device Management > Media > Volume Pools in the left
pane of the Administration Console.

The volume pools that exist in the NetBackup environment are displayed in the
right pane of the Administration Console.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

3 Create a new volume pool that has the following characteristics:

Pool name: synthetic_tapes

Description: For synthetic backups
Maximum number of partially full media: 0 (default)
Catalog Backup: not selected (default)
Solution

a Select Actions > New > Volume Pool.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
432
B–212 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 The Add a New Volume Pool window is displayed.

b Enter the parameters for the new pool, as provided in the step instructions.

c Click OK to save the volume pool settings.

The Add a New Volume Pool window is closed.

End of Solution

4 Verify that the new volume pool is added to the list of volume pools displayed
in the right pane of the Administration Console.

Configuring a policy for synthetic backups

In the following steps you configure a policy and its associated schedules to enable
the creation of synthetic backup of the client data.
The policy that is used to perform synthetic backups is also used to perform
standard full and incremental backup. The full and incremental backup images are
used by NetBackup to create the synthetic backup images.
The policy must have the Collect true image restore information attribute enabled.
A key component of this policy is the schedule that has the Synthetic backup
parameter enabled.

5 Copy the winclient_test_tape_master policy to create a new policy B

named winclient_test_synthetics.

Solution

a Click the entry for the winclient_test_tape_master policy in the

left pane of the Administration Console.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

b Click Edit > Copy to New.

The Copy a Policy dialog box is displayed.

c Type the name of the new policy in the New policy name field:
winclient_test_synthetics

d Click OK in the Copy a Policy dialog box.

The Change Policy - winclient_test_synthetics window is

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

433 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–213
 opened.
End of Solution

6 Modify the new policy to make the changes described in the table:

Attributes:
Collect true image restore info: selected
with move detection: selected
All other policy attributes: no changes
Schedules:
Full: no changes
Differential-Inc: no changes
Full-synthetic: new schedule
Full-synthetic schedule:
Name: Full-synthetic
Type of backup: Full
Synthetic backup: selected
Frequency: 1 week (default)
Override policy storage selection: selected
Storage unit: tape_stu_lnxmaster
Override policy volume pool: selected
Volume pool: synthetic_tapes
Retention: 2 weeks (default)
All other schedule attributes: use default settings
Start Window: none - manual backups only
Clients: winclient.example.com
(no changes)
Backup Selections:
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

delete the entry for: G:\data\mixed

only remaining entry: G:\data\smallfiles
Table 2: winclient_test_synthetics policy settings

Note: Use the information provided in the table to modify the policy. Verify that
you have made all the changes called for in the table, including the
inclusion of the Full-synthetic schedule.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

434
B–214 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 7 After making the changes to the winclient_test_synthetics policy,
save the changes, and close the policy.

8 Verify that the winclient_test_synthetics policy is added to the list

of policies displayed in the right pane of the Administration Console.

Manually expiring all images on a tape

In the next step, you use the bpexpdate command provided by NetBackup to
manually expire all images on a tape, and return the tape to the scratch_tapes
pool.

Note: At this point in the course, you may be nearing the point where you do not
have unassigned tapes left in the robot to allow backup jobs to run
successfully. Perform the next steps to manually expire all backup images
that have been written to three tapes. This activity causes the tape to
become unassigned, and moved back to scratch pool.

CAUTION Always use the bpexpdate command carefully. Expiring all images
on a tape causes all images on the tape to be expired. When this
happens the tape is immediately available for reallocation by
NetBackup. After a tape has been reallocated, there is no
opportunity to import the contents of the tape to recover the expired B
data.

1 Select Media and Device Management > Media in the left pane of the
Administration Console.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

2 Click the Refresh icon, located on the tool bar of the Administration Console
(or use F5, or View > Refresh), to update the media information displayed in
the right pane.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

435 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–215
 3 Identify and record the Media IDs of three tapes that have an Active or Full
Media Status, and that are members of either the NetBackup or
server_tapes volume pools.

Media ID 1:
Media ID 2:
Media ID 3:
Table 3: Media IDs to be manually expired

4 Access a Terminal window on the master server system.

5 Type su - root, and press Enter, to become superuser.

6 Execute the bpexpdate command to expire the first media ID listed in the table.

bpexpdate -m mediaID -d 0

7 When you are prompted Are you sure that the data on this media is not
critical to your business..., type y, and press Enter.

The command prompt is returned immediately.

8 Execute the bpexpdate command to expire the second media ID listed in the
table.

bpexpdate -m mediaID -d 0

9 When you are prompted Are you sure that the data on this media is not
critical to your business..., type y, and press Enter.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

The command prompt is returned immediately.

10 Execute the bpexpdate command to expire the third media ID listed in the
table.

bpexpdate -m mediaID -d 0

11 When you are prompted Are you sure that the data on this media is not
critical to your business..., type y, and press Enter.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

436
B–216 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 The command prompt is returned immediately.

12 Select Media and Device Management > Media in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

13 Click the Refresh icon, located on the tool bar of the Administration Console
(or use F5, or View > Refresh), to update the media information displayed in
the right pane.

14 Verify that the three Media IDs that you expired have all been returned to the
scratch_tapes volume pool, and that the date/time stamp has been
removed from the Time Assigned column for the tapes.

The tapes are available for immediate reallocation, as required.

Running backups using the policy for synthetic backups

In the following steps, you run a full backup and two differential backups using the
policy that you configured for synthetic backups. Between the backup jobs you
make changes to the file system of the client.

1 Perform a manual backup of the client, winclient.example.com, using

the Full schedule of the winclient_test_synthetics policy.
B
Solution

a Click the entry for the winclient_test_synthetics policy.

b Select Actions > Manual Backup.

The Manual Backup dialog box is displayed.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

c Select the entry for the Full schedule.

d Click OK in the Manual Backup dialog box.

End of Solution

2 Select Activity Monitor in the left pane of the Administration Console.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

437 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–217
 3 View the entry for the most recent backup job. Verify that the backup runs to
successful completion (status 0).

If the job fails, record the status code and notify your instructor.

4 View the Job Details for the backup job. Record the number of files that
were backed up, the Media ID of the tape that was used to perform the
backup. Determine the volume pool of the Media ID used for the backup job.
(Check Media and Device Management > Media to determine the answer.)

Number of Files: Media ID Volume Pool

1001 server_tapes

Note: The backup job that you just performed is a standard Full backup. This
backup used a tape from the volume pool specified in the policy attributes.

5 Close the Job Details window for the job.

6 Access the console of the client system, winclient.example.com.

winclient

7 Right-click the Computer icon on the desktop of the client system, and select
Open.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

8 Right-click the entry for the G:\ drive, and select Open to access the contents
of the drive.

9 Right-click the entry for the G:\data folder, and select Open.

10 Right-click the entry for the G:\data\mixed folder, and select Open.

11 Right-click the entry for the Podcast_HHO_cyberbullying*.mp3 file

that is present in the folder, and click Copy, to copy the file.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

438
B–218 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 12 Navigate to the G:\data\smallfiles folder, right-click, and then click
Paste, to paste the file to the folder.

13 Verify that the Podcast_HHO_cyberbullying*.mp3 file has been

copied to the G:\data\smallfiles folder.

14 Delete the following files from the G:\data\smallfiles folder:

– file995.txt
– file996.txt
– file997.txt
– file998.txt
– file999.txt

15 Allow the Computer window to remain open on the client system. You return
to this Computer window in a few moments.

16 Access the console of the master server system.

lnxmaster
B

17 Perform a second manual backup of the client, winclient.example.com,

this time using the Differential-Inc schedule of the policy,
winclient_test_synthetics.

Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

a Click the entry for the winclient_test_synthetics policy.

b Select Actions > Manual Backup.

The Manual Backup dialog box is displayed.

c Select the entry for the Differential-Inc schedule.

d Click OK in the Manual Backup dialog box.

End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

439 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–219
 18 Select Activity Monitor in the left pane of the Administration Console.

19 View the entry for the most recent backup job. Verify that the backup runs to
successful completion (status 0).

If the job fails, record the status code and notify your instructor.

20 View the Job Details for the backup job. Record the number of files that were
backed up, the Media ID of the tape that was used to perform the backup.
Determine the volume pool of the Media ID used for the backup job. (Check
Media and Device Management > Media to determine the answer.)

Number of Files: Media ID Volume Pool

2 server_tapes

Note: The backup job that you just performed is a standard Differential backup.
This backup used a tape from the volume pool specified in the policy
attributes. As a differential backup, it only backed up files that changed.
The TIR feature of NetBackup contains a record of all the files that were
present in the directory at the time of t he backup regardless of whether or
not the files were backed up.

21 Close the Job Details window for the job.

22 Access the console of the client system, winclient.example.com.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

winclient

23 Access the Computer window on the client system. This window was left
open from an earlier step in this exercise.

24 Navigate to the G:\data\mixed folder.

25 Right-click the entry for the Symantec Technology Network

(STN)_files folder, and click Copy, to copy the folder.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

440
B–220 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 26 Navigate to the G:\data\smallfiles folder, and paste Symantec
Technology Network (STN)_files folder to the smallfiles
folder.

27 Verify that the Symantec Technology Network (STN)_files

folder and its contents have been copied to the G:\data\smallfiles
folder. (21 files were copied.)

28 Delete the following files from the G:\data\smallfiles folder:

– file990.txt
– file991.txt
– file992.txt
– file993.txt
– file994.txt

29 Allow the Computer window to remain open on the client system. You return
to this Computer window in a few moments.

30 Access the console of the master server system.

B
lnxmaster

31 Perform another manual backup of the client, winclient.example.com,

using the Differential-Inc schedule of the policy,
winclient_test_synthetics.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Solution

a Click the entry for the winclient_test_synthetics policy.

b Select Actions > Manual Backup.

The Manual Backup dialog box is displayed.

c Select the entry for the Differential-Inc schedule.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

441 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–221
 d Click OK in the Manual Backup dialog box.

End of Solution

32 Select Activity Monitor in the left pane of the Administration Console.

33 View the entry for the most recent backup job. Verify that the backup runs to
successful completion (status 0).

If the job fails, record the status code and notify your instructor.

34 View the Job Details for the backup job. Record the number of files that were
backed up, the Media ID of the tape that was used to perform the backup.
Determine the volume pool of the Media ID used for the backup job. (Check
Media and Device Management > Media to determine the answer.)

Number of Files: Media ID Volume Pool

24 server_tapes

Note: In the last several steps you have performed a full backup, and two
differential backups of the client. Between backups new files have been
added to the file system of the client (that is being backed up), and a
number of files have been deleted.

35 Close the Job Details window for the job.

Performing a synthetic backup

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

In the following steps, you initiate a synthetic backup of the client, and monitor the
results of that synthetic backup job.

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server.

2 Select NetBackup Management > Policies in the left pane of the

Administration Console.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

442
B–222 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 3 Perform a synthetic backup of the client, winclient.example.com,
using the Full-synthetic schedule of the policy,
winclient_test_synthetics.

Solution

a Click the entry for the winclient_test_synthetics policy.

b Select Actions > Manual Backup.

The Manual Backup dialog box is displayed.

c Select the entry for the Full-synthetic schedule.

d Click OK in the Manual Backup dialog box.

End of Solution

4 Select Activity Monitor in the left pane of the Administration Console.

5 View the entry for the most recent backup job. Verify that the backup runs to
successful completion (status 0).

If the job fails, record the status code and notify your instructor.
B

6 Look carefully at the Job Details for the backup job. Record the information in
the space provided:

Job Policy; winclient_test_synthetic

Job Schedule Full-synthetic
Data Movement: Synthetic
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Media ID (for read):

Media ID (for write):
Current files written: 0

Note: The Job Details of the job (Status pane of the Detailed Status tab)
indicate that two tapes and two tape drives were used to perform the
synthetic backup job. The first tape was the tape to which the full and
differential incremental backup images had been written. That tape was
mounted on a drive for reading. The second tape was a new tape, assigned

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

443 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–223
 for the purpose of writing the synthetic backup image. That tape was
mounted on a second tape drive. The Current Files written field on the
Detailed Status tab shows a value of zero (0), indicating that no client files
were written during the synthetic backup. The client system was not
involved in the synthetic backup image creation.

7 Close the Job Details window for the job.

Performing a TIR restore from a synthetic backup image

In the following steps, you perform a True Image Restore (TIR) restore using the
synthetic backup image created in the previous steps of this exercise. You restore
the client data to an alternate directory location on the client system.

lnxmaster

1 Click the Backup, Archive, and Restore object, located in the left pane of the
NetBackup Administration Console.

2 Click the Restore Files tab on the BAR GUI.

3 In the BAR GUI, select Actions > Specify NetBackup Machines and Policy
Type.

4 Make the following selections in the Specify NetBackup Machines and

Policy Type window.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

– Server to use for backups and restores: lnxmaster.example.com

– Source client for restores: winclient.example.com
– Destination client for restores: winclient.example.com
– Policy type for restores: MS-Windows

5 Click OK to save the changes to the Specify NetBackup Machines and

Policy Type window settings.

6 In the Restore Type drop-down menu, click True Image Backups.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

444
B–224 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 7 Click the Use Backup History to set date range icon.

8 In the Backup History window, locate and click the entry for the most recent
Full Backup image that used the winclient_test_synthetics policy.

9 Click OK to close the Backup History window.

NetBackup searches its image catalog and locates the backup image or images
that meet the criteria specified. The results of the search are displayed in the
Directory Structure pane of the BAR GUI.

10 Click to expand the entry for winclient.example.com that is displayed

in the Directory Structure pane.

The contents of the backup image are displayed in the Contents of the
selected directory pane of the BAR GUI.

11 Click the symbol to the left of the G drive entry in the Directory Structure
pane, to expand the entry.

12 Click the symbol to the left of the data folder entry in the Directory
Structures pane, to expand the folder.

B
13 Click the smallfiles folder entry in the Directory Structure pane, to
expand the folder.

14 In the Contents of the selected directory pane, mark the check boxes to the
left of the unnamed folder and the folder for Symantec Technology Network
(STN).
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

15 Click the Preview button.

The Media Required window is displayed.

16 Record the Media ID that is required to perform the restore. Is this is the media
ID to which the synthetic backup image was written?

Media ID required: Same Media ID as for synthetic backup job

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

445 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–225
 17 Click OK to close the Media Required window.

18 Click the Restore button.

The Restore Marked Files window is displayed.

19 Click the Restore everything to a different location (maintaining existing

structure) radio button.

20 Type G:\TIR-restore in the Destination field, located directly below the radio
button.

21 Allow all other Restore Marked Files window parameters to remain at their
default settings.

22 Click Start Restore on the Restore Marked Files window.

Within moments a View Progress window is displayed, with the Do you want
to view the progress of the restore? message.

23 Click Yes, in the View Progress window.

The Task Progress tab of the BAR GUI is selected.

24 View the progress of the restore in the Task Progress tab.

25 Verify that the restore job runs to successful completion. Take note of the
messages displayed in the Progress pane of the Task Progress tab.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Note: You can also use the Activity Monitor to view the restore job.

26 If the restore operation fails, notify your instructor.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

446
B–226 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Verifying the restore of files on the client system
In the final steps of this exercise, you view the files restored to the alternate
directory location (G:\TIR-restore) on the client system,
winclient.example.com, to verify that the files and directories of the client
were restored.

1 Access the console of the client system, winclient.example.com.

winclient

2 Access the Computer window on the client. The Computer window is open
from a previous step in this exercise.

3 Navigate to G:\ in the Computer window.

4 Verify that the folder TIR-restore is present on the G:\ drive.

The G:\TIR-restore folder was created by the most recent restore

operation.

5 Right-click the G:\TIR-restore folder, and select Open.

B

6 Note the files (992 files) and the single folder (with its contents) that are
present in the smallfiles folder. The 10 files you deleted prior to the two
incremental backup jobs were not restored.

7 Close the Computer window on the client system.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

8 Access the console of the master server system.

End of lab

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

447 Lab 4: Optimizing File System Backups Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–227
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

448
B–228 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Lab 6: Working with Support
In this lab, you perform tasks to reinforce the concepts presented in the lesson,
including:
• Viewing, stopping, and starting NetBackup services and processes
• Running reports that provide troubleshooting information
• Viewing and setting debug log verbosity
• Enabling NetBackup legacy debug logging
• Using nbsu and nbcplogs to gather troubleshooting information and debug
log files

Two parallel versions of the labs enable you to choose the level of detail that suits
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

your experience:
• Appendix A provides high level step-by-step lab instructions.
• Appendix B provides complete detailed step-by-step lab instructions and
solutions.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

449 Lab 6: Working with Support Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–229
 Exercise 1: Viewing, stopping, and starting NetBackup services

When managing NetBackup or troubleshooting NetBackup-related issues you may

be required to view, stop, and restart NetBackup-related services, daemons, and
processes. NetBackup and the operating system of the systems on which
NetBackup is running each provides methods for performing these tasks. In this
lab exercise, you use three primary methods to view the running NetBackup and
NetBackup-related processes:
• Using the Activity monitor
• Using operating system-provided utilities
• Using NetBackup-provided command line interfaces

Using the Activity Monitor to view NetBackup services and processes

In the following steps, you use the Activity Monitor to view the running
NetBackup services and processes.

1 Access the console of the master server system.

lnxmaster

2 Log on to the lnxmaster system as student.

Note: You may be logged in to the master server from a previous lab activity. If
you are, you can continue to use that login session.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Note: The NetBackup Administration Console may be open from a previous

lab activity. If it is, you can skip to the first step after the logon steps.

3 Right-click the Terminal icon on the desktop of the master server, and select
Open to open a terminal window.

4 Type jnbSA& at the command prompt, and press Enter.

The NetBackup Administration Console login window is displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
450
B–230 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 5 Login to the NetBackup Administration Console using the student User
name (password = training).

6 The NetBackup Administration Console window is displayed.

7 Select the entry for the Activity Monitor, located in the left pane of the
Administration Console.

The Activity Monitor is displayed in the right pane of the Administration

Console.

8 Note the three tabs located at the bottom of the Activity Monitor display:

– Jobs (this tab is selected by default)

– Daemons
– Processes

9 Click the Daemons tab.

10 Note the following about the services that are listed:

– Daemons that are listed include daemons that are running and daemons that
are stopped.
– Daemons are listed for the master server (the local system) only.

Note: It is normal, and even expected, that some daemons are not running. Some
daemons run only on a NetBackup server, based upon the role of the server
(master server, media server, client). Certain daemons are running only if a
certain feature or option of NetBackup is configured or enabled. B
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

11 Locate the entry for the bprd daemon.

Note that the bprd daemon has a Status of Running.

Note: The bprd daemon runs only on the master server system.

12 Right-click the entry for the bprd daemon for the master server.

The menu of available actions is displayed.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
451 Lab 6: Working with Support Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–231
 13 Click Details in the menu, to view the details of the selected daemon.

The Daemon Details: bprd window is displayed.

CAUTION You should not stop NetBackup daemons while backup or

restore operations are in progress.

14 Note the information about the daemon that is provided in the Daemon Details
window, and that you can stop the daemon, using the Stop button provided.

Note: Do not stop NetBackup services at this time.

15 Click Close, to close the Daemon Details window.

16 Click the Processes tab, located at the bottom of the Activity Monitor pane.

17 Note the long list of NetBackup processes. The running processes are listed,
including the PID (process ID) that is associated with each process.

Note: You cannot stop or start NetBackup processes using the Activity Monitor
interface.

18 Close the NetBackup Administration Console window (File > Exit).

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Viewing NetBackup processes using operating system utilities

In the following steps, you use utilities provided by the operating system of the
system that NetBackup is running on, to view the NetBackup services that are
running on the system.

1 Access the desktop of the master server system.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

452
B–232 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 lnxmaster

2 In a terminal window, type su - root and press Enter, to become

superuser.

3 Use the ps command, provided by the Linux operating system to view the
processes running on the system.

ps -ef |more

4 Use the spacebar to advance the display of the processes, looking for processes
that are related to NetBackup.

Note: It can be difficult to determine all of the processes that are specifically
related to NetBackup when viewing the process list using the operating
system-provided commands. The use of NetBackup-provided commands
provides a much more convenient method of viewing NetBackup-related
daemons and processes.

5 Continue to press the spacebar until the command prompt is returned.

6 Allow the Terminal window to remain open on the master server. You use this
Terminal window to perform the next steps in the exercise.

Managing NetBackup services from the command line

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

In the following steps, you use command line interfaces provided with NetBackup
to view, stop, and start the NetBackup services.
NetBackup provides command line interfaces to view, stop, and start its services.
The interfaces provided vary slightly, depending upon the operating system that is
running on the NetBackup system, and the role of the system (master server, media
server, or client).
On Windows-based NetBackup servers and clients the key command line
interfaces are:
• bpps - used to view the running NetBackup services and processes
• bpup - used to stop all running NetBackup services and processes
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
453 Lab 6: Working with Support Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–233
 • bpdown - used to start all NetBackup services and processes
On UNIX/Linux-based NetBackup servers and clients the key command line
interfaces are:
• bpps - used to view the running NetBackup services and processes
• netbackup stop- used to stop all running NetBackup daemons and
processes
• netbackup start - used to start all NetBackup services and processes

CAUTION Use caution when stopping NetBackup services. Do not stop the
NetBackup services unless you are fully aware of the implications
this action will have on production backup and restore operations.

Note: A Terminal window may be open, and logged in as superuser, from a

previous lab activity. If it is, you can skip the next step.

1 Open a Terminal window on the master server, type su - root and press
Enter, to become superuser.

Viewing the running NetBackup services and processes

In the following steps, you use the bpps command to view the running
NetBackup services and processes.

Note: The steps described below can be used on any NetBackup master server,
media server, or client system, to view running NetBackup services and
processes.

2 Type the command, and press Enter.

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

bpps -a |more

The bpps command displays the list of running NetBackup services and
processes on an operational NetBackup server system.
The list of services displayed by the command varies substantially between
master server, media server, and client systems.

3 Press the space bar to scroll through the command output until the command
prompt is returned.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

454
B–234 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Stopping the running NetBackup services and processes
In the following steps, you use the NetBackup command line interfaces to stop all
running NetBackup services and processes on the master server system.

Note: The steps described below can be used on any UNIX or Linux-based
NetBackup master server or media server to stop all NetBackup services
and processes - - with the exception of the NetBackup Administration
Console and the Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI.

CAUTION Use caution when stopping NetBackup services. Do not stop the
NetBackup services unless you are fully aware of the implications
this action will have on production backup and restore operations.

1 Access the Terminal window on the master server system.

2 Type the command: netbackup stop, and press Enter, to stop all
NetBackup services and processes on the master server system.

Within a few moments, the shutdown of the NetBackup daemons and

processes completes, and you are returned to the command prompt.

3 Verify that the NetBackup daemons and processes have been stopped, by
executing the bpps -a command.

Solution

a Type bpps -a, and press Enter.

B

The running NetBackup daemons and processes are displayed in the

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

command output. No processes (or possibly just the bpps process) should
be running. If a NetBackup Administration Console is open on the system,
processes related to the are running. These processes were not terminated
by the execution of the netbackup stop command.

b You are returned to the command prompt.

End of Solution

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

455 Lab 6: Working with Support Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–235
 Starting the NetBackup services and processes
In the following steps, you use the NetBackup command line interfaces to start the
NetBackup services and processes on the master server system.

Note: The steps described below can be used on any UNIX or Linux-based
NetBackup master server or media server to start all NetBackup services
and processes - with the exception of the NetBackup Administration
Console and the Backup, Archive, and Restore GUI.

1 Access the Terminal window on the master server system.

2 Type the command: netbackup start, and press Enter, to start all
NetBackup services and processes on the master server system.

Within a few moments, the shutdown of the NetBackup daemons and

processes completes, and you are returned to the command prompt.

3 Verify that the NetBackup daemons and processes have been started, by
executing the bpps -a command.

Solution

a Type bpps -a, and press Enter.

The running NetBackup daemons and processes are displayed in the

command output. All NetBackup daemons and processes should be
running.

b You are returned to the command prompt.

End of Solution
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

456
B–236 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Exercise 2: Running NetBackup reports for troubleshooting

In this exercise, you review the NetBackup reports that often provide useful
information for troubleshooting NetBackup-related problems. These reports
include the:
• Status of Backups report
• Client Backups report
• Problems report
• All log entries
• Media Logs report

Note: You ran many of these reports in an earlier lab activity in this course.

1 Access the NetBackup Administration Console on the master server system.

2 Select NetBackup Management > Reports in the left pane of the

Administration Console.

3 Click the symbol to the left of the Reports object, to expand Reports.

The reports are listed below the expanded Reports object:

– Status of Backups report
– Client Backups report
– Problems report
– All log entries
B
– Media Logs report
– Tape Reports (report category)
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

– Disk Reports (report category)

– Vault Reports (report category)

4 Select and run any of the reports to review the information provided by the
report.

Note: You can run any of the reports listed above using the default Report
Settings, to view a sample of the report output.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

457 Lab 6: Working with Support Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–237
 5 When you have run the reports and are satisfied with your understanding of the
report output contents, proceed to the next exercise.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

458
B–238 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Exercise 3: Viewing and setting NetBackup log verbosities

In this exercise, you view the configuration parameters used to change the log
verbosity of NetBackup log files.
NetBackup debug logs provide important information to support personnel when
troubleshooting NetBackup and NetBackup-related problems. The level of detail
provided in the logs can be adjusted by setting the log verbosity.
For many problems, the default log verbosity may be sufficient to gather the log
entries needed to identify a problem. In some cases, NetBackup support personnel
may request that you increase the logging levels of all logs or for the logs of a
specific service, daemon, or process.

lnxmaster

1 Access the open NetBackup Administration Console window on the master

server system.

2 Select NetBackup Management > Host Properties > Master Servers in the
left pane of the Administration Console.

The host name of the master server (lnxmaster.example.com) is

displayed in the list of master servers in the right pane of the Administration
Console.

3 Click the entry for the master server host name,

lnxmaster.example.com, to highlight the entry.
B
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

4 Select Actions > Properties.

The Master Server Host Properties window is displayed.

5 Click the Logging entry in the Properties list on the left side of the Master
Server Host Properties window.

The default logging level settings are displayed in the Logging window.

The Global logging level setting, located near the top of the Logging window
affects the logging levels for both legacy-style and unified-style logs.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

459 Lab 6: Working with Support Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–239
 The middle section of the window contains logging level settings for some of
the most important services and daemons that use legacy-style debug logging.
If altered, these settings override the Global logging level for the specified
service.
The bottom section of the screen contains logging level settings for some of the
most important services and daemons that use unified-style debug logging. If
altered, these settings override the Global logging level for the specified
service.

6 Allow the logging level settings to remain at their default settings.

7 Click OK to close the Master Server Host Properties window.

Note: When gathering information and log files to send to Symantec technical
support, the Symantec technical support representative may direct you to
change the logging levels. Due to the amount of log information that may
be captured, the size of the log files may grow very quickly. You are
advised not to increase the logging levels unless at the direction of a
Symantec technical support representative.

Note: In addition to the logging level settings that can be set in the Master
Server Host Properties window, logging levels for other NetBackup and
media manager related services, daemons, and processes can be set by
including entries in the bp.conf file (Unix/Linux only) or vm.conf (for
media manager log files)

Refer to the Symantec NetBackup Troubleshooting Guide - UNIX, Windows,

and Linux, Release 7.5 for complete details on setting logging verbosity.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

460
B–240 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Exercise 4: Enabling NetBackup debug logging

In this exercise, you enable legacy-style logging on the master server system for all
NetBackup services and processes that utilize legacy-style logs.

Note: Unified-style logging is enabled by default for all NetBackup services that
use unified-style logging. There is no need to manually initiate logging.

1 Access the console of the master server system.

lnxmaster

2 Type su - root, to become superuser.

3 In the Terminal window, change directory to the /usr/openv/logs

directory.

cd /usr/openv/logs

The logs directory contains a many sub-directories, including: bmrd,

bmrsetup, nbars, nbaudit, nbemm, nbevtmgr, nbftclnt, nbim,
nbjm, and many others. These are directories that house the unified-style logs
on the master server. Unified-style logging is enabled by default. There is no
need to do anything to enable unified-style logging.
B

4 Change directory to the nbjm directory (/usr/openv/logs/nbjm).

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

cd nbjm

5 List the contents of the/usr/openv/logs/nbjm directory.

ls -l

The files displayed are the nbjm logs files. The file name contains the date on
which the file was created, in the form: yymmdd (Example: 120406).

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

461 Lab 6: Working with Support Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–241
 6 In the Terminal window, change directory to the /usr/openv/
netbackup/logs directory.

cd /usr/openv/netbackup/logs

The logs folder contains a number of sub-folders, including: admin,

nbliveup, nbregopsc, and user_ops. Some of these directories house
the unified-style logs on the master server. Unified-style logging is enabled by
default.

Note: Logging for most processes that use legacy-style logs is not enabled by
default. To enable legacy-style logging for a daemon or process, you must
create a directory in the /usr/openv/netbackup/logs directory,
that bears the name of the daemon or process (Examples: bprd, bpbrm,
bptm, bpbkar).

Note: The mklogdir script is used to create the directories for all the
NetBackup daemons and processes that use legacy-style logging. You may
also create the log directories manually, to be more selective in choosing
the NetBackup daemons and processes for which logs are required.

7 Locate the mklogdir file in the logs directory. Do not run the command.

8 Run the following mkdir commands to create log directories for: bprd,
bpbrm, bptm, bpbkar, and tar on the master server system.

– mkdir bprd
– mkdir bpbrm
– mkdir bptm
– mkdir bpbkar
– mkdir tar
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

9 List the contents of the /usr/openv/netbackup/logs directory and

verify the creation of the log directories.

ls -l

10 Change directory to the newly-created bprd directory (/usr/openv/

netbackup/logs/bprd).

cd bprd
CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION
462
B–242 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 11 List the contents of the bprd directory.

ls -l

12 Record your observations of the contents of the bprd directory.

Observations:
The directory is empty.

Note: You created the bprd directory manually. bprd (the NetBackup Request
Daemon) is one of the NetBackup daemons that uses legacy-style logging.
bprd runs continually on the master server system (only). If bprd is
running when the bprd log directory is created, logging does not begin
until bprd is stopped and restarted.

13 Type the command: netbackup stop, and press Enter, to stop all
NetBackup services and processes on the master server system.

netbackup stop

14 Wait for the command prompt to be returned. Verify that the NetBackup
daemons and processes have been stopped by running the bpps -a command.

bpps -a

15 Type the command: netbackup start, and press Enter, to start all B
NetBackup services and processes on the master server system.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

netbackup start

16 Wait for the command prompt to be returned. Verify that the NetBackup
daemons and processes have been started by running the bpps -a command.

bpps -a

17 List the contents of the bprd directory.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

463 Lab 6: Working with Support Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–243
 ls -l

18 Record your observations of the contents of the bprd directory

Observations:
There is a single log file present in the folder. The file name of the log file
has the format log.mmddyy and is associated with today’s date. Each
service, daemon, or process that uses legacy logging creates a single log
file per day.

19 Allow the Terminal window to remain open on the master server system. You
use this window in the next exercise.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

464
B–244 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Exercise 5: Using nbsu and nbcplogs

In this exercise, you use the nbsu and nbcplogs commands to collect
troubleshooting information and log files. The output files generated by these
NetBackup utilities is provided to Symantec, for analysis by NetBackup technical
support representatives to assist you in solving NetBackup or NetBackup-related
problems.

Running nbsu to gather troubleshooting information

In the following steps, you run the nbsu command to gather troubleshooting
information for the NetBackup master server system.

Note: The NetBackup support utility (nbsu) is a command line tool. It queries
the host and gathers appropriate diagnostic information about NetBackup
and the operating system. nbsu provides a wide range of control over the
types of diagnostic information gathered.

The NetBackup support utility (nbsu) writes the information it gathers to text files
in the folder or directory name listed below. The file name of the output file has the
format: hostname_timestamp (Example:
winserver.example.com_mmddyyyyhhmmss

UNIX/Linux-based NetBackup server systems:

/usr/openv/netbackup/bin/support/output/nbsu

Windows-based NetBackup server systems:

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

install_path\NetBackup\bin\support\output\nbsu

1 Access the Terminal window on the master server system. This window is
open from a step in the previous exercise.

2 At the command prompt, type: nbsu -help |more, and press Enter.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

465 Lab 6: Working with Support Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–245
 3 Briefly review the output of the extensive help information provided for nbsu.
Note the six phases of the information gathered by nbsu:

– Determine Operating System environment information

– Determine NetBackup environment information
– Gather diagnostic lists
– Select the diagnostic commands or procedures to execute
– Execute the selected diagnostic commands or procedures
– nbsu final processing

4 Press the spacebar until the command prompt is displayed.

Note: The output file of the nbsu command is written to a directory relative to
the directory you are in when the command is executed. It is recommended
that you create a directory to which the nbsu output should be directed,
and change to that directory before running the command.

5 Execute the command to create a support directory named /support.

mkdir /support

6 Change directory to the new directory:

cd /support

7 Run the nbsu command without any command options:

nbsu
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

8 Monitor the execution of the nbsu command in the Command Prompt

window. The command may take a few minutes to complete.

When gathering of the troubleshooting information has been completed, you

are returned to the command prompt. A prompt in the output of the command
indicates: The results are located in the./output/nbsu/<######>

9 From your current directory location, change directory to ./output/nbsu.

cd ./output/nbsu

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

466
B–246 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 10 List the contents of the directory, and record your observations.

Directory contents of nbsu output:

The directory contains a single directory that contains the output of the
nbsu utility. That directory includes the name of the server system on
which the utility was run (lnxmaster.example.com). The directory
contains a gzip file that holds the information gathered by the utility. This
gz (gnuzip) file is ready to provide to Symantec technical support.

Note: In a troubleshooting situation, you would provide the nbsu output file to
Symantec technical support for analysis.

Running the nbcplogs command

In the following steps, you use the nbcplogs (NetBackup log uploader) to gather
logs files and troubleshooting information in preparation for transfer to Symantec
technical support for analysis.
nbcplogs gathers log files generated by NetBackup and its components on the
system on which the command is initiated, and creates a package that can be
transferred to Symantec technical support for analysis. When provided with a
Symantec case ID and the proper credentials (provided by Symantec technical
support) nbcplogs can automatically perform the file transfer of its output
package.
By default, nbcplogs runs the nbsu utility to gather troubleshooting
information, and includes the nbsu output in the package that is created for B
transfer to Symantec.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

Note: Because nbcplogs includes nbsu data collection, there is no need to use
both commands. Run nbcplogs to gather and transfer both the gathered
troubleshooting information and the gathered log files.

1 In the Terminal window, change directory to /support.

cd /support

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

467 Lab 6: Working with Support Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–247
 2 Use the nbcplogs command to gather troubleshooting information (using
nbsu), and to gather log files for the last 15 minutes of the current day. Write
the output files to /support/nbcplogs-out.

Type the command, and press Enter.

nbcplogs -d 15min /support/nbcplogs-out

3 Monitor the progress of the nbcplogs command execution in the Terminal

window.

4 When the command is ready to write its output file, it prompts:

is there at least XX.X M (MB) disk space available on /support? (Y/N)

Note: The size of the nbcplogs output file varies greatly depending upon the
period of time that you are gathering logs for, and the degree of backup and
restore activity that is occurring on the system. Always check that there is
adequate available disk space on the specified target disk volume to house
the output of the nbcplogs utility.

5 Type Y, and press Enter.

nbcplogs proceeds to gather and write its output file, including the output of
the nbsu command.

This may take several minutes, depending upon the size of the log files that are
gathered.

6 When the creation of the command output is completed, you are returned to the
command prompt.
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

7 In the Terminal window, navigate to the /support/nbcplogs-out

directory.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

468
B–248 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 8 Record the names of the log directories that have been collected by
nbcplogs, and the name of the large tar.gz file that is present in the
directory.

dberrors-logs
db-logs
extra-logs
nbu-logs
trylogs-logs
vault-logs
vxul-logs
hostname_role_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.tar.gz
Example: lnxmaster_master_20120331_143015.tar
Table 1: Folder and tar file names in C:\support\nbcplogs-out

9 The output of the nbcplogs file is ready to send to Symantec.

Note: nbcplogs gathers troubleshooting and log information only from the
system on which it was executed. In a production NetBackup environment
it is often necessary to collect troubleshooting and log information from
other NetBackup systems, from media servers and clients, in addition to
collecting the information from the master server.

10 Close any open Computer windows.

11 Close any open Command Prompt windows. B

Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

End of lab

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

469 Lab 6: Working with Support Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
B–249
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

470
B–250 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 Symantec Acronym Glossary
A D
AMS Altiris Asset Management Suite DA Enterprise Vault Discovery
Accelerator
ASD Application Service Dashboard
DC Enterprise Vault Discovery Collector
AT Symantec Production Authentication
Services DCO Data Change Object
ATRS Altiris Third-Party Add-on DDL Device Discovery Layer
Solutions
DLP Data Loss Prevention
AV AntiVirus
DMP Veritas Dynamic Multi-Pathing

B DS Altiris Deployment Solution

BE Backup Exec DRA Disaster Recovery Advisor
BESBS Backup Exec for Windows
Small Business Server E
BCM Business Continuity Management EE Enterprise Edition

BCS Business Critical Services EEE Enterprise Edition for Endpoints

BCS-AA Business Critical Services EEG Enterprise Edition for Gateway

Advanced Access EES Enterprise Edition for Servers
EMM Enterprise Media Manager
C
CA Enterprise Vault Compliance ER CommandCentral Enterprise
Accelerator Reporter

CCS Control Compliance Suite EUDPD EU Data Protection Directive

CE Corporate Edition EVOM Enterprise Vault Operation

Manager
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CFS Storage Foundation Cluster File

System EVORT Enterprise Vault OWA Resource
Tool
CMS Altiris Client Management Suite
EVPM Enterprise Vault Policy Manager
CSAPI Content Scanning Application
Programming Interface
G
CVM Cluster Volume Manager GCO Global Cluster Option
GE Gaming Edition
GIN Global Intelligence Network

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

471 Symantec Acronym Glossary Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
1
 GSS Ghost Solution Suite P
PE Personal Edition or Professional
I Edition
IF Information Foundation pcA pcAnywhere
IMM IM Manager PDDO PureDisk Deduplication Option
ISTR Incident Security Threat Report PDLinux PureDisk Linux
ITMS Altiris IT Management Suite PGP Pretty Good Privacy
PKI VeriSign Public Key Infrastructure
L Services
LUA LiveUpdate Administrator
R
M RPS Remote Product Specialist
ME Mobile Edition
RTSM Real-Time System Manager
MMS Mobile Management Suite
MSDP Media Server Deduplication S
Process (MSDP) SBE Small Business Edition
MSS Managed Security Services SCSP Symantec Critical System
Protection
N SDS Symantec Database Security
N360 Norton 360
SE Starter Edition
NAV Norton AntiVirus
SEE Symantec Endpoint Encryption
NBU Symantec NetBackup
SEP Symantec Endpoint Protection
NBU PD Symantec NetBackup PureDisk
SEPM Symantec Endpoint Protection
NGNP Next Generation Network Manager
Protection
SESC Symantec Email Submission
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

NIS Norton Internet Security Client

NISM Norton Internet Security for SEV Symantec Endpoint Virtualization
Macintosh
SF Veritas Storage Foundation
NOBU Norton Online Backup
SFCFS Storage Foundation Cluster File
NS Symantec Notification Server System
SIEM Security and Information Event
O Management
OOB Out of Band Management
SII Secure Internet Interface

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

472
2 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
 SIM Symantec Incident Manager or V
Symantec Installation Manager
VAC Vault Administration Console
SLP Storage Lifecycle Policy (Enterprise Vault)

SMG Symantec Messaging Gateway VCM Veritas Configuration Manager

SMP Symantec Multi-tier Protection or VCS Veritas Cluster Server

Symantec Management Platform
VIP Symantec Validation and ID
SMS Symantec Mail Security or Altiris Protection Service or VMware Intelligent
Server Management Suite Policy

SMSS Mobile Security Suite for VOM Veritas Operations Manager

Windows Mobile
VPAM Veritas Process Automation
SNAC Symantec Network Access Manager
Control VPM Veritas Provisioning Manager
SODP Symantec On-Demand Protection
VSA Vault Service Account
SORT Symantec Operations Readiness
VFR Veritas File Replicator
Tools
VVR Veritas Volume Replicator
SPC Symantec Protection Center
VxFS Veritas File System
SPN Symantec Protection Network
VxVM Veritas Volume Manager
SPS Symantec Protection Suite
SRAS Symantec Risk Automation Suite W
SSAP Symantec Security Awareness WF Symantec Workflow
Program
WPS Wise Package Studio
SSE Symantec Scan Engine
WSM Web Security Monitoring
SSIM Symantec Security Information
Manager
SSR Symantec System Recovery
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

SVA Symantec Vulnerability Assessment

SWC/R Symantec Workspace Corporate/
Remote
SWG Symantec Web Gateway
SWS Symantec Workspace Streaming
SWV Symantec Workspace
Virtualization

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

473 Symantec Acronym Glossary Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.
3
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.

CONFIDENTIAL - NOT FOR DISTRIBUTION

474
4 Symantec NetBackup 7.5: Manage and Administer
Copyright © 2012 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved.